Calexico City Council
August 10, 2022

2. Do not pile excavated material, equipment, construction materials, or anything else on top of branches or against the tree trunks.

3. Notify Owner of any potential impact to any protected tree or plant, and do not damage, move or otherwise harm said tree or plant prior to investigation and direction from Owner.

4. Costs associated with damage to protected trees or plants shall be sole responsibility of Contractor.

Project Owner TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 50 00 - 7

5. Protect, or replace in kind, at no additional cost to Owner, existing irrigation and landscape facilities affected by Work. Irrigation system record drawing information is typically missing or incomplete. Therefore, Contract Documents do not show details of existing irrigation system. Locate irrigation piping, spray heads, control wiring, and controllers and modify all components of irrigation system during progress of Work to continue irrigating existing landscaping and vegetation as necessary to maintain health of existing plants, trees, and vegetation.

1.18 Site Security
A. Safely guard Work, materials, equipment and property from loss, theft, damage and vandalism. Project site is subject to vandalism, any site security fencing considered shall take that into account. Contractor's duty to safely guard property shall include Owner's property and other private property from injury or loss in connection with performance of Contract.

B. Upon completion of each day’s work, leave Work area secure and free of hazards. Provide necessary temporary signs, warning devices, chain link fences, and barricades.

C. Employ security staff as needed to provide required security and prevent unauthorized entry.

D. Make no claim against Owner for damage resulting from trespass. Owner is not responsible for items lost, damaged, or stolen from construction or storage areas or for injuries to public due to unsafe conditions.

E. Party responsible for security shall make good all damage to property of Owner and others arising from failure to provide adequate security.

F. If existing fencing or barriers are breached or removed for purposes of construction, provide and maintain temporary security fencing equal to existing in a manner satisfactory to Owner.

G. Protect temporary and permanent fence, gate, and driveway openings to prevent intrusion by unauthorized persons. Bear responsibility for protection of Work and material on site of Work when openings are not closed. Provide temporary fencing around construction staging area.

Fence temporary openings when openings are no longer necessary.

H. Provide temporary access to adjacent properties during non-construction hours.

I. During night hours, weekends, holidays, and other times when no work is performed at site, provide temporary closures or enlist services of security guards to protect temporary openings.

J. Maintain security program throughout construction until Owner's acceptance and occupancy precludes need for Contractor's security program. Remove surveillance system following notice of substantial completion.

K. All costs for security as specified in this Section shall be borne by Contractor.

1.19 Existing Conditions
A. Nothing in this section shall relieve Contractor of responsibility to fully examine Contract Documents and site where Work is to be performed in accordance with General Conditions; to be familiar with local conditions and federal, state, and local laws, rules and regulations that may affect performance of Work; to study available surveys and investigative reports about subsurface and latent physical conditions pertaining to worksite; to perform such additional surveys and investigations as Contractor deems necessary to complete Work at bid price; and to correlate results of such data with requirements of Contract Documents.

B. If dispute arises between Owner and Contractor involving hazardous waste and whether site conditions differ materially from those Contractor could or should have discovered by investigations required by these Contract Documents, Contractor shall not be excused from scheduled completion date provided in Contract Documents and shall proceed with all Work in the manner and in time required by Contract Documents.

Project Owner TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 50 00 - 8

1.20 Unit Prices
A. Payment for water furnished by Contractor for construction use will be included in price bid for items to which it is appurtenant. Payment under these items will include full compensation for furnishing labor, products, tools and equipment and doing work necessary to develop sufficient water supply and furnishing necessary equipment for applying water as specified.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for temporary facilities and controls.

C. Payment for power furnished by Contractor for construction use will be included in price bid for items to which it is appurtenant. Payment under these items will include full compensation for furnishing labor, products, tools, and equipment and doing work necessary to obtain and distribute power for construction purposes.

D. Payment for other temporary utilities furnished by Contractor for construction use will be included in price bid for items to which it is appurtenant. Payment under these items will include full compensation for furnishing labor, products, tools, and equipment and doing work necessary to obtain and distribute power for construction purposes.

E. Payment for providing construction aids to be furnished by Contractor in support of construction activities will be included in price bid for items to which it is appurtenant. Payment under these items will include full compensation for furnishing labor, products, tools, and equipment and doing work necessary to obtain, distribute, and use temporary utilities for construction purposes.

F. Payment for dust control, including dust palliatives and water supply and application will be included in price bid for Work items for which dust control during construction is required.

G. Payment for costs arising from fire or prevention of fire will be included in price bid for items of work for which fire protection during construction is needed.

H. Payment for noise control facilities will be included in price bid for items of Work where noise control facilities are required during construction.

I. Payment for providing site security will be included in price bid for items to which it is appurtenant. Payment under these items will include full compensation for furnishing labor, products, tools, and equipment and doing work necessary to comply with site security requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used)

END OF SECTION
Project Owner FIELD OFFICES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 52 13 - 1
SECTION 01 52 13

FIELD OFFICES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Temporary field office and accessory equipment for Owner.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 10 03: Coordination
B. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
C. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
D. Section 01 50 00: Temporary Facilities and Controls

1.3 Temporary Owner Field Office Building and Access
A. Provide trailer or, with Owner's consent, construct or rent separate field office building for Owner. Field office and appurtenances or accessories shall remain Contractor's property until project completion.

B. Remove field office from site after acceptance of Work by Owner.

C. Building shall be watertight. Field office characteristics shall be as specified below in Table 1.

1. Provide 8’-minimum ceiling height.

2. Provide offices, restroom, and workroom as specified.

3. Portable toilet may be provided if no sewer connection is available.

4. Provide windows in building, with at least one window for each room.

5. Provide 2 entrance doors to building, one at each end.

6. Provide cylinder lock and key on each door. Provide 6 sets of keys to Owner.

7. Insulate walls and ceiling.

D. If multiple rooms are required per Table 1:

1. Provide floor-to-ceiling walls to separate rooms. Do not use temporary partitions.

2. Provide inter-connecting doors.

3. Provide floor tiles in each room.

E. Provide exterior lights.

F. Provide exterior stairs and railings.

G. Provide utilities, including hot and cold water, gas, electricity, telephone service, and Internet access.

H. Provide janitorial service.

I. Provide monthly pest control.

J. Pay costs for utilities including installation costs and monthly charges.

K. Provide all-weather vehicle access and parking.

1.4 Accessory Equipment
A. Provide electrical fixtures, outlets, lighting, and wiring using Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL) approved devices and meeting National Electrical Code (NEC).

Project Owner FIELD OFFICES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 52 13 - 2
B. Protect electrical circuits with circuit breakers – fuses are not acceptable.

C. Provide warm white light fixtures to evenly illuminate rooms to at least 50 foot-candles and average of 70 foot-candles measured at desk height. Provide minimum 60-watt light fixture in lavatory facility. Provide light switch in each room.

D. Provide at least 3 duplex 120-volt outlets in each room (one only in restroom).

E. Provide telephone and T1 service to trailer. Provide at least one telephone outlet per office.

1.5 Unit Prices
A. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for field offices.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used)
TABLE 1: REQUIRED CLASS B FIELD OFFICE CHARACTERISTICS

ITEM SPECIFICATION
Office Class Class B
Square Footage 250 square feet
Number of Office Rooms 2 minimum
Windows Quantity At least 1 per room
Minimum Area 22 square feet
Window Treatment Horizontal louver blinds on each window Doors Entrance Doors 2 (one at each end of building)
Rating Exterior – Security rated
Door Locks Cylinder deadbolt lock and key
Provide 6 sets of keys
Utilities Air Conditioning Required
Thermostatically controlled
Telephone Service Required
High-Speed Internet Service Required
Furniture Desk One 3’x6’ desk with drawers and locks
Table One 4’x8’ table
Drafting Table One 4’x6’ table
with drafting machine and parallel bar
Chairs 4 cushioned office swivel chairs
8 cushioned folding chairs
Drafting Stools 1 cushioned drafting stool
Plan Rack 1 with 6 metal stick files
Filing Cabinet One 18”wide x 30”deep x 52” high
4 drawers with locks
Bookcase One 12” deep x 48” long x 60” high
5 adjustable shelves
Project Owner FIELD OFFICES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 52 13 - 3

ITEM SPECIFICATION
Whiteboard 4’ x 6’ with multi-colored marker set
Office Equipment Printer/copy machine
8½”x11” and 11” x 17” paper
Scanner
Bottled water service with hot and cold water
One 3-hole punch
One 2-hole punch
Two Standard size staplers
Two Scotch tape dispensers
One Eagle Zephyr date stamp
Wastebasket 2
Sanitary
Facilities
Toilet Required
Shower Not required
Wash Basin and Mirror Required
Fixtures Towel Rack Required
Medicine Cabinet Required
Toilet Paper Dispenser Required
Soap Dispenser Required
Paper Towel Cabinet Required
Exhaust
Fan
Required

END OF SECTION
Project Owner FIELD OFFICES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 52 13 - 4

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Project Owner TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 57 23 - 1
SECTION 01 57 23

TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plans and pollution prevention during construction.

B. Refer to Section 33 01 30 for requirements for spill prevention, control, and countermeasure plans (SPCCP’s).

C. Contractor shall prepare SWPPP for project.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
B. Section 01 50 00: Temporary Facilities and Controls
C. Section 01 74 00: Cleaning and Waste Management
D. Section 33 01 30: Bypassing Operations

1.3 References
A. California Stormwater Quality Association (CASQA) Stormwater Best Management Practice Handbook for Construction
B. Statewide General Construction Stormwater Permit

1.4 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Working Drawing
Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan
(SWPPP)
Submit per Working Drawing requirements
Refer to Paragraph 1.5 below
Spill Prevention, Control, and
Countermeasure Plan (SPCCP)
Refer to Section 33 01 30

1.5 Pollution Prevention and Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP)

1. Comply with current California State Water Control Board (SWRCB) General Construction Activity NPDES Stormwater Permit (General Construction Permit) for construction disturbing one acre or more of land (including staging areas, access routes, material storage yards, etc.) Prepare Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) and Monitoring Plan (MP) using site specific Best Management Practices (BMPs) to prevent impairment to surface water quality from construction site discharges to surface waters.

2. Pay fines associated with failure to comply with Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) requirements of the Colorado River Basin Regional Water Quality Control Board.

B. Prohibit rain runoff or other water from entering pipe trenches and infiltrating to groundwater by redirecting surface flows with berms, temporary drains, or other suitable measures. Pump water out of trenches as necessary to control water in excavations.

Project Owner TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 57 23 - 2
C. Construct silt fence around disturbed soil areas. Prevent erosion and transport of sediment into waterways in accordance with SWPPP. Stockpile excavated material within construction staging area. Cover stockpiles with plastic sheets to prevent erosion.

D. Pay fines associated with failure to deploy, maintain, repair, and operate facilities necessary to prevent damage from erosion or impounding of water, prevent erosion and discharge of sediments, and control and abate water pollution, except where such fines are assessed due to the sole negligence of Owner.

E. Where a SWPPP has been prepared for project, comply fully with requirements of SWPPP governing Contractor’s operations and record keeping requirements.

1.6 Watershed Protection
A. Enforce strict on-site handling rules to keep construction and maintenance materials out of receiving waters.

1. Store reserve fuel supplies only within confines of designated construction staging area.

2. Refuel equipment only within designated construction staging area.

3. Regularly inspect construction vehicles for leaks.

B. Clearly mark and stake construction and staging areas shown on Plans. Do not use heavy equipment outside this area. Design construction staging areas to contain contaminants such as oil, grease, and fuel products, so they do not drain towards receiving waters or storm drain inlets. If heavy-construction equipment is stored overnight adjacent to a potential receiving water, place drip pans beneath machinery engine block and hydraulic systems.

C. Conduct storm water management operations and maintain controls as needed to prevent runoff or seepage from entering excavations and to control erosion in conformance with Federal, State and local regulations.

1. Retain sediment from areas disturbed by construction on site, using structural controls required by Statewide General Construction Stormwater Permit.

2. Contain stockpiles of soil to minimize sediment transport from site to streets, drainage facilities, or adjoining property by wind, vehicle tracking, or runoff as required by Statewide General Construction Stormwater Permit.

3. Implement appropriate Best Management Practices (BMP’s) for construction related materials, wastes, spills, or residues. Minimize transport from site to streets, drainage facilities, or adjoining property by wind, vehicle tracking, or runoff as required by Statewide General Construction Stormwater Permit.

4. Contain runoff from equipment and vehicle washing at Work sites. Do not allow runoff to discharge to receiving waters or local storm drain systems.

5. Inform workers and subcontractors of required BMP’s and housekeeping measures for Work site and staging areas.

6. At end of each workday, sweep roadways clean, and collect and dispose of construction debris in trash or recycle bins.

7. Maintain construction sites in such condition storms do not carry wastes or pollutants off site. Discharges of materials other than stormwater (non-stormwater discharges) are prohibited except as authorized by individual NPDES permit or Statewide General Construction Stormwater Permit.

8. Pollutants include solid or liquid chemical spills, wastes from paints, stains, sealants, solvents, detergents, glues, lime, cement, pesticide, herbicide, fertilizer, wood preservatives, asbestos fibers, paint fakes, stucco fragments, fuels, oils, lubricants, hydraulic, radiator, or battery fluids, concrete and related cutting or curing residues, Project Owner TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 57 23 - 3
floatable wastes, wastes from engine/equipment steam cleaning or chemical degreasing, street cleaning waste, and super-chlorinated potable water from line flushings and testing.

9. Containment of pollutants during construction shall occur in specified and controlled temporary (2-day maximum) on-site disposal area physically separated from potential stormwater runoff.

10. Disposal of pollutants shall conform to local, State, and Federal requirements.

11. Dewatering of contaminated groundwater or discharging contaminated soils via surface erosion is prohibited.

12. Dewatering of non-contaminated groundwater requires a National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit from the appropriate Regional Water Quality Control Board.

13. Legally dispose of surface water, discharges from well development and test pumping operations, and subsurface water. Do not allow mud, silt, or debris to flow onto adjoining or public property.

1.7 Unit Prices
A. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for temporary storm water pollution control and compliance with SWPPP requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used)

END OF SECTION
Project Owner TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 57 23 - 4

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Project Owner PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 63 00 - 1
SECTION 01 63 00

PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope
A. Acceptable manufacturers, accepted alternates, and procedures for seeking product substitutions.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
B. Section 01 64 50: System Integrators

1.3 General Requirements
A. Pursuant to Public Contracting Code §3400, Owners may make findings designating certain “sole source” materials, products, things or services provided by specific brand or trade name for statutorily enumerated purposes.

B. Public Contracting Code §3400 is very often inapplicable to maintenance and construction projects performed by Owners of water and wastewater utility systems.

C. When Public Contracting Code §3400 is inapplicable, Owner’s general policy powers authorize it to specify “sole source” equipment and products for reasons, including, but not limited to, Owner’s need to establish uniform, complete and compatible equipment and product specifications, to help establish reliability, durability, uniformity, parts availability, repair and maintenance savings, and training improvements for Owner staff.

D. Pursuant to California Public Contract Code §3400, Deadline for receipt of Substitution Requests shall expire at 5:00 P.M. Pacific Standard Time, 7 calendar days before / after date of bid opening published in Notice Inviting Bids.

E. Standard Products - Where products are specified solely by reference standard, any product meeting standards referenced may be used. Information on such products shall be submitted in accordance with requirements of Section 01 33 00.

F. Proprietary Products - Where products or processes are specified by trade, patent or proprietary name, said specification, unless marked "no exceptions", shall be deemed to be followed by the words "or equal accepted in writing by Owner’s Representative." In such case substitution of similar products as “accepted equals” will be considered under this section.

G. Selection of Proprietary Product - Where more than one proprietary name is specified, Contractor may provide any one of products specified or submit a request for an “or equal” substitution consistent with paragraph C above.

H. Only one Manufacturer shall be used for each specific application throughout Work notwithstanding that similar materials or equipment of 2 or more Manufacturers or producers may be specified for same application.

I. Systems of Like Manufacture - Where products are specified in groups to be furnished by one Manufacturer, no substitution will be considered that is not similarly furnished by one Manufacturer. Where Contractor proposes to use a system of equipment other than that shown in the Contract Documents, propose the substitution as a complete system.

J. Substitution Request Procedure Before Bid Opening - Submit written request on enclosed form for proposed substitutions to Owner’s Representative prior to deadline for receipt of substitution requests. Submit proposed substitutions relating to a particular subcontract or trade in one package. If Owner accepts any proposed substitutions, such acceptance will be set forth by addendum. No substitution will be considered after deadline for receipt of substitution requests has expired unless accompanied by an offer of savings to Owner.

Project Owner PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 63 00 - 2
K. Substitution Request Procedure After Bid Opening – Owner will only consider substitutions after bid opening based upon inherent value offered by the substitution as determined by the Owner. Submit written request on enclosed form to Owner’s Representative. Submit proposed substitutions relating to a particular subcontract or trade in one package. If Owner accepts any proposed substitutions, such acceptance will be set forth by change order.

L. Contractor's Responsibility for Construction Modifications - Drawings have been detailed in compliance with dimensions and International Code Council (ICC) Evaluation Report data for products specified. If proposed substitute product is accepted by Owner’s Representative, Contractor shall assume both responsibility for construction modifications and additional costs required by reason of this acceptance. If substitution decreases Contractor’s cost, potential savings to Owner may be submitted to Owner’s Representative for consideration.

M. No time extension will be allowed for substitution of materials.

1.4 Standardization of Equipment and Certain Materials
A. Systems of Like Manufacture - To ensure standardization and uniformity in all parts of Work and to provide Owner with inter-changeability capabilities, simplified spare parts inventory, and standardized maintenance programs and Manufacturers' services, where products are specified in groups to be furnished by one Manufacturer, no substitution will be considered not similarly furnished by one Manufacturer. Where Contractor proposes to use system of equipment other than that shown in Contract Documents, substitution shall be proposed as complete system.

B. Material items exempt from standardization include structural steel, reinforcing steel, fasteners and bolting materials, building insulation, sheet metal, materials specified only by reference to recognized standard, and items hidden from view where inter-changeability, color, and texture is no significant factor for standardization.

C. Contractor shall inform their suppliers and subcontractors of these requirements, and shall provide necessary coordination to accomplish standardization specified.

D. Pursuant to California Public Contract Code §3400(b), Owner reserves right to reject product substitutions (1) on the basis of maintenance of economies of scale available to Owner through standardizing of Manufacturers and minimizing spare parts inventories, or (2) if Owner has provided in Invitation for Bids that product is necessary to (i) field test or experiment to determine product’s suitability for future use, (ii) match other products in use on a completed public improvement or one in the course of completion, (iii) obtain a necessary item only available from one source, or (iv) respond to an emergency declared in accordance with requirements of California Public Contract Code §3400(c)(4).

1.5 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Substitution Request
Form
Submit Substitution Request on form furnished below.

Contractor’s
Certification of
Performance and
Assumption of
Liability
Submit Certificate of Performance certifying proposed
substitution is equal to or better in all respects to product specified and proposed substitution will, in all respects perform function for which it is intended.

Certificate of
Compliance
Submit as needed to substantiate Product Substitutions
Project Owner PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 63 00 - 3

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Dimensional Data: Submit for Product Substitutions
Material Samples Submit as needed to substantiate Product Substitutions Manufacturer’s
Statement of
Responsibility
Submit at Owner’s discretion for Product Substitutions. See form at rear of Section 01 33 00.

Foundry or Test
Record Transcripts
Submit as needed to substantiate Product Substitutions
Material List and
Ratings
Submit as needed to substantiate Product Substitutions
Names and
Addresses of Nearest
Local Manufacturer’s
Representatives
Submit for Product Substitutions (Use allotted space on attached Substitution Request Form)
List of 3 Local Product
Installations
Names and contact information for 3 installations within 150-mile radius of project completed in prior 3 years. Required for Product Substitutions (Use allotted space on attached Substitution Request Form)
Manufacturer’s
Service Contract
Statement of
Qualifications
Submit for installations of products which include optional maintenance service contracts.

Warranty Furnish warranty equal to or better than warranty required for specified product.

Contractor shall warrant proposed substitution, if accepted, will provide performance equivalent of specified materials.

B. Determination of Equality - Burden of proof of equality of substituted item shall be on Contractor. Acceptance of such substitutions is entirely at Owner’s discretion.

C. List of Accepted Substitutions - Owner will issue to bidders by addendum a list setting forth accepted substitutions. No products proposed for substitution, shall be ordered before being accepted in writing by Owner’s Representative.

D. Products accepted as "accepted equals" shall, in Owner's opinion, meet the following requirements:

1. Products shall be of equal quality, substance and function to those listed.

2. Architectural finishes and colors of accepted equals shall, in Owner’s opinion be compatible with existing finishes and colors.

3. Products shall be standard products of a reputable Manufacturer having regularly been engaged for 5 years in manufacture of products furnished.

4. Products shall have a reputation for assuring long-lasting trouble-free service.

Project Owner PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 63 00 - 4

5. Factory-authorized, factory-trained and competent service personnel and stocked service parts shall be available within a 150-mile radius of Work.

6. Manufacturer shall be capable of certifying compliance with listed reference standards.

E. System integrators accepted as "accepted equals" shall, in Owner's opinion, meet the following requirements:

1. System integrator, including key personnel assigned to project shall have regularly been engaged for 5 years in system integration of products furnished.

2. Work provided by system integrator on prior projects shall have a reputation for delivering long-lasting trouble-free service.

3. Key personnel proposed for work on project shall be factory-trained and competent fulltime employees of system integrator, and shall reside within a 150-mile radius of Work.

4. System integrator shall maintain inventory of stocked service parts available within a 150- mile radius of Work.

5. System integrator shall be capable of certifying compliance with listed reference standards.

F. Denial of Substitution - If, in Owner’s opinion, proposed substitution is not equal to or better in every material respect to specified product, or was not submitted for acceptance in manner outlined above, Contractor shall furnish products specified.

G. Responsibility for Coordinating Substitutions with Construction Trades – Inform all other trades, vendors, and subcontractors of effects of substitutions on their Work or products.

Failure to so notify shall not relieve Contractor of their duty to make payments arising from alterations in specified products or methods needed to complete Work in acceptable manner.

1.6 Contractor's Responsibility for Cost of Substitution Reviews A. Pay costs incurred by Owner’s Representative and Owner to review Requests for Substitutions.

1.7 Responsibility for Spare Part Inventories
A. Provide spare parts inventory for 2 years’ typical maintenance. See technical specifications for further information for specific equipment items.

1.8 Bid Shopping and Reverse Auctions
A. Substitutions for products and services of Manufacturers, system integrators, or subcontractors listed at time of bid and/or in Contractor’s initial Submittal will only be permitted under one or more of the following circumstances:

1. Where Contractor offers a credit to Owner sufficient in Owner’s opinion to justify accepting substitution by Change Order.

2. Where Contractor-listed manufacturer, system integrator or subcontractor has gone out of business.

3. Where Contractor-listed manufacturer, system integrator or subcontractor has, in Owner’s opinion, failed to perform or no longer possesses both capability and willingness to perform to standard required by Contract Documents.

4. Where Contractor-listed manufacturer, supplier or subcontractor increases price quoted to Contractor above that quoted at time of bid, and Contractor submits evidence of this acceptable to Owner.

5. With respect to subcontractors listed at time of bid, substitution is for circumstances permitted by California Public Code §4107.

Project Owner PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 63 00 - 5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Manufacturers shall have experience in manufacturing materials and equipment of same size or larger than Work specified.

B. For a Manufacturer to be deemed acceptable to provide Work on this project, they shall show evidence of 5 separate, substantially similar installations in satisfactory operation for at least 3 years.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used)
Project Owner PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 63 00 - 6

SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
TO: _____________________________
Owner
_____________________________
Address
_____________________________
City/State/ZIP
PROJECT NAME: _____________________________________________________________ FROM CONTRACTOR: ________________________________________________________ We hereby submit for consideration the following product substitution of specified item for above project:

DRAWING OR SHEET NUMBER
SECTION NO. OR PARAGRAPH SPECIFIED ITEM
____________ _______________ ___________________________________ ____________ _______________ ___________________________________ ____________ _______________ ___________________________________ ____________ _______________ ___________________________________ PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION: ____________________________________________________ Attach brief description of reason for proposed substitution.

Attach complete dimensional information and technical data needed to substantiate product substitution, including ICBO reports and laboratory tests, if applicable.

Include complete information on changes to Drawings and/or Specifications which proposed substitution will require for its proper installation.

Where product substitutions are proposed at multiple locations, submit copies of plans showing in red each location where the product substitution is proposed.

Submit with request necessary samples and substantiating data to prove equal quality and performance to that which is specified. Clearly mark manufacturer's literature to indicate equality in performance.

Differences in quality of materials and construction shall be indicated.

Submit Manufacturer’s Statement of Responsibility.

Project Owner PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 63 00 - 7

SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
Fill in Blanks Below:

A. Does the substitution affect dimensions shown on Drawings? Yes No If yes, attach copy of plans and clearly indicate changes.

B. Will the undersigned pay for changes to building design, including engineering, detailing and review costs caused by requested substitution? Yes No ___ C. What effect does substitution have on other trades?

1._______________________________________________________________________

2. _______________________________________________________________________

3. _______________________________________________________________________ D. What effect does substitution have on applicable code requirements?

1._______________________________________________________________________

2. _______________________________________________________________________

3. _______________________________________________________________________ E. What is the ICC Approval Number?
F. Differences between proposed substitution and specified item:

1._______________________________________________________________________

2. _______________________________________________________________________

3. _______________________________________________________________________ G. List three installations where product is in use:

1._______________________________________________________________________

2. _______________________________________________________________________

3. _______________________________________________________________________ H. Address of Authorized Manufacturer’s Representative:
________________________________________________________________ Representative
________________________________________________________________ Address
________________________________________________________________ City/State/ZIP
I. Manufacturer's guarantees of proposed and specified items are:

Same Different (Explain)
J. Owner’s share of cost savings if substitution is accepted $_________________________

Project Owner PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 63 00 - 8

SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION OF PERFORMANCE AND ASSUMPTION OF LIABILITY FOR

EQUAL PERFORMANCE
I certify the proposed substitution is equal to or
better in all respects to the product specified and
that the proposed substitution will, in all respects
perform the function for which it is intended.

Submitted By:

Signature Title
Firm
Address
Telephone Date
For use by Design Engineer:

Accepted
Accepted as Noted
Not Accepted
Received Too Late
By
Date
Remarks
Concurrence By:

Owner
Signature must be by person having authority to legally bind his firm to the above terms. Failure to provide legally binding signature will result in retraction of acceptance.

END OF SECTION
Project Owner SYSTEM INTEGRATORS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 64 50 - 1
SECTION 01 64 50

SYSTEM INTEGRATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Owner has elected to require use of System Integrators for the following systems.

1. Building automation systems.

2. HVAC systems.

3. Pump station pump control systems.

4. Automatic Trash Screen Rake control systems.

5. SCADA systems.

B. Refer to Section 40 63 43 for programmable logic controller (PLC) requirements.

A. Pump control system shall be complete integrated system interlocked with MCC, VFDs, starters, level instrumentation, operational instrumentation, telemetry/radio, SCADA, and PLC controller.

C. System integrators shall assume responsibility for performance of complete integrated control systems.

D. This section covers Owner and Contractor responsibilities surrounding use of System Integrators.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 10 02: Sequence of Operation
B. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
C. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
D. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
E. Section 01 66 00: Product Storage and Handling Requirements F. Section 40 63 43: Programmable Logic Controllers

1.3 “Sole-Source” System Integrators
A. The following shall apply where Owner has listed one “sole-source” System Integrator, such as “Tesco”.

1. Where Owner has obtained quotations from system integrators to perform work on a solesource basis, these are appended to Contract Documents for Contractor’s reference.

2. Contractor shall contact sole-source System Integrators before bid and ascertain to their satisfaction what is and is not included in scope of services being offered by system integrator for fee quoted.

3. Work required to complete contract but not expressly listed in quotation from system integrator shall be accomplished by Contractor at no additional charge.

4. In the event System Integrator “sole-sourced” by Owner fails to perform to Owner’s satisfaction, Owner’s claim against Contractor for System Integrator’s failure shall be limited to fee quoted by “sole-source” System Integrator.

Project Owner SYSTEM INTEGRATORS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 64 50 - 2

1.4 Submittals
A. If a bidder desires to use System Integrators not listed in this section, Contractor shall follow procedures outlined in Section 01 63 00 and shall provide complete submittal package described therein prior to deadline for receipt of Substitution Requests.

B. Furnish the following submittals with bid or within 72 hours following bid opening. Failure to submit required information on time will cause bid to be considered non-responsive and rejected.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Equipment
Qualifications
Submit documentary evidence of 3 California installations where equipment has been in satisfactory operation for at least 5 years.

System Integrator
Subcontractor
Qualifications
Submit documentary evidence subcontractor has been in
business in California for at least 5 years
Submit name of proposed system integrator along with
documentary evidence proposed system integrator has worked in such capacity in employ of subcontractor at least 3 years and has completed at least 3 installations of product.

Submit evidence of UL, CSIA Level 1, and ISA certification for system integrator.

Submit evidence of system integrator’s PE registration as professional engineer
Submit evidence of ISA certification of technician who will be performing startup and testing services.

Submit documentation of employees’ cognizance and ability to comply with all Federal and State OSHA regulations regarding confined space entry.

C. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Working Drawings Submit per Working Drawing requirements detailing removal operations and showing methods and sequence of removal and equipment to be used.

Shop Drawings Refer to requirements for Shop Drawing submittals under sections for each item of equipment being integrated into system.

Product Data Refer to requirements for Product Data submittals under sections for each item of equipment being integrated into system.

Installation
Instructions
Refer to requirements for Installation Instruction submittals under sections for each item of equipment being integrated into system.

Project Owner SYSTEM INTEGRATORS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 64 50 - 3

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
O & M Instructions Refer to requirements for Operation and Maintenance Instruction submittals under sections for each item of equipment being integrated into system.

Certificate of
Compliance
Submit coating system and application certification per Certificate of Compliance requirements.

Submit sustainable design certifications specified
For LEED NC Credit IEQ 4.1, submit Product Data for sealant and sealant primers applied inside weather envelope. Include statement of VOC content.

For LEED for Schools Credit EQ 4, submit Product Data and laboratory test reports for sealant and sealant primers applied inside weather envelope. Include statement of VOC content and certification of compliance.

For sealants specified to meet volatile organic emission standards of the Greenguard Children and Schools Certification, submit Greenguard Certificate.

Manufacturer’s
Statement of
Responsibility
Submit per Manufacturer’s Statement of Responsibility
requirements.

Test Record
Transcripts
Submit for factory tests Test Record Transcript requirements.

Material Samples Submit upon request.

Welder Qualification
Certificates
Submit
Motor Data Required per motor data requirements of Section 26 05 10.

Warranty Furnish 3-year warranty from date of final acceptance.

D. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for definition of requirements for Working Drawings, Shop Drawings, Product Data, Installation Instructions, O&M instructions, Certificates of Compliance, Engineering Calculations, Manufacturer’s Statements of Responsibility, Foundry or Test Record Transcripts, and Material Samples.

1.5 System Integrator’s Service Contract and Warranty
A. A 3-year parts-and-labor non-prorated warranty from System Integrator is required, extending from date of Owner’s final acceptance. Warranty need not exceed 5 years from date of shipping of System Integrator-furnished products.

B. System Integrator’s warranty shall include warranty and support of all components and subcomponents furnished and installed by the System Integrator or under their supervision.

C. Failure of System Integrator to install equipment properly or according to Manufacturer’s installation requirements shall not void System Integrator’s warranty responsibilities.

Project Owner SYSTEM INTEGRATORS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 64 50 - 4
D. System Integrator shall have right of inspection of any work by others which interfaces with their work, and shall notify Owner of any observed defective work prior to project completion which may impact the serviceability of the disinfection system. Failure to notify Owner of improper work shall nullify subsequent claims by System Integrator that defective workmanship is not covered by System Integrator’s warranty.

E. Warranty shall cover parts, labor and prompt service for repair of defects, performance failure or damage due to normal wear and tear, or due to any cause other than acts of God, Owner’s failure to perform minimum maintenance as set forth in O&M instructions furnished with warranty, or intentional or active and extreme abuse of product.

F. Warranties shall cover Owner’s full cost of restoring non-functional components to their full function as described in Contract Documents and in Manufacturer’s published literature.

Prorated warranties will not be accepted. Replacement of damaged parts with old or recycled parts will not be accepted.

1.6 Unit Prices
A. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for system integrators.

B. Where System Integrators have been “sole-sourced,” the stipulated lump sum quotation provided by System Integrators has been inserted into the bid form without markup.

C. Any allowance for Contractor’s overhead and profit expenses over and above fee paid to System Integrators shall be included in lump sum price bid for Mobilization / Demobilization.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Acceptable System Integrators for pump control and automatic trash screen rake systems shall conform to the following:

1. Integrator shall be CSIA Level 1 certified. Certifications shall be on file prior to bid date.

2. Integrator’s field technicians proposed for Work shall be ISA-Certified Control Systems Technicians. Certifications shall be on file before the bid date.

3. Integrator shall be factory-certified to provide complete SCADA integration services for the following SCADA programs: Clear SCADA by Control Microsystems, Wonderware by Schneider Electric or Ignition by Inductive Automation

4. Integrator shall have local support office including engineering, programing and field service engineering within 1 hour of the Work.

5. Integrator shall have proven record of providing on-call service 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

6. Integrator shall have in-house capabilities to build custom MCC enclosures powder-coated in house to Owners’ chosen colors.

7. Integrator shall conduct factory acceptance test in their factory facility using actual field voltages.

8. Integrator shall have been in business in California as full-service integrator for at least 5 years.

9. Integrator shall do at least $10 Million per year in business for prior 5 years.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used)

END OF SECTION
Project Owner PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 65 00 - 1

SECTION 01 65 00

PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Transportation and delivery of products.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 66 00: Product Storage and Handling Requirements

1.3 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. ANSI/NSF 60 Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals – Health Effects

2. ANSI/NSF 61 Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects

3. ASTM D3951 Commercial Packaging

1.4 Delivery
A. Before shipping, verify field dimensions, utility locations and electrical compatibility for items of Work which may require relocation, refitting, or different electrical motors and wiring if field dimensions differ from those shown on Plans.

1. If Contractor discovers conflicts during surveying, staking, verification of field dimensions, verification of utility locations or verification of electrical compatibility, they shall bring this matter to Owner’s attention as soon as conflict is discovered and before materials or equipment are shipped.

2. Owner will adjust Contract requirements needed to accommodate field conditions, and will pay reasonable costs for upgrades or modifications required to be made at place of manufacture prior to shipping to accommodate conflicts discovered.

B. Owner will not pay costs of shipping and returning items to place of manufacture unless:

1. Owner has acted to prevent Contractor from completing surveys, staking, verification of field dimensions, verification of utility locations or verification of electrical compatibility, and Contractor has notified Owner of this fact in writing before shipping equipment, or

2. Changes required are direct result of buried utility conflicts where said utilities were neither shown on Plans in their approximate location, nor located by Underground Service Alert, nor evident from surface features.

C. Schedule deliveries and communicate with Owner as follows:

1. Arrange and pay for shipping and handling equipment from Contractor’s shop or factory to Project site, or from Project site to Contractor’s shop or factory, as may be required.

2. Do not ship, accept delivery of or store items on site for which applicable submittals have not been accepted.

3. At least 15 days before shipping equipment, notify Owner’s Representative as to equipment to be shipped, method of transport, carriers and routing, shipping, delivery dates, and shipping weights.

Project Owner PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 65 00 - 1

4. If Contractor fails to provide forgoing information, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for expenses incurred by Owner that would not have otherwise occurred.

5. Amount of such expenses may be deducted by Owner from payments due or to become due Contractor.

6. Before shipping, operate valves, motors, pumps, actuators, and mechanical equipment at factory to ensure products are complete and in working condition.

7. When shipment is made, transmit shipping notices to Owner’s Representative on each shipment, including description of equipment being shipped.

8. Control delivery schedules to minimize long-term storage of products at Site and overcrowding of construction spaces.

9. Ensure coordination to minimize holding or storage times for flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive materials to deterioration, theft, and other sources of loss.

D. Packaging shall conform to the following:

1. Standard commercial packaging in accordance with ASTM D 3951 will be acceptable except where other method or standard of packaging is specified.

2. Do not prepare equipment for shipment until it has been inspected and accepted for shipment at origin by Owner’s Representative and/or representative of Owner, or inspection has been waived in writing.

3. Where necessary, mount heavy machinery parts on skids or in crates.

4. Package mechanical and electrical parts subject to moisture damage in hermetically sealed metal containers, in plastic envelopes or other accepted container within their respective packing cases.

5. Deliver parts of equipment in assembled or sub-assembled units where possible.

6. Deliver large multi-component assemblies in sections facilitating field handling and installation.

7. Use stiffeners where necessary to maintain shapes and provide rigidity.

8. Provide subassemblies with protective pads, supports, and blocking to restrain products and prevent distortion or damage in transit.

9. Prepare for shipment parts exceeding 200 lbs so slings for safe handling by crane may be attached to parts while on truck, rail car, or ship deck.

10. Provide desiccant in sealed containers.

11. Ship oil-lubricated gearing, bearings, and other lubricated components with oil-soluble protective coating as described in warranty requirements or recommended by Manufacturer.

12. Loss or damage during shipment, including damage to painted surfaces, shall be Contractor’s responsibility, and shall be replaced or repaired without cost to Owner.

E. Label shipments as follows:

1. Place packing list, listing contents of each container, in moisture-proof envelope and securely fasten to outside of container.

2. Affix to equipment items and valves label or tag in prominent location displaying assigned equipment number.

3. Equipment items and valves lacking numbers shall have similar tag providing unique description of item.

Project Owner PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 65 00 - 1

4. Tag or label cases, crates, bundles, packages, containers or single items as needed to identify contents and name of equipment of which contents form a part.

5. Mark cases, crates, bundles, packages, containers or single items with number unique to specification reference covering product.

6. Mark cases, crates, bundles, packages, containers or single items with name and address of installation for which intended.

7. Markers shall be of stainless steel or aluminum, affixed to items with stainless steel fasteners or as otherwise accepted by Owner. Do not use plastic tape labels.

8. Each separate plant or portion of plant shall receive, as far as practicable, a fitting or distinguishing mark which shall be shown on packing lists.

9. Packing lists of equipment shall indicate weights of items over 30 lbs.

10. Show weights of components requiring use of cranes for safe handling.

11. Mark for identification articles or materials that might be otherwise lost. Box, bag, or steel band in bundles such articles or materials.

12. Accessories and spare parts shall be packed separately in containers marked "ACCESSORIES ONLY," or "SPARE PARTS ONLY."
F. Transport and handle material and equipment in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Deliver products in undamaged condition to jobsite at Contractor’s storage facilities in Manufacturer's original, unbroken, unopened, labeled packaging containers or bundles.

2. Protect equipment against damage from moisture, dust, handling, or other causes during transport from Manufacturer's premises to site.

3. Relieve load on motor bearing during transport using jacks or other methods to prevent Brinelling.

4. Damage to equipment during shipping and handling will be Contractor’s responsibility.

5. Repair or replace equipment or materials damaged in shipment.

G. Deliver and store Work in accordance with Manufacturer's written recommendations and by methods and means preventing damage, deterioration, and loss including theft.

1. Furnish equipment and personnel to handle material and equipment on site by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

2. Deliver, unload, handle, and store equipment at Project site in safe and protected manner.

3. Uncrate equipment and dispose of packing material properly.

H. Inspect products delivered to jobsite as follows:

1. Deliver or store only products of accepted Manufacturers at site.

2. Promptly inspect shipments to assure material and equipment conform to requirements, quantities are correct, and material and equipment are undamaged.

3. Coordinate with Owner and equipment supplier/Manufacturer, as necessary, and perform inventory and inspection to include necessary unpacking and repacking operations to examine items delivered.

4. Record in writing apparent defects, damage, or missing portions and provide copy to Owner.

5. Pipes and fittings without openings covered will not be accepted for delivery.

I. Assist Owner in inspecting products delivered to jobsite as follows:

Project Owner PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 65 00 - 1

1. Remove coverings, containers or crates as directed to permit Owner’s Representative to inspect delivered items.

2. Should Owner’s Representative find evidence of damage or deficient workmanship, provide necessary documentation or conduct such tests deemed necessary by Owner’s Representative to demonstrate compliance.

J. Notify Owner’s Representative in writing upon acceptance of shipment.

K. Owner’s Representatives or personnel will not accept product deliveries for Contractor.

1.4 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for product delivery.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Warranty Requirements
A. Conform to Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery of products.

END OF SECTION

Project Owner PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 65 00 - 1

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Project Owner PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 66 00 - 1
SECTION 01 66 00

PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Handling, storage and protection of products.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements

1.3 Storage and Handling
A. Store products at jobsite as follows:

1. After receipt of material and equipment until Final Acceptance, Contractor shall assume responsibility for loss, damage, breakage, corrosion, soiling, disfigurement, weather damage, and product distortion.

2. Provide handling provisions for components requiring special access and weight considerations.

3. Protect products against moisture, weather, temperature extremes, dust, debris, tampering, theft, vandalism, ultraviolet radiation, or damage from improper handling, storage, or exposure.

4. Protect exposed metals from rust and corrosion, even for items which may be sandblasted or otherwise cleaned before painting.

5. Store products to preserve their quality and fitness for Work.

6. Store and protect products in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions.

7. Arrange storage of products to facilitate access for maintenance and inspection.

8. Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection.

9. Store products with seals and labels intact and legible.

10. Store items not designed for outdoor exposure off-ground and under cover.

11. For exterior storage of fabricated material and equipment, place on sloped supports, above ground.

12. Cover stored material and equipment subject to deterioration with impervious UV-resistant tarpaulin or sheet covering to prevent soiling or exposure to weather.

13. Cover plastic items to protect from sun exposure and temperature extremes.

14. Fasten coverings to prevent removal by wind

15. Store aggregate in well-drained area to minimize change in moisture content. Prevent contamination by other materials.

16. Store cementitious materials in weather-tight spaces. Keep free from moisture.

17. Store items in accordance with requirements of project Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP), if applicable. If no SWPPP has been prepared for project, store items in accordance with appropriate best management practices (BMP’s) listed in California Stormwater Quality Association (CASQA) Stormwater Best Management Practice Project Owner PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 66 00 - 2
Handbook for Construction latest edition. Comply with City, County, State and Federal pollution prevention laws and permits.

18. Store fasteners and connectors in original unopened containers until used.

19. Store flammable products to conform to City, County, State, and Federal safety codes for storage of flammable materials.

20. Notify Owner in writing if delivered or stored product is damaged.

21. Exterior surfaces of delivered items shall be in perfect unblemished condition.

22. Do not repair damaged products without prior written acceptance.

23. Remove corrosion found prior to Final Acceptance or remove and replace product.

B. Store piping products as follows:

1. Cover, plug, or cap pipe ends, valve ends, and equipment openings with rubber, plastic, or canvas to prevent intrusion or contamination when installation is not in progress. These provisions shall apply during noon hour as well as overnight.

2. String pipe along right of way in manner not interfering with free passage of vehicles.

3. Do not store pipe on roadway or parkway of residential streets for more than 10 days, or on business streets for more than 3 days.

4. Do not use pipeline as drain for removing water that has infiltrated into trench. Maintain inside of pipe free from foreign materials and in a clean and sanitary condition until final acceptance.

C. Store temperature- dust- and moisture-sensitive products at jobsite as follows:

1. Between delivery and installation, store equipment to be incorporated into Work in manner to prevent damage or deterioration.

2. Store sensitive products in weathertight, climate-controlled enclosures.

3. Provide environmental controls, such as heaters or protective encapsulation, to guard against condensation and moisture damage.

4. Store temperature-sensitive products in protected area at temperature between 35°F and 104°F except where Manufacturer’s requirements are stricter.

5. Maintain temperature and humidity ranges within Manufacturer’s recommended tolerances.

6. Ventilate products subject to corrosion or moisture damage to prevent condensation.

7. To ensure protection of electrical and instrumentation equipment and panels and electric motors, store such equipment in enclosure designed to protect equipment from dust, temperature, and moisture.

8. Maintain storage facilities and stored equipment, providing utilities required.

D. Store rotating equipment as follows:

1. Motor space heaters shall be operational when motors are stored on site.

2. If prolonged (>90 days) storage is required, institute preventive maintenance program to include grease protection of bare metal surfaces, periodic indexing of rotating parts, renewal of grease in bearings and procedures recommended by Manufacturer.

3. Maintain records to demonstrate full compliance with these requirements.

E. Inspect, maintain and service products during storage as follows:

1. Periodically inspect stored products on scheduled basis to assure material and equipment are undamaged and maintained in acceptable condition.

Project Owner PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 66 00 - 3

2. Maintain log of inspections, and make log available on request.

3. Conform to Manufacturer's product storage requirements and recommendations.

4. Maintain Manufacturer-required environmental conditions, temperatures and humidity continuously.

5. Ensure surfaces of products exposed to elements are not adversely affected and weathering of finishes does not occur.

6. For mechanical and electrical equipment, provide copy of Manufacturer's service instructions with each item. Exterior of package shall contain notice instructions are included.

7. Service products on regularly scheduled basis.

8. Maintain log of services and submit as Record Document prior to final acceptance by Owner.

F. Handle products as follows:

1. Handle products with care, using proper equipment according to Manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products, materials, and equipment by methods to prevent soiling and damage.

3. Provide parts, components, and assemblies heavier than 50 lb with provisions for handling, such as eyebolts, lugs, hooks, tapped holes for eyebolts, or holes with rounded corners for passing slings.

4. Lift large heavy items only at points designated by Manufacturer. Do not drop, drag, bump, bend or handle products in manner that causes abrasions, bruises, cracks, mars, scars, scratches, or other damage. Use padded slings and hooks for lifting as needed to prevent damage. Improper handling shall be cause to reject mishandled products.

5. Use rubber or canvas belt slings or pneumatic-tired cradles to lift or lower coated pipe, valves and other products. Sling width shall equal or exceed pipe or product diameter. Do not handle coated products using ropes, hooks, chains, calipers or cables. Store such materials on padded skids.

6. Provide protection during handling to prevent marring and otherwise damaging products, packaging, and surrounding surfaces.

7. Inspect each product item for damage, defects, completeness and correct operation before installing.

8. Notify Owner in writing if delivered or stored product is damaged.

9. Do not repair damaged products without prior written acceptance.

10. Before installation, swab joints and interiors of piping materials to remove foreign matter and contaminants.

11. Clean and protect machined surfaces and shafting from corrosion using proper type and amount of coating as described in Manufacturer’s warranty requirements to assure protection to one year after final acceptance.

12. Maintain records for Owner's review of deliveries to show Contractor's order number, purchase order number, and equipment number. Include labeling or shipping tag in records.

1.4 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.

Project Owner PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 66 00 - 4
B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for product storage and handling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Warranty Requirements
A. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for storage and handling of products.

END OF SECTION
Project Owner MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 71 13 - 1
SECTION 01 71 13

MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Mobilization shall include the following tasks:

1. Obtain temporary easements which Contractor may require for construction activities outside of existing easements and/or rights-of-way secured by Owner.

2. Obtain required permits.

3. Move onto site Contractors' equipment required for construction operations.

4. Construct and remove temporary project signs.

5. Provide temporary construction power, wiring, and lighting facilities.

6. Provide noise attenuation walls, structures, materials, and equipment.

7. Provide fire protection system.

8. Provide construction water supply as required.

9. Provide field office trailer for the Contractor (at Contractor's option).

10. Provide field office trailer for Owner.

11. Provide on-site communication facilities, including telephones and radios for Contractor’s personnel.

12. Provide on-site sanitary facilities and potable water facilities for Contractor’s personnel.

13. Arrange for and establish Contractor's storage yard as required. (Contractor is solely responsible for obtaining property owner agreements to use private property for storage or laydown areas per the Contract Documents.)

14. Construct and implement security features and requirements in compliance with Contract Documents.

15. Possess OSHA required notices and establishment of safety programs.

16. Arrange for and establish traffic control.

17. Submit initial submittals.

B. Mobilization will be deemed complete when items necessary to conduct field operations are on site and operable.

C. Owner’s Representative will notify Owner prior to 1:00 p.m. when Owner’s Representative deems mobilization to be complete. Owner’s Representative, upon site inspection and approval, will then allow drilling to commence the following morning. If Owner's Representative does not accept site, drilling shall not commence the following day and Contractor's Superintendent shall re-notify Owner's Representative for additional site inspections. No stand-by time will be allowed during mobilization phase of Contract.

D. When using vacant property to park, service and store products, obtain acceptance from Owner’s Representative and permit from City or County Planning Department. Notify adjacent property owners in writing of this proposed use at least 7 calendar days prior to use. Obtain written acceptance from property owner stating conditions of their approval. Conform to setbacks and other conditions required by City or County regulations or permits.

E. Remove obstructions in right-of-way before starting construction. Where private property, such as parked cars, must be removed prior to construction, notify respective property owners 72 hours in advance of right-of-way clearing to allow them to remove their property.

Project Owner MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 71 13 - 2
F. Remove temporary structures and controls before inspection for Final Completion or when directed. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities and controls. Restore existing facilities used during construction to specified or original condition.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 00 89 01: Permits
B. Section 01 10 03: Coordination
C. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
D. Section 01 29 73: Schedule of Values
E. Section 01 32 33: Construction Photographic and Video Documentation F. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
G. Section 01 50 00: Temporary Facilities and Controls
H. Section 01 52 13: Field Offices
I. Section 01 57 23: Temporary Storm Water Pollution Control J. Section 01 74 00: Cleaning and Waste Management
K. Section 01 77 00: Closeout Procedures
L. Section 02 05 00: Basic Civil Engineering Requirements

1.3 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals:

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Storage Yard Refer to Section 01 50 00.

Project Signs Refer to Section 01 50 00.

Construction Facilities Plan Refer to Section 01 50 00.

B. Contractor's site office and other construction facilities shall be of temporary nature.

C. Contractor shall be wholly responsible for security of their site office and laydown area, and for their pump station, materials, equipment and tools.

1.4 Unit Prices
A. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for mobilization and demobilization.

B. Payment for mobilization, demobilization, including payment for construction, modification, maintenance, removal and restoration associated with temporary facilities and controls and access, and storage facilities, will be included in price bid for “Mobilization/Demobilization.” / major Work items for which mobilization and demobilization are required.

C. Payment for sanitary facilities will be included in price bid for “Mobilization/Demobilization.” / major Work items for which mobilization and demobilization are required.

D. Payment for field office, including cost of building (or trailer), utilities, services and removal, will be included in lump sum price bid for “Mobilization/Demobilization.” / major Work items for which mobilization and demobilization are required.

Project Owner MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 71 13 - 3
E. Payment for verification of field dimensions and utility locations will be included in price bid for items of Work which may require relocation or refitting if field dimensions differ from those shown on plans.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Refer to Section 01 32 33 for preconstruction and construction photographic and video documentation requirements.

END OF SECTION
Project Owner MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 71 13 - 4

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Project Owner SEISMIC RESTRAINT
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 73 24 - 1
SECTION 01 73 24

SEISMIC RESTRAINT
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Seismic restraint systems for mechanical and electrical equipment.

B. Refer to structural Plans for project-specific seismic design criteria.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 02 05 00: Basic Civil Engineering Requirements D. Section 05 50 00: Metal Fabrications
E. Section 09 90 00: Painting and Coating
F. Section 33 05 38: Hangers and Supports

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install complete seismic restraint systems, including appurtenant structural, mechanical and/or electrical mountings or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and compliance with applicable building, mechanical, and electrical codes and standards.

B. Provide restraint systems, hangers, supports, bracing and anchorage in all directions for piping, ductwork, conduits, cable trays, panels, equipment and other items at risk of seismic damage in accordance with the 2016 California Building Code.

1.4 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. ASCE/SEI 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures Chapter 13 and Chapter 15

2. California Building Code (CBC) Chapter 16 “Structural Design”

3. MSS SP127 Bracing for Piping Systems Seismic-Wind-Dynamic Design, Selection, Application

4. SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems

1.5 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Shop
Drawings
Submit per structural Shop Drawing requirements.

Show equipment dry weights and locations of centroids
Show applicable wet weights (operating weights) using specific gravities of fluids proposed for use
Provide loading diagram showing static loads and forces imparted to surrounding pipes and structures.

Project Owner SEISMIC RESTRAINT
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 73 24 - 2

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Show auxiliary equipment mounting slides and rails
Show snubbers and vibration isolators.

Show anchorage details and quantity, diameter, load rating, edge distances and penetration depths for anchors.

Product Data Submit for pre-manufactured systems per Product Data requirements.

Engineering
Calculations
Submit for seismic anchorage systems and vibration isolators.

Use full equipment wet weight for calculations.

Compute shear and tension forces that must be developed by anchor bolts to resist calculated lateral forces and overturning moments.

Select anchors to resist computed shear and tension forces.

B. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for definition of requirements for Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Engineering Calculations.

C. Under California Building Code and ASCE 7 §13.1.4, Engineering Calculations are not required for:

1. Seismic restraint of components weighing 20 pounds or less.

2. Seismic restraint of components mounted 4’ or less above floor level weighing 400 pounds or less.

3. Seismic restraint of piping, utility or distribution systems weighing 5 pounds per lineal foot or less.

D. Calculations and drawings required for seismic restraint of nonstructural components shall be sealed by California-licensed civil or structural engineer and shall follow ASCE 7 §13.3 where:

1. Ip shall be assumed to be 1.25 unless otherwise shown on Structural Plans.

2. SDS shall be as shown on Structural Plans or Geotechnical Report.

3. ap and Rp shall be as shown in ASCE 7 Table 13.5-1 or Table 13.6-1 as appropriate.

1.6 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for seismic restraint.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 and Section 05 50 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Pack gaps between seismic anchorage lugs and floors or foundations with grout to inhibit corrosion of bolts in space between lug and floor or foundation.

C. Provide vibration-isolated equipment with snubbers capable of retaining equipment in its designated location without failure or deformation of snubbers when exposed to vertical or horizontal forces at contact surfaces equal to 100% of operating weight of equipment.

D. Air gaps between snubber retainer and equipment base shall not exceed ¼”.

Project Owner SEISMIC RESTRAINT
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 73 24 - 3
E. Anchor piping with flexible connection and/or expansion joints so intended uses of these joints are maintained in piping system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to install seismic restraint systems before submitting shop drawings or ordering. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Section 02 00 50 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install seismic restraint systems as required by the CBC and at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements

2. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

3. Applicable building, fire, plumbing, mechanical and electrical code requirements D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

END OF SECTION

Project Owner SEISMIC RESTRAINT
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 73 24 - 4

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Project Owner MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 73 33 - 1
SECTION 01 73 33

MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, and installation of mechanical identification on above-ground pipes, ducts, valves and equipment, for hazardous materials warnings, and for miscellaneous services.

B. Refer to Section 33 39 13 for marking and identification of manhole covers and castings.

C. Refer to Section 33 05 26 for marking and identification of buried pipes, ducts, tanks and equipment.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 66 00: Product Storage and Handling Requirements E. Section 02 05 00: Basic Civil Engineering Requirements F. Section 03 30 00: Cast-in-Place Concrete
G. Section 05 50 00: Metal Fabrications
H. Section 09 90 00: Painting and Coating
I. Section 10 14 00: Signage
J. Section 26 05 10: Common Work Results for Electrical K. Section 33 05 26: Utility Identification

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install mechanical identification on pipe including appurtenant structural and mechanical mountings or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and compliance with applicable building codes and standards.

1.4 Quality Assurance
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen trained and experienced in necessary trades and crafts and completely familiar with specified requirements and methods for proper performance of Work of this section.

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. ASME/ANSI A13.1 Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems

2. ANSI Z535.1 Safety Color Code
Project Owner MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 73 33 - 2

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Shop Drawings Submit per architectural Shop Drawing requirements.

Product Data Submit per Product Data requirements.

Installation
Instructions
Submit per Installation Instruction requirements.

Material Samples Submit, showing materials, colors and label sizes and letter sizes to be furnished
Warranty Furnish one-year warranty from date of final acceptance B. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for definition of requirements for Shop Drawings, Product Data, Installation Instructions, and Material Samples.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of mechanical identification on pipes.

1.8 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for mechanical identification.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Labels for
Exterior Piping
Calpico, Inc. Self-Adhesive Pipe
Markers
South San Francisco, CA (650)
588-2241
Seton Name Plate Corporation Pipe
Markers
Branford, CT (855) 772-4204
W.H. Brady B-946 Milwaukee, WI (800) 940-0615
Accepted equal
Labels for
Piping Inside
Buildings or
Vaults
Calpico, Inc. Self-Adhesive Pipe
Markers
South San Francisco, CA (650)
588-2241
Seton Name Plate Corporation Pipe
Markers
Branford, CT (855) 772-4204
W.H. Brady B-500 Vinyl Cloth Milwaukee, WI (800) 940-0615 Accepted equal
Project Owner MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 73 33 - 3

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Snap-on Type
Pipe Markers
Seton Name Plate Corporation Set Mark Branford, CT (855) 772-4204 W.H. Brady B-500 Vinyl Cloth Milwaukee, WI (800) 940-0615 Accepted equal
Tracer Tape
and Warning
Tap for Buried
Piping
Refer to Section 33 05 26
Labels for
Valves
Seton Name Plate Corp. Series SVT Branford, CT (855) 772-4204 W.H. Brady B-60 Milwaukee, WI (800) 940-0615
Accepted equal
Labels for
Mechanical
Equipment
Seton Name Plate Corp. Style 2065 Branford, CT (855) 772-4204 W.H. Brady B-120 Fiber-Shield Milwaukee, WI (800) 940-0615 Accepted equal

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Lettering shall conform to OSHA requirements on signage and labels.

C. Markings shall clearly indicate direction of flow with arrows.

D. Potable and non-potable water piping shall be identified in conformance with California Plumbing Code §6-1 and Table 6-1 when both are present in same building. Mark non-potable water piping with lettering in black upper-case “CAUTION: NON-POTABLE WATER, DO NOT DRINK.” Message shall occur every 20’ and at least once per room. Background color of piping (if not otherwise specified below for plant piping) shall be green with white lettering for potable water and yellow with black lettering for non-potable water conforming to California Plumbing Code §601.2.

OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF

PIPE OR COVERING

MINIMUM LENGTH OF

COLOR FIELD

MINIMUM LETTER SIZE
½” 8” ½”
⅝” 8” ½”
¾” 8” ½”
1” 8” ½”
1¼” 8” ½”
1½” 8” ¾”
2” 8” ¾”
2½” 12” 1¼”
3” 12” 1¼”
4” 12” 1¼”
6” 12” 1¼”
8” 24” 2½”
10” 24” 2½”
12” and larger 32” 3½”
Project Owner MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 73 33 - 4
E. Mechanical identification on pipes shall be constructed of the following:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Labels for Piping
Exterior
Weather and
UltravioletResistant Acrylic
Plastic
Labels for Piping Inside
Buildings or Vaults
Vinyl Cloth
Labels for Valves Aluminum or
1/16” Fiberglass
Tags
Aluminum tags shall have black-filled
letters
Labels for Mechanical
Equipment
Aluminum, Brass,
or ⅛”-thick
Fiberglass Tags
Aluminum tags shall have black-filled
letters
F. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Labels for Piping Label Color Conform to ANSI A13.1 and Z553.1 See below
Text Show full piping system name with
no abbreviations
Text Size Conform to ANSI A13.1 and Z553.1
Flow Arrows Provide flow-directional arrows next
to each label
Design Pre-printed semi rigid, color-coded,
snap-on type pipe markers may be
provided. Label shall cover 360º
(minimum).

Labels for Valves Tag Requirement Tag each valve larger than 1” Tag Size 2”x2” square identification tag
Text Show valve tag number and full
name or designation shown on
Plans
Labels for Mechanical
Equipment
Tag Requirement Show tag number and equipment
name
Tag Size ½” by 4”
Labels for Instruments
and Gauges
Tag Requirement Show tag number and name of
instrument
Tag Size 1½” by 4”
Manhole Covers Refer to Section 33 39 13.

Project Owner MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 73 33 - 5
G. Except where otherwise directed by Owner, color scheme for piping shall follow 10-States standards and be as follows: (4000-series colors reference numbers are Sherwin-Williams color chips)
PIPING

SERVICE PIPE COLOR BANDS LABEL COLOR LEGEND

WASTEWATER PLANT PIPING
Non-Potable
Water
4086 Safety
Blue
4032 Black Safety Green White Text

BURIED UTILITIES (IDENTIFICATION TAPE COLOR)
Potable Water Refer to Section 33 05 26
Recycled Water
Non-potable
Water
Industrial Water
Sewage
Natural Gas
Oil
Steam
Cable TV and
other
Communications
Telephone
Electrical
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to install mechanical identification on pipes before submitting shop drawings or ordering. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install mechanical identification at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements

2. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

3. Applicable building, fire, plumbing, mechanical and electrical code requirements D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

E. In addition to locations shown on Plans and Submittals, provide label and flow arrow at each connection to pumps or other mechanical equipment, at wall boundaries, at tees and crosses, and at 20’ centers on straight piping runs. Provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360° around pipe at each location.

Project Owner MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 73 33 - 6
F. Attach labels to valve or piece of equipment with Type 304 or 316 stainless-steel chains or wires. Attach label to valve by tying tag wire or chain around operating shaft or nut.

G. Attach signs directly to equipment or on adjacent wall as directed by Owner’s Representative.

H. Install mechanical identification on pipes and equipment true, plumb, and level using precision gauges and levels.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR
TEST

STANDARD
(ASTM OR

OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS
PAID
FOR BY
Mechanical
Identification
Installation
and Level
Visual
inspection of
finished
installation
1 inspection Owner Owner
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate
compliance to
Contract
Documents and
Manufacturer’s
printed literature
1 test Owner Contractor

END OF SECTION
Project Owner CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 74 00 - 1
SECTION 01 74 00

CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Cleaning during construction, final cleaning on completion of Work and disposal of waste.

B. Refer to Section 01 35 44 for hazardous material handling requirements.

C. Refer to Section 01 57 23 for storm water management and SWPPP requirements.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 35 44: Environmental Procedures for Hazardous Materials D. Section 01 50 00: Temporary Facilities and Controls
E. Section 01 57 23: Temporary Storm Water Pollution Control F. Section 02 41 13: Selective Site Demolition

1.3 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Dust Control Plan Refer to Paragraph 1.4E below

1.4 Air Pollution Control
A. Comply with laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and orders pertaining to air pollution.

B. Do not discharge smoke, dust, equipment exhaust, or any other air contaminants into atmosphere in quantities sufficient to violate Federal, State, AQMD or local regulations.

C. Maintain equipment engines in proper tune and operate construction equipment so as to minimize exhaust emissions. Do not discharge air pollutants (dust, smoke, or other air contaminants) into atmosphere in such quantities to violate regulations of any legally constituted authority.

D. Phase and schedule polluting construction activities to avoid emission peaks.

E. Do not allow fugitive dust to be visible beyond Owner’s facilities’ property lines or designated boundary as stipulated by governing agency.

1. Employ dust control measures to Owner’s satisfaction throughout project duration to prevent construction dust from harming or annoying persons living in or occupying buildings near Work.

2. Use reasonable and typical watering and dust preventative techniques to reduce fugitive dust emissions. Furnish labor, equipment, and means required (including watering or soil binders), and carry out effective measures wherever and as often as needed to prevent Contractor’s operations from producing dust in amounts damaging to property, cultivated vegetation, or domestic animals; or causing a nuisance as determined by Owner.

3. Wet unpaved demolition and construction areas as necessary during excavation and construction.

Project Owner CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 74 00 - 2

4. Use temporary dust covers to reduce dust emissions and meet local air pollution control district requirements.

5. Cover or wet loads of excavated material or rubbish leaving site or of material being imported to prevent blowing dust.

6. Spread soil binders on site, unpaved roads, and parking areas when needed to control dust and wind-blown particles from causing a nuisance or violating air quality standards.

7. Submit dust control plan and obtain Owner’s acceptance before beginning Work off paved roads or any activity that might stir up dust.

F. Pursuant to CCR Title 13 §2449(d)(3), Contractor shall ensure self-propelled diesel-fueled vehicles on jobsite, 25-hp and up and not designed for on-road driving, limit idling to no more than 5 consecutive minutes, with the following exceptions:

1. Idling when queuing;

2. Idling to verify vehicle is in safe operating condition;

3. Idling for testing, servicing, repairing, or diagnostic purposes;

4. Idling necessary to accomplish work for which vehicle was designed (such as operating a crane)

5. Idling required to bring machine system to operating temperature; and

6. Idling necessary to ensure safe operation of vehicle.

G. Promptly pay fines assessed for noncompliance with Title 13 idling limitations for any equipment owned or rented by Contractor or their subcontractors.

H. Comply with air quality regulations pertaining to portable engines with rated horsepower of 50-bhp or greater and other applicable portable equipment by meeting the following requirements:

1. Engines or other applicable portable equipment shall have Imperial County Air Pollution Control District permit or be registered with CARB.

2. Engines used shall satisfy applicable emissions standards, as set forth in CCR Title 13 (Article 5, §2450-2466) and Title 40 of Code of Federal Regulations, Part 89.

3. Engines shall be equipped with non-resettable elapsed-operating-time meter. Submit activity reports to regulators as required.

4. If portable engines and other portable equipment permitted with Imperial County Air Pollution Control District are to be located on Owner’s property for more than 12 consecutive months, provide Owner with information necessary for Owner to revise their Title V operating permit. This information shall include, but is not limited to, detailed equipment description, specifications, emissions information, dispersion modeling, permits, registrations, monitoring records, and source tests reports required by permit for subject equipment. Submit this information to Owner prior to end of 6th month equipment is located at Owner’s facilities. If Contractor fails to provide information within specified time frame, Contractor shall bear all fees, costs, and penalties including, but not limited to, filing fees, attorney fees, fees associated to acquire necessary offsets, fees for excessive emissions, etc. associated with City obtaining necessary variances from Imperial County Air Pollution Control District.

I. Provide responsible personnel in direct control of vehicle and equipment fueling operations at all times to prevent fuel spills. Continuously monitor fueling, and comply with Imperial County Air Pollution Control District rules.

Project Owner CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 74 00 - 3
J. Per Imperial County Air Pollution Control District Rules, no visible emissions from any engine shall be as dark as or darker than No. 1 in the Ringleman Chart for a period or periods aggregating more than 3 minutes per hour.

K. Maintain usage records of volatile organic compound (VOC) materials and pay annual fees according to Imperial County Air Pollution Control District. Usage records shall contain:

1. Manufacturer’s Name

2. Product Name/Number

3. Quantity (in gallons)

4. VOC Content (in lb/gal)

5. Imperial County Air Pollution Control District Rule Number or California Code section

1.5 Cleaning During Construction
A. Maintain areas impacted by Work in a neat, safe, clean and sanitary condition, including adjacent properties, and public and on-site access roads to satisfaction of agency having jurisdiction over property. Keep work-impacted areas free from construction waste, mud, debris and rubbish.

B. Treat access roads and parking areas as needed to control dust and prevent tracking of mud onto paved streets.

1. Minimize spillage on haul routes.

2. Clean public access roads to site. Remove material falling from haul trucks and clean spill areas.

3. Wet down dry materials and rubbish on site.

4. Under no circumstances shall vehicles leaving Work site track mud onto public right-ofway.

5. Sweep streets daily using self-loading rear-broom motor sweeper with vacuum and spray nozzles to remove any mud or waste tracked from Work site to public streets. If streets are kept clean, Owner’s Representative may accept less frequent cleaning.

6. Refer to Section 01 50 00 for dust control measures.

C. Dispose of rubbish, surplus, demolition, and waste materials occurring at Work site offsite in conformance with local, state, and Federal codes, ordinances, and antipollution laws governing locations and methods of disposal.

1. Provide containers for collecting and disposing of waste materials.

2. Do not stockpile rubbish or debris. Store worksite rubbish and debris in roll-off, enclosed containers prior to disposal.

3. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on project site.

4. Do not dispose of volatile wastes, such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner, in storm or sanitary drains.

5. Do not dispose of wastes into streams or waterways.

6. Dispose of asbestos as required by law.

7. Establish regular intervals of collection and disposal of materials and waste.

8. Secure disposal site and legally dispose of all excess materials not used in backfilling operations.

D. Obtain written permission from property owner prior to disposing of surplus materials, waste products or debris on private property.

Project Owner CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 74 00 - 4
E. Take care to prevent spillage on haul routes. Contain and remove such spillage and clean the area.

F. Use only cleaning materials recommended by Manufacturer of surface to be cleaned.

G. If Contractor fails to keep Work site free from rubbish and debris, Owner’s Representative may suspend Work until condition is corrected.

1.6 Final Cleaning
A. Restore construction areas to preconstruction conditions after completing of Work and immediately before final inspection.

B. Restore lines and grades of areas used for earthwork storage.

C. Clean, sweep, and wash Work and equipment including finishes.

D. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, and foreign materials from sightexposed interior and exterior finished surfaces. Polish surfaces so designated.

E. Repair, patch, and touch up marred surfaces to specified finish to match adjacent surfaces.

F. Clean electrical enclosure painted surfaces, polish, and leave in like-new condition with factory-new appearance.

G. Where doors, electrical panels, or other appearance items are marred or damaged, remove affected items to qualified paint refinishing shop and restore finish to like-new condition.

H. Broom-clean paved surfaces.

I. Rake-clean other surfaces of grounds.

J. Remove from Owner's property temporary structures and materials, equipment and appurtenances not required as part of, or appurtenant to, completed Work.

K. After Work is complete, remove from site loose concrete, lumber, wire, aggregate or rock piles, reinforcing, rubbish, debris and materials not incorporated in Work. Remove excess pointing mortar materials and other debris within pipes.

1.7 Unit Prices
A. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for cleaning and waste management.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used)

END OF SECTION
Project Owner STARTING AND ADJUSTING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 75 00 - 1
SECTION 01 75 00

STARTING AND ADJUSTING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Pre-commissioning activities associated with first time startup of equipment, instruments, electrical gear and/or process.

B. Checks, tests, and adjustments prior to running equipment.

C. Laboratory tests required to verify proper operation of processes.

D. Manufacturers’ factory tests and approvals of installation.

E. Installing temporary facilities to support testing and removing temporary facilities after testing is completed.

F. Commissioning activities to include full operational tests demonstrating functionality and reliability.

G. Refer to Section 01 79 00 for System Demonstration requirements to be completed after Work of this section is completed.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 77 00: Closeout Procedures
E. Section 01 78 23: Operation and Maintenance Data
F. Section 01 79 00: Demonstration and Training
G. Section 23 05 93: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
H. Section 33 08 11: Pressure Testing and Flushing of Utilities I. Section 33 08 31: Leakage and Infiltration Testing of Gravity Sewer Pipelines

1.3 System Description
A. Prior to receipt of progress payments in excess of 60% of Contractor's lump sum bid for Work, submit to Owner details of procedures proposed to adopt for testing and start-up of all equipment to be operated singly and together, excepting when such procedures have been covered in Specifications. Refer to Section 01 79 00 for System Demonstration Plan requirements.

B. Equipment to be tested shall include mechanical, electrical, instrumentation, or other devices with one or more moving parts, and devices requiring an electrical, pneumatic or hydraulic connection.

C. Contractor and equipment Manufacturer’s representatives shall pre-test all materials, equipment, and Work included in this contract to demonstrate compliance with Contract requirements, and verify its specified functionality prior to System Demonstration described in Section 01 79 00. Tests shall be as specified herein and made to confirm equipment has been properly assembled, aligned, adjusted, balanced, and connected.

D. Changes, adjustments or replacements required to make equipment operate as specified shall be carried out by Contractor as part of Work.

Project Owner STARTING AND ADJUSTING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 75 00 - 2

1.4 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals before startup or system demonstration.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
System
Demonstration Plan
Refer to Section 01 79 00.

Manufacturer’s Written
Approval of
Installation (where
"Manufacturer's
Statement of
Responsibility" is
required)
Written approval of installation of products shall be certified and submitted by Manufacturers factory-authorized representative.

This written approval shall affirm factory-authorized
representative has inspected installation, alignment, lubrication and operation of furnished equipment and found it to fully comply with specified design and warranty requirements and be ready for safe operation.

1.5 Unit Prices
A. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for starting and adjusting.

B. Unless otherwise specified, Contractor shall pay costs of testing, adjusting, balancing, and start-up, including temporary facilities and connections.

C. Water used during startup, adjusting, and tests shall be at Contractor’s expense.

D. Payment for services of Manufacturer's representatives will be included in price bid for their products or items to which their products are appurtenant. No additional payment will be made for services or expenses needed for testing, startup, or demonstration if duration of services needed to provide complete working system exceeds those expected or exceeds durations stated in writing in correspondence from Manufacturer to Owner, Contractor or other party.

E. Coordinate and schedule Work to allow Manufacturer's representative to optimize their time at Project site. If Contractor requires additional time, cost for service representative shall be borne by Contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Furnish labor, power tools, equipment, instruments, and services required for and incidental to completing functional testing, performance testing, and operational testing. Furnish power, ventilation, consumables, utilities, and temporary facilities necessary for tests if permanent systems are not available at time of testing.

B. Perform initial checks, testing, and start-up in presence of and with assistance of Manufacturer's factory-authorized representatives.

C. Manufacturer’s factory-authorized representative shall check all equipment for lubrication, alignment, rotation, and vibration, and shall notify Contractor and Owner of anything in installation which might nullify Manufacturer's warranty.

D. Upon request by Owner, during performance test, furnish services of factory-authorized Manufacturer's representative to inspect and approve, in writing, installation and lubrication of mechanical equipment furnished by that Manufacturer, to place it into operation, to assist in necessary adjustments and tests and to instruct operating personnel in equipment operation and maintenance.

E. Pre-operation checkout procedures shall include, but not necessarily be limited to:

1. Clean foreign material from new Work.

Project Owner STARTING AND ADJUSTING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 75 00 - 3

2. Confirm proper assembly, alignment, and adjustment of equipment.

3. Pre-operation lubrication. Lubricate mechanical equipment in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. Use lubricating oils and greases of type and viscosity recommended by Manufacturer. Furnish lubricants with flushing oils as recommended by Manufacturer. Following flushing, fill oil lubrication system with "run-in" oil as recommended by Manufacturer. Run in equipment at no-load condition for 2 hours. Drain and flush equipment again with flushing oil and refill with lubricant recommended by Manufacturer.

4. Test electrical and instrumentation systems for proper connections.

5. Functionally test mechanical and electrical equipment for proper operation after general start-up and testing tasks have been completed.

6. Check equipment for loose connections, unusual movement or other indications of improper operating characteristics.

7. Confirm proper speed, flow, pressure, vibration, sound level, adjustments, and calibration.

8. To extent possible, turn rotating equipment, operate valves and gates, and check for binding or interference.

9. Check incoming electric power for amperage, voltage amplitude and voltage balance.

10. Check motor driven equipment for correct rotation, power draw, binding and interference.

11. Verify safety equipment is in place.

12. Test equipment at rated speeds for required performance, instrumentation control, and automatic operation.

13. Demonstrate proper operation of each instrument loop function including alarms, local and remote controls, instrumentation and other equipment functions.

14. Generate signals with test equipment to simulate operating conditions in each control mode.

15. Perform debugging, tuneup and adjustments as needed.

F. No tests specified herein shall be applied until item to be tested has been inspected and acceptance has been given for application of such tests.

G. Once equipment has been subjected to pre-operational checkout procedures and Owner’s Representative has witnessed and has not found deficiencies in that portion of Work, individual systems may be started and operated under simulated operating conditions to determine whether equipment and systems conform to Contract Document requirements.

Perform load tests and initial operation tests conforming to requirements specified in respective equipment technical specification sections of Contract Documents.

H. Test media for systems shall be as specified in applicable equipment specification sections of Contract Documents. Operate equipment for sufficient duration to measure and record machine operating characteristics, including temperatures and vibration, to observe performance characteristics, and to permit initial adjustment of operating controls.

I. Pre-test equipment and structures to their full-flow rated capacity. When testing requires availability of auxiliary systems such as power, flushing or cooling water or control air which has not yet been placed into service, provide acceptable substitute sources capable of meeting requirements of machine, device or system, at no additional cost to Owner.

J. Disposal methods for test media shall be subject to review and acceptance by Owner’s Representative.

K. If, under test, any portion of Work fails to fulfill contract requirements and is adjusted, altered, renewed or replaced, promptly repeat tests on adjusted, altered, or replaced portions of Work, Project Owner STARTING AND ADJUSTING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 75 00 - 4
along with other affected Work, if required by Owner’s Representative. Pay to Owner reasonable Owner-incurred expenses resulting from repeating such tests.

L. Once initial operation has been verified, recheck machines for proper alignment. Realign machines, if necessary, and dowel in place.

M. Correct deficiencies to satisfaction of Owner’s Representative.

N. Disassemble and inspect machines or devices exhibiting unusual or unacceptable operating characteristics. Repair or remove such equipment from site and replace at no cost to Owner.

O. Test results shall be within tolerances set forth in Specifications. If no tolerances have been specified, test results shall conform to tolerances established by recognized industry practice.

P. Where, in event of otherwise satisfactory installed test, a dispute arises between Owner’s Representative and Contractor regarding test results or methods or equipment used in testing, Owner’s Representative may order test to be repeated at Contractor’s expense.

Q. Where test results fail to meet contract requirements, repeat tests necessary to demonstrate conformance to Contract requirements shall be completed by Contractor at their expense.

R. For non-submerged motors rated over 25 horsepower and their driven devices, collect baseline operating data including amperage and vibration (unfiltered velocity in horizontal, vertical, and axial directions, where possible) and temperature, using contact-type thermometers, at each bearing. Operate equipment for at least 30 minutes before taking bearing temperatures. Record data for variable speed devices at 5 speeds, from lowest to highest.

S. Following completion of Work of this section, proceed to System Demonstration described in Section 01 79 00.

END OF SECTION
Project Owner CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 77 00 - 1
SECTION 01 77 00

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Specific administrative procedures, closeout submittals, and forms to be used at substantial completion and final completion of Work.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 29 73: Schedule of Values
C. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
D. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
E. Section 01 74 00: Cleaning and Waste Management
F. Section 01 75 00: Starting and Adjusting
G. Section 01 78 23: Operating and Maintenance Data
H. Section 01 78 36: Product Warranties
I. Section 01 78 39: Project Record Documents
J. Section 01 78 43: Spare Parts
K. Section 01 79 00: Demonstration and Training

1.3 Quality Assurance
A. Upon completion of Contract, Work shall be finished, tested, and ready for operation. Work shall fulfill its intended purpose as described in Contract Documents, in submittals, and in Manufacturer's literature.

B. Where connections or disruptions have been made to existing work, repair, reactivate, refill and recharge components, restoring them to preconstruction conditions. Follow procedures of authorities having Ownership or jurisdiction for Work involving existing utilities and services.

1.4 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Monument Survey Show record locations of monuments or benchmarks disturbed and reset by Contractor. Monument survey, if required shall be sealed by surveyor licensed to practice in California.

Schedule of Materials
and Equipment Costs
Refer to Section 01 29 73.

O&M Manuals Refer to Section 01 78 23.

Warranties Refer to Section 01 78 36.

Record Drawings Refer to Section 01 78 39.

Spare Parts Refer to Section 01 78 43.

Project Owner CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 77 00 - 2

1.5 Unit Prices
A. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for closeout procedures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Field Quality Control
A. Following system demonstration, schedule and attend final inspection and walkthrough with Owner’s Representative. At walkthrough, Owner’s Representative will review Owner-prepared punch list of items requiring correction with Contractor and present punch list to Contractor within 72 hours of meeting. Address punch list items promptly.

B. Should Contractor elect to protest a punch list item rather than address it to Owner’s satisfaction, Owner reserves right to withhold up to 150% of value of disputed Work, in accordance with Public Contracting Code, as reserve sufficient to hire third party to perform unfinished work until such time as dispute between City and Contractor is resolved in Contractor’s favor.

C. Eleven month warranty inspection shall be conducted prior to release of bonds. Work failing to comply with Contract Documents or performance standards stated in Manufacturers submittals or printed promotional literature will at that time be tagged as defective and scheduled for repair. Repair defective work in strict accordance with Contract Documents and to satisfaction of Owner’s Representative.

1. Owner will establish inspection date and will notify Contractor at least 30 days in advance.

2. Warranty Inspection Report will be prepared by Owner’s Representative and delivered to Contractor. It will set forth number and type of failures observed and names of persons making inspection.

3. Repairs shall proceed promptly. Upon completion of inspection and receipt of Inspection Report, Owner will establish date for Contractor to proceed with remedial Work. Delay on part of Contractor to proceed with remedial work on schedule shall constitute breach of this Contract. In such case, Owner may proceed to have defects remedied as outlined in Contract Documents.

4. Costs of warranty inspection and repair shall be borne by Contractor, who shall include an appropriate amount for testing and repair in their bid. No additional allowance will be paid by Owner for Warranty Inspection and repairs.

3.2 Extra Stock/Spare Parts
A. Refer to Section 01 78 43 for spare parts requirements.

END OF SECTION
Project Owner OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 78 23 - 1
SECTION 01 78 23

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Operation and maintenance manual.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 75 00: Starting and Adjusting
D. Section 01 78 36: Project Warranties
E. Section 01 79 00: Demonstration and Training

1.3 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Operation and
Maintenance
Manual
Furnish as described below.

Equipment Data
Sheets
Submit for equipment furnished under each specification section.

Include data sheets in Operation and Maintenance Manual. Use attached form and follow format of attached sample Data Sheet to summarize equipment furnished, nameplate data, and equipment Manufacturer's maintenance instructions and recommendations.

1.4 Operation and Maintenance Manual
A. Prepare and submit 6 copies of Operation and Maintenance Manual containing information itemized and requested in Contract Documents.

B. Contents shall be original and clear, with readable (no faxes) text on reproducible non-colored paper.

C. Manual contents shall be in English. Do not submit documentation in foreign languages.

D. Dimensions shall show English units. Annotate metric system drawings, if furnished, to show English units.

E. Submit 5 copies in D-ring loose-leaf binders.

1. Provide standard size vinyl-plastic hardcover binders suitable for bookshelf storage.

2. Binder ring size shall not exceed 2.5”.

3. Tab and index manuals by specification sections in numerical order as assigned in Contract Documents.

4. Provide Operation and Maintenance information for each item of mechanical, electrical, or instrumentation equipment.

5. Provide documentation in organized manner that can be used and understood by Owner’s operation and maintenance staff.

Project Owner OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 78 23 - 2

6. Label binders with project name, date, and Volume 1 of ____, Volume 2 of ____, and so on.

F. Sixth electronic copy shall include original MS Word Version 2021 documents and scanned images in PDF format in 300-dpi minimum resolution saved onto CD Rom disc and delivered to Owner in labeled plastic jewel case. PDF documents shall be searchable.

G. Provide in each manual:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Cover Page
Show Owner’s name, project name, date, and appropriate
data.

Show Contractor’s name, address, contact person, phone
number, and email.

Include Contractor’s night and emergency phone number.

Show Owner’s Representative’s name, address, contact
person, phone number and email.

Table of Contents
Table of Contents Identify table of contents by tab section Provide general description of information contained within each volume number.

Sequence of Operation Provide copy from Contract Documents Documentation Set for Each Equipment Item
Part 1 – Cover Page - Equipment Maintenance Data Sheet and Maintenance Notes Cover Page Use Equipment Maintenance Data Sheet as cover page.

Equipment
Maintenance Data
Sheet
Provide filled-out copy of form appended to this Technical Specification section
Maintenance Notes Provide copy of form appended to this Technical Specification section behind each equipment maintenance data sheet for future use by Owner.

Fill out “Design Data from Contract Documents” and
“Performance Test Results” line 1 for initial field test results.

Remainder of Maintenance Notes forms are for future use by Owner.

Photographs of
Installed Equipment
Project Owner OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 78 23 - 3

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Part 2 – Operational Procedures
Installation Instructions Include adjustment instructions and startup instructions.

Tools, Equipment, and
Software
Provide list of special tools, equipment, software, or related instrumentation needed for operation or maintenance
Identify location of the above
Provide copies of programming software on CD Rom or thumb drive
Provide jacket for holding software copies in 3-ring binder.

Cross-Referencing Where Manufacturer’s standard O&M manual contained in Part 3 adequately covers operational procedures, include cross reference in Part 2 to applicable section of Part 3. eg “Refer to Part 3 page xx et seq for operation procedures. Refer to Part 3 page yy et seq for overhaul instructions.”
Operation Procedures Provide step-by-step procedures for:

Starting,
Stopping (including safety precautions and emergency
operating shutdown procedures),
Operating under all modes of operation,
Adjusting,
Calibrating,
Trouble-shooting, and
Maintaining entire system as installed.

Overhaul Instructions Provide step-by-step procedures for:

Disassembly of equipment,
Inspection of equipment,
Repair of equipment,
Load change procedures
Reassembly of equipment,
Realignment of equipment
Recommended tolerances
Procedures for Testing
for Performance
Efficiency
Project Owner OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 78 23 - 4

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Emergency Procedures Provide emergency operating instruction and list of service organizations (including addresses and telephone numbers) capable of rendering emergency service to system.

Control Settings Tabulate proper settings for pressure relief valves, pressure reducing valves, altitude valves, low- and high-pressure switches, flow switches, level switches, and other protection devices.

Relay Settings Identify relay, timer, alarm, and contact settings, Part 3 – Manufacturer’s Standard Operation and Maintenance Manual Manufacturer’s
Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Include Manufacturer-furnished manuals, and nothing else in Part 3.

Modify Manufacturer-furnished brochures and manuals to
reflect only model or series of equipment used on Work
Line out non-applicable text and illustrations.

Remove or line out material in foreign languages.

Part 4 – Preventative Maintenance
Preventative
Maintenance
Procedures
Identify Manufacturer-recommended procedures to be
performed on periodic basis, both by removing and replacing equipment or components, or by leaving equipment in place.

Identify scheduled maintenance items required to maintain warranties in force.

Schedules and
Maintenance Intervals
Show recommended frequency of preventative maintenance
procedures.

Describe lubrication schedules, including Manufacturer’s recommended lubricant SAE grade, type, and temperature
range.

Describe other items requiring scheduled maintenance,
including filters, coolants, refrigerants, and cleaning solutions.

Cross-Referencing Where Manufacturer’s standard O&M manual contained in Part 3 adequately covers preventative maintenance, include cross reference in Part 4 to applicable section of Part 3. eg “Refer to Part 3 page xx et seq for preventative maintenance
procedures. Refer to Part 3 page yy et seq for schedules and maintenance intervals.”
Part 5 – Parts List
Parts List Provide generic description and Manufacturer’s identification number for each replaceable part.

Project Owner OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 78 23 - 5

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Drawings Provide cross-sectional or exploded view drawings to accompany parts list
Recommendations for
Owner-Stocked Parts
Provide Manufacturer’s recommended list of parts for Owner to stock and any special storage requirements.

Cross-Referencing Where Manufacturer’s standard O&M manual contained in Part 3 adequately covers parts lists, include cross reference in Part 5 to applicable section of Part 3. eg “Refer to Part 3 page xx et seq for parts lists. Refer to Part 3 Page yy for drawings. Refer to Part 3 Page zz for recommendations for Owner-stocked parts.

Contact Information Provide address, telephone number, and email of nearest supplier and parts warehouse.

Part 6 – Wiring and Logic Diagrams
Wiring Diagrams Provide internal and connection wiring diagrams for electrical equipment
Logic and Control
Wiring Diagrams
For equipment containing integral electrical controls provide:

Logic diagrams,
Wiring diagrams for control panels,
Ladder logic for computer base systems,
Connections between existing systems and new addition, and Adjustments such as calibrating and set points for relays, and control or alarm contact settings.

Part 7 – Submittals Include product and equipment submittals required by Contract Documents which have been returned and stamped
“accepted,” or “accepted as noted”
Shop Drawings Provide paper prints of accepted Shop Drawing submittals Annotate Shop Drawings to show materials, coatings, and linings furnished
Annotate Shop Drawings as required to provide Record
Drawings
Provide 3-hole punched jackets to hold oversize Shop
Drawings
Product Data
Factory Test Record
Transcripts
Project Owner OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 78 23 - 6

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Field Test Record
Transcripts
Part 8 – Safety
Safety Procedures Describe safety precautions to be taken when operating equipment or working near it.

Where Manufacturer’s standard O&M manual contained in Part 3 adequately covers safety, include cross reference in Part 8 to applicable section of Part 3. eg “Refer to Part 3 page xx et seq for safety procedures.

Part 9 – Documentation
Affidavits and
Certifications
Provide as required by Technical Specifications
Warranties Provide copies of warrantees and guarantees as required by Technical Specifications,
H. Operation and Maintenance Manual for engine generator set shall be Manufacturer’s complete service repair manual with full instructions on all aspects of engine generator set maintenance, lubrication, operation and repair delivered in its own dedicated D-ring loose-leaf binder.

I. Operation and Maintenance Manual for Automatic Trash Screen system set shall be Manufacturer’s complete service repair manual with full instructions on all aspects of maintenance, lubrication, operation and repair delivered in its own dedicated D-ring loose-leaf binder.

J. Operation and maintenance manuals specified herein are in addition to operation, maintenance, or installation instructions required by Contractor to install, test, and start up equipment.

1.5 Contractor Submittals
A. Before requesting payment for 80% completion point for total contract, submit 2 of 6 required copies of Operation and Maintenance Manual containing copies of material available at that time.

B. Within 30 calendar days after review and acceptance by Owner of 2-copy submittal, submit remaining 3 hard copies and one electronic copy of Operation and Maintenance Manual in PDF format.

C. Contractor may submit operating and maintenance instructions by individual specification section or in final form according to above instructions.

D. If Contractor chooses to submit O&M instructions by individual specification section, use the following procedure:

1. Submit 2 copies of O&M instructions, along with good quality photocopy of associated Equipment Maintenance Summary sheets, for each specification section for review.

2. Submittals will be returned with review sheet and comments.

3. Resubmit, if requested by Owner’s Representative, and retain copies of accepted submittals until all sections are accepted.

Project Owner OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 78 23 - 7

4. When all sections have been accepted, organize and bind manuals for sections of contract specifications according to the above instructions and submit one complete set of O&M instructions for final review. Submit separately and unbound the completed original Equipment Maintenance Summary sheets.

5. Final review will be for organization and binding of complete set of manuals as specified and will not include review of previously accepted material.

6. When complete set is accepted, submit 9 complete sets to Owner’s Representative as accepted.

E. If Contractor chooses to submit O&M instructions in final form, without previous acceptance of individual specification sections, use the following procedure:

1. Submit 2 complete sets of O&M instructions, along with good quality photocopy of associated Equipment Maintenance Summary sheets, organized and bound according to above instructions for review. Place Equipment Maintenance Summary sheets with their associated specification sections for review.

2. Set will be returned with review sheets and comments pertaining to manual organization and binding, as well as contents.

3. Continue to resubmit the 2 complete sets of O&M instructions, as requested by Owner’s Representative, until entirely accepted.

4. When complete set is accepted, submit 6 complete sets to Owner’s Representative as accepted. Submit completed original Equipment Maintenance Summary sheets separately and unbound.

1.6 Payment
A. Acceptable first-submittal O&M information package shall be delivered to Owner before Contractor can be paid for more than 80% of purchase value of that equipment and prior to installation of equipment. Purchase value shall be net price for equipment as shown on paid invoice. Progress payments for work in excess of 80% completion will not be made until acceptable O&M information has been delivered to Owner.

1.7 Unit Prices
A. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for operation and maintenance data.

B. Payment for operation and maintenance manuals required in Contract Documents will be included in price bid for items of Work for which sections of Operation and Maintenance Manuals are required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used)

END OF SECTION
Project Owner OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 78 23 - 8

EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE DATA SHEET
New River Improvement Project
SECTION ______ - ________________________
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION MOTOR DATA (if applicable)
Name: Nameplate Horsepower:

Serial No.: Model:

Mfr’s Model No.:

Manufacturer: Catalog No. (polyphase motors):

Manufacturer’s Address Type
Manufacturer
Manufacturer’s Rep: Voltage: Measured
Current:

Nameplate
Current:

Phone: Email: Phase: Overload Relay
Setting:
rpm:

PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION WORK TO BE DONE Frequency*

SPARE PARTS LIST FUSES/LAMPS/SEALS
Quantity Part & Part Number Qty Size Type & Ordering Description

WARRANTY AND OPERATING REQUIREMENTS AND REFERENCE
*D - Daily; W - Weekly; B - Biweekly; M - Monthly; Q - Quarterly; S - Semiannually; A - Annually Project Owner OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 78 23 - 9
SAMPLE

EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE DATA SHEET
New River Improvement Project
SECTION 33 12 12 – Resilient Wedge Gate Valves

EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION ELECTRICAL OR MECHANICAL DATA
Name: Influent Pump No. 1
Tag No.: P01-1
Nameplate Horsepower: 15 HP
Serial No.:
123456ABC
Order No.:
12345678
Model: 140T Frame
Serial No. 987654ZY
Class F Insulation
w/ Space Heater
Mfr’s Model No. C515-08G9OXM
Manufacturer: ABC Pump Co. Catalog Number (polyphase motors): M36999b Manufacturer’s Address:
1234 Industrial Avenue
Gotham City, NY 12345
Type: TEFC
Manufacturer: DEF Motors, Inc.

Manufacturer’s Rep: XYZ Equipment, Inc. Voltage: 460 Measured Current: 18 amps
Nameplate
Current: 20 amps
Phone:
949-752-0505
Email:

Service @ABC.com
Phase: 3 Overload Relay
Setting: 25 amps
rpm: 1,800
PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION WORK TO BE DONE Frequency*

1. Operate valves and check such things as a) bearing temperature, b) changes in running sound, c) suction and discharge gage readings, d) pump discharge rate, and e) general condition of drive equipment.

D

2. Check packing. D

3. Check pumping unit for any dust, dirt or debris. W

4. Lubricate bearing frame and motor bearings (consult manufacturer's instructions for type of grease or oil).

Q

5. Disassemble and change or repair the following: a) impeller, b) shafts, c) shaft sleeve, d) rotary seals, and e) sleeve bearings.

A

SPARE PARTS LIST FUSES/LAMPS/SEALS
Quantity Part & Part Number Qty Size Type & Ordering Description

WARRANTY AND OPERATING REQUIREMENTS AND REFERENCE
For manufacturer's instructions regarding installation, operation, maintenance and troubleshooting of this equipment, refer to Volume ____, Section ____.
*D - Daily; W - Weekly; B - Biweekly; M - Monthly; Q - Quarterly; S - Semiannually; A – Annually Project Owner OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 78 23 - 10

MAINTENANCE NOTES
New River Improvement Project
NOTES

DESIGN DATA FROM CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

ITEM FLOWRATE PRESSURE AMPERAGE

PERFORMANCE TEST RESULTS

DATE ITEM FLOWRATE PRESSURE AMPERAGE

RECOMMENDED REPAIRS OR UPGRADES

DATE ITEM

REPAIRS OR UPGRADES MADE

DATE ITEM

Project Owner PRODUCT WARRANTIES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 78 36 - 1
SECTION 01 78 36

PRODUCT WARRANTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Warranties are required for all Work furnished under this contract.

B. Manufacturer's warranties shall not relieve Contractor of liability required under Contract Documents. Such warranties only shall supplement Contractor's responsibility.

C. Where Manufacturer’s advertised warranty exceeds minimum warranty requirements stipulated, Manufacturer’s advertised warranty shall remain in force for duration of advertised warranty period after Contract-stipulated warranties have expired.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 75 00: Starting and Adjusting
E. Section 01 77 00: Closeout Procedures

1.3 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Warranty For equipment bearing Manufacturer's warranty in excess of one year, furnish copy of warranty to Owner with Owner named as beneficiary.

1.4 One-Year Product Warranties
A. Warranties shall cover improper assembly or erection, defective workmanship and products, and incorrect or inadequate operation.

B. Warranties shall contain no disclaimer limiting liability to purchase price of products or materials.

C. Furnish one-year warranty for Work and manufactured items unless otherwise stated.

Warranty shall cover parts, labor, and prompt service for repair of defects, performance failure or damage due to normal wear and tear or due to any cause other than acts of God, or intentional or active and extreme abuse of product. Warranty period shall extend one year beyond final acceptance of completed contract by Owner.

D. In addition to Manufacturer's standard warranty, furnish services of factory-authorized and factory-trained service technician to promptly provide repair service for equipment for specified warranty period. This service shall be provided at no cost to Owner and shall include cost of replacement parts and labor required during that period.

E. Correct within 10 days following receipt of notice from Owner of unsatisfactory material or workmanship which may be discovered during warranty period.

F. Correct unsatisfactory material or workmanship without extra charge, notwithstanding that faulty Work may have been overlooked in prior inspections and accepted by Owner.

Project Owner PRODUCT WARRANTIES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 78 36 - 2

1.5 Inspection of Installation by Manufacturer
A. Should Manufacturer or supplier of any product have reason to suspect said Manufacturer’s product has not been installed in accordance with Manufacturer’s warranty requirements, Manufacturer shall have right to send their factory authorized representative to inspect facility prior to Final Acceptance.

B. Should Manufacturer’s factory-authorized representative elect to inspect installation, Manufacturer shall promptly notify Owner in writing of observed deficiencies in installation procedures which might affect required warranty.

C. Should Manufacturer elect to forego inspection of installation of their products, Manufacturer shall be precluded from claiming faulty installation by others as relief from honoring furnished warranties.

1.6 Eleven-Month Anniversary Warranty Inspection
A. Warranty inspection will be conducted during 11th month following completion of Work and prior to release of bonds.

B. Owner will establish date for warranty inspection and will notify Contractor at least 30 days in advance. If notification of inspection date does not occur within 12 months after final acceptance, first anniversary inspection shall be considered to be waived.

C. Warranty Inspection Report will be prepared by Owner’s Representative and delivered to Contractor. It will set forth the number and type of failures observed and names of persons making inspection.

D. Locations found in warranty inspection where paving, coating, or paint has peeled, bubbled, or cracked, and locations where rusting is evident will be considered system failures. Repair defective work identified during warranty inspection by removing deteriorating paving, coating or paint system, cleaning surface, and repaving, recoating, or repainting with same system.

Electrically test repaired painted areas.

E. If area of failure exceeds 25% of total paved, coated or painted area on any structure or surface, remove and recoat entire paving, coating or paint system per original specification.

F. Repair other failed products found in warranty inspection per warranty requirements.

1.7 Three-Year Product Warranties and Other Extended Warranties A. 3-year minimum warranty shall be furnished for:

1. Manhole linings

2. Pumps and motors

3. Other motorized equipment using motors 2-hp or larger

4. Seismic valve controllers

5. Air-conditioning and refrigeration systems
B. 3-year warranty shall be 3-year parts-and-labor non-prorated warranty extending from date of Owner’s final acceptance. Warranty need not exceed 5 years from date of shipping.

C. Where System Integrators or unit manufacturers are required to furnish skid-mount or packaged air conditioning or refrigeration systems requiring 3-year or extended warranties, every component of system furnished shall be covered under extended warranty, notwithstanding clauses in other sections which may stipulate a lesser warranty for certain components.

D. Ten-year minimum warranty shall be furnished for:

1. Prefabricated Metal Buildings
Project Owner PRODUCT WARRANTIES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 78 36 - 3

2. Roofing
E. 10-year warranty shall be 10-year parts-and-labor non-prorated extended warranty extending from date of Owner’s final acceptance. Warranty need not exceed 12 years from date of shipping.

F. Extended warranties shall cover parts, labor and prompt service for repair of defects, performance failure or damage due to normal wear and tear, or due to any cause other than acts of God, Owner’s failure to perform minimum maintenance as set forth in O&M instructions furnished with warranty, or intentional or active and extreme abuse of product. Warranty period shall extend the stipulated number of years beyond final acceptance of completed contract by Owner.

G. Extended warranties shall cover Owner’s full cost of restoring non-functional components to their full function as described in Contract Documents and in Manufacturer’s published literature. Prorated warranties will not be accepted. Replacement of damaged parts with old or recycled parts will not be accepted.

H. Should Manufacturer refuse to provide full extended warranty, Contractor may be required to purchase extended warranty or negotiate with Owner to compensate Owner with a fair value for a shorter warranty period.

I. Repair or replace Work that may prove to be defective in workmanship and/or materials within warranty period, along with Work which may be damaged or displaced during performance of warranty Work, at no additional expense to Owner.

J. Where sections of specifications stipulate longer warranty period than stipulated in this section, the longest and most stringent warranty requirement shall apply.

K. Warranty period shall begin on the earliest of 2 milestones:

1. Date of formal notification of completion or

2. 30 calendar days after both substantial completion and Owner taking over beneficial use of project.

L. Warranties shall cover:

1. Parts

2. Labor

3. Diagnostics

4. Servicing

5. Removal or Installation Charges

6. Setup and Reconfiguration of System with Replacement Parts

7. Shipping
M. Replace defective parts with new parts.

N. Where a part is replaced during warranty period, warranty for replaced part and shipping shall be extended to not less than one year following replacement date. Warranty for labor shall be unchanged.

O. In emergency situations, if warranty service is not immediately available from Manufacturer, Owner will perform repairs to re-establish proper operation of actuator and valve.

P. Maintenance or repair work performed by Owner during warranty period shall not be cause for voiding warranty.

Q. Following notification of Contractor of extended warranty issue, Contractor or their agent shall have 10 days to inspect and 30 days to remedy defective work. Failure to perform within this Project Owner PRODUCT WARRANTIES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 78 36 - 4
stipulated period will result in damages being assessed against Contractor and responsible parties retroactive to date of discovery.

1.8 Owner-Furnished Equipment and Materials Warranties
A. Product warranties on Owner-furnished equipment and materials will be provided by equipment and materials manufacturers directly to Owner.

B. Contractor shall correct and repair any defects caused by faulty installation during the life of the product warranty.

1.9 Unit Prices
A. Payment for warranties required in Contract Documents will be included in price bid for items of work for which warranties are required.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for product warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used)

END OF SECTION
Project Owner PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 78 39 - 1
SECTION 01 78 39

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - SCOPE

1.1 General Requirements
A. Maintain one accurate, legible set of Record Drawings at site and available for review by Owner’s Representative in Contractor’s field office or in superintendent’s truck for duration of Work.

B. Final project Record Drawings prepared by engineer of record will rely on contractor record drawings, and information collected during construction by Owner’s Representative and others as basis for preparing final project Record Drawings.

C. Prepare construction photographic and video documentation.

D. Refer to Section 01 32 33 for requirements for construction photos and video documentation.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 32 33: Construction Photographic and Video Documentation C. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
D. Section 01 79 00: Demonstration and Training

1.3 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals:

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Record Drawings Submit as described below
PDF File of Record Drawings on CD ROM
Disc
One copy in labeled plastic jewel case
Record Drawing Certifications Submit monthly with progress payment request PLC Programming CD Rom Discs Submit 2 copies in labeled plastic jewel cases Programmers for Instruments and Devices Submit as described below Photograph Digital Files on CD ROM Disc Submit one copy in labeled plastic jewel case

1.4 Record Drawing Requirements
A. Provide Record Drawings on one set of full-size project blackline prints of Contract Drawings and other drawings forming part of contract, showing installed locations of improvements and all changes made during construction.

B. Before backfilling trenches, show on Record Drawings locations by key dimensions, depths, elevations, underground piping, conduit, duct banks, sensor lines, cables, valves, capped ends, branch fittings, pull boxes, and Work whose location differs from that shown on Plans, or where design is shown schematically, and dimensions are not shown on original plans.

C. Do not conceal Work until required Record Drawing information has been recorded. Owner may direct Contractor to expose concealed Work if Work was not recorded on Record Drawings.

Project Owner PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 78 39 - 2
D. Show Record Drawing changes in contrasting color to original.

E. In showing changes in Work, or added Work, use same legends used on Contract Drawings.

Show locations and elevations to same level of accuracy as original Contract Documents. Tie dimensions to permanent point with 2-point tie-down system.

F. Report changes and deviations promptly to Owner's Representative.

A. Record drawings shall incorporate addenda, supplementary drawings, working drawings, change orders and clarifications.

G. Incorporate the following into Record Drawings:

1. Addenda

2. Supplementary Drawings

3. Working Drawings

4. Change Orders

5. Responses to Requests for Information

6. Jobsite memorandums

7. Clarifications

8. Field observations of existing utilities and conditions

9. Informal no-cost changes and corrections requested or accepted by Owner’s Representative

10. Additional details describing Work not shown on Plans

11. Survey notes

12. Field notes

13. System demonstration logs

14. Explanatory comments at informal changes where cause is significant but not obvious H. Locate by survey and identify on Record Drawings substructures encountered while excavating and subsequently left in place.

I. Where Plans are diagrammatic or lacking precise details, produce dimensioned full-size sheets as Record Drawings. For installations outside of structures, give locations by coordinates and elevations. Where substructures are encased in concrete, give outside dimensions of encasement. Contractor may submit additional 24” x 36” sheets detailing record work as approved by Owner.

J. Mark record drawings at time material and equipment are installed to maintain drawings current with entries reviewed by Owner’s Representative.

K. Bring Record Drawings to progress meetings.

L. Show actual measured dimensions, not calculated values.

M. Maintain Record Drawings on an up-to-date basis with entries reviewed by Owner’s Representative. Bring record drawings to progress meetings.

N. Protect Record Drawings from damage or loss.

O. Clearly show on Record Drawings discrepancies between Contract Documents and installed Work.

P. Record information on how to maintain and/or service concealed Work.

Q. Concealed shall mean construction installed underground or in area which cannot be readily inspected by use of access panels, inspection plates or other removable features.

Project Owner PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 78 39 - 3
R. Record final hydraulic and electrical equipment control settings in appropriate tables and spaces provided on Record Drawings.

S. In addition to paper record drawings, provide PDF copy of record drawings on CD ROM disc or flash drive delivered to Owner in labeled plastic case.

T. Provide 2 copies of PLC programming CD ROM discs delivered to Owner in labeled plastic jewel cases.

1.5 Unit Prices
A. Payment for record drawings required in Contract Documents will be included in price bid for items of work for which record drawings are required.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for project record drawings.

C. Progress payment requests may be withheld if daily logs, schedule updates construction photographic and video documentation, or Record Drawings are damaged, lost or not kept current to satisfaction of Owner's Representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 General
A. Maintain the following in Contractor’s field office in clean, dry, legible condition:

1. Contract Drawings,

2. Specifications,

3. Addenda,

4. Accepted (marked up) Shop Drawings,

5. Samples,

6. Photographs and video documentation,

7. Change Orders,

8. Modifications of Contract,

9. Measured Record Locations of Underground Work,

10. Survey data,

11. Electrical amendments
a. Modified outlet, equipment, conduit, and cable sizes, numbers, locations, and depths, b. Modified wiring diagrams,
c. Modified schedules for panelboards relating circuit-breaker numbers to circuits and ratings,
d. Modified schedules for terminal boxes and strips relating terminal numbers to incoming and outgoing wires and power or control function,

12. Test records,

13. Field Orders,

14. Other documents pertinent to Contractor’s Work, including Work by Subcontractors.

B. During progress payment request meetings, submit signed certification stating record drawings are complete and accurate as of date of payment request, and present current record drawing documents for review.

Project Owner PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 78 39 - 4
C. Make documents available throughout construction for Owner inspection. Do not use Record Drawings for other purposes nor remove them from office without Owner’s acceptance.

D. At Completion of Work and after Final Inspection, copy Record Drawing information (as installed) data, using red ink, onto new set of high quality prints. Certify with signature as to completeness and accuracy of "as installed" information shown on prints.

E. Deliver marked record set of Record Drawings as submittal to Owner, for review and acceptance, both field-developed prints and final signed prints as condition precedent to Owner's final acceptance of Work and release of retained funds. Owner will use final signed Record Drawings to create reproducible mylar Record Drawings.

END OF SECTION
Project Owner SPARE PARTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 78 43 - 1
SECTION 01 78 43

SPARE PARTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Delivery packaging and quality of spare parts

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 75 00: Starting and Adjusting
C. Section 01 78 23: Operation and Maintenance Data
D. Section 01 79 00: Demonstration and Training

1.3 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Spare Parts List Submit with System Demonstration Plan required in Section 01 79 00.

1.4 Unit Prices
A. Payment for spare parts including materials, parts, equipment, storage boxes, and labor required in Contract Documents will be included in price bid for items of work for which equipment spare parts are specified.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for spare parts.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Extra Stock/Spare Parts
A. Manufacturer shall furnish special tools not commercially available but required for operation and maintenance of their items of equipment.

1. This includes tools, instruments, accessories, and diagnostic software required for onsite adjustment, maintenance, overhaul, and operations.

2. Tools shall be high-grade, smooth, forged, alloy tool steel.

3. Package tools in a sturdy case, clearly and indelibly marked on exterior to show equipment for which tools are intended.

4. Mount tools in location(s) directed by Owner’s Representative.

B. Spare parts shall be those recommended by Manufacturer or required by Contract Documents.

1. Supply spare parts required for normal operation and maintenance during first year of operation.

A. Spare parts shall be of identical design, material, workmanship, and Manufacturer as corresponding original parts, interchangeable with corresponding parts of original equipment.

C. Submit list of spare and replacement parts to Owner with prices and location where they may be purchased.

Project Owner SPARE PARTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 78 43 - 2

1. Prices shall remain in effect for at least one year after final acceptance.

2. Furnish ordering information, including Manufacturer's name and address, part ordering information, part number, part name, and equipment name and number(s) for which part is intended.

D. Box or package spare parts in waterproof packing for long-term storage

1. Deliver spare parts in Manufacturer's original, unopened containers or protective covering suitable for preventing corrosion or deterioration for expected shelf life until parts are needed.

2. Place mechanical and electrical parts subject to moisture damage in hermetically sealed metal containers, in plastic envelopes or other accepted container within their respective packing cases.

3. Provide desiccant in sealed containers.

4. Label containers to describe contents and equipment for which they are furnished.

5. Label shall include list of identification numbers of parts contained therein.

E. Deliver spare parts to jobsite or Owner’s supply warehouse, at Owner’s discretion.

F. Submit letter of transmittal to accompany spare parts to include:

1. Date of letter and transfer of parts and materials.

2. Contract title and number.

3. Contractor’s name and address.

4. Full inventory of parts and materials, listing applicable specification section for each.

5. A place for Owner’s Representative to sign and acknowledge receipt of parts and materials.

6. Contractor shall be fully responsible for loss or damage to parts and materials until they are received and acknowledged by Owner.

G. During construction, store parts in building or trailers, with floor, roof, and closed sides protected from weather, condensation, and humidity and in accordance with Manufacturers’ recommendations.

H. At completion of system demonstration, refill or recharge operating fluids, including but not limited to fuel, oil, coolant and refrigerant tanks and vessels.

I. Equipment shall be properly lubricated and furnished with one-year supply of necessary lubricants.

J. For devices requiring hardware to program, provide one programmer apparatus for each device at each site.

K. Spare parts required for certain equipment items are specified elsewhere in these Specifications.

L. In addition to spare parts listed in technical specifications, provide the following spare parts in lockable toolbox:

ITEM DESCRIPTION EQUIPMENT TYPE QUANTITY
Spare Parts
Equipment Storage
Container
Storage Box Storage Box 1 unit
Project Owner SPARE PARTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 78 43 - 3

ITEM DESCRIPTION EQUIPMENT TYPE QUANTITY
Spare Parts Identified
in Manufacturer’s
O&M Instructions
Recommended Spare Parts
Inventory for first year’s
operation
Mechanical and
Electrical
1 each
Paint Touch-up Paint Architectural 1 pint per 500sf
painted surface
HVAC Equipment Filters Mechanical 1 box
Switchboards and
Motor Control Centers
Touch-up Paint Electrical 1 pint per 500sf
painted surface
Motor Control Center
Light Bulbs
One-Year Supply of Fuses
and Panel Lights
Electrical 10% of units
PLC Software Software Reload Diskettes Instrumentation 2 sets of CD’s M. Notify Owner’s Representative in writing if Manufacturers modify their approved spare parts, such as part numbers, interchangeability, or model changes. If Owner’s Representative determines modified spare parts are no longer compatible with furnished equipment, provide applicable spare parts at no expense to Owner.

N. Spare parts are intended for sole use by Owner. Replace spare parts which Owner’s Representative permits Contractor to use for startup activities prior to final acceptance.

END OF SECTION
Project Owner SPARE PARTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 78 43 - 4

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Project Owner DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 79 00 - 1
SECTION 01 79 00

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. System demonstration and commissioning.

B. Requirements for equipment Manufacturer’s services.

C. Training of Owner's personnel.

D. Refer to Section 01 75 00 for requirements for pre-operational checkout of equipment prior to System Demonstration.

E. Design testing procedures to replicate, as nearly as possible, conditions of operation.

F. Carefully design testing procedures to ensure equipment is not damaged.

G. Once testing procedures are accepted by Owner’s Representative, provide checkout, alignment, adjustment and calibration sign off forms for each item of equipment. Forms will be used in field by Contractor and Owner’s Representative jointly to ensure each item of electrical and mechanical equipment is properly installed and tested.

H. Complete specified testing and system demonstration prior to startup.

I. Contractor is advised that failure to observe these procedures may place acceptability of Work into question.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 75 00: Starting and Adjusting
D. Section 01 78 23: Operation and Maintenance Data
E. Section 01 78 43: Spare Parts

1.3 System Description
A. Proceed in logical, step-wise sequence to demonstrate equipment has been properly serviced, aligned, balanced, connected, calibrated, and adjusted prior to operation.

B. Manufacturer’s representatives during startup shall be factory-authorized personnel with full authority granted by Manufacturer to perform, supervise, and direct start-up and remedial Work and issue certifications required of Manufacturer.

C. When specified in individual Specification sections, arrange and pay for material or equipment suppliers or Manufacturers to provide qualified personnel (field service representatives) to perform the following:

1. Observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, and quality of workmanship.

2. Assist during product (system, subsystem, or component) installation to include observation, guidance, instruction of applicator’s or installer’s assembly, erection, installation or application procedures.

3. Inspect, check, and adjust as required for product (system, subsystem, or component) to function as warranted by Manufacturer and necessary to furnish Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation.

Project Owner DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 79 00 - 2

4. Revisit site as required to correct problems and until installation and operation are acceptable to Owner’s Representative.

5. Resolve assembly or installation problems attributable to, or associated with, respective Manufacturer's products and systems.

6. Perform and record results of Manufacturer’s standard and recommended inspections, functional and performance testing, inspections and tests specified in these documents, and startup and evaluation of installed Work.

7. Supply required test equipment.

8. Be responsible for protection of material and equipment and safety of personnel during testing.

9. Instruct and supervise field repairs and adjustments.

10. Train Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of respective product as required.

11. Perform other services normally provided by field representative’s company or specified elsewhere in these Specifications.

1.4 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Manufacturer’s
Inspection
Reports and
Certificate of
Proper
Installation
For items requiring warranties exceeding one year, submit daily copies of Manufacturers’ representatives’ field notes, data, and reports of Manufacturer’s field activities, actions taken, and test results to Owner’s Representative within 30 days of completion. If activities are at end of Contract duration, complete actions within Contract Time.

For items requiring warranties exceeding one year, submit Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation.

System
Demonstration
Plan
Submit prior to receipt of progress payments in excess of 60% of Contractor’s total bid amount for Work.

Describe each system to be tested, functional test methods, test materials, test instruments and recorders, and results to be recorded.

List requirements necessary to demonstrate successful operation.

Submit step-by-step description of materials, equipment, and personnel required.

Identify duration of testing and startup operations.

Include continuous 72-hour demonstration of operation of entire installed system. Shorter demonstration period may be authorized by Owner's Representative if external constraints make 72-hour test impractical.

Demonstrate operation of instruments, set points, alarms, telemetry, software, safety interlocks, protective logic functions, and back-up operation modes.

Project Owner DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 79 00 - 3

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Incorporate Manufacturer’s start-up and demonstration procedures.

Owner may modify proposed procedures as deemed necessary to demonstrate system operation.

Operate new equipment through entire no-load to full-load range Submit sample testing signoff forms for equipment and systems to be tested.

Control
System
Demonstration
Plan
Refer to Section 40 90 20
Testing Signoff
Forms
Submit blank forms 7 calendar days prior to start of System Demonstration.

System
Demonstration
Log
Submit for final operations test period.

Training
Schedule
List specified equipment and systems requiring training services and show
Respective Manufacturer
Estimated dates for installation completion
Scheduled training dates.

Update and adjust schedule to ensure training of appropriate personnel deemed necessary by Owner and to allow full participation by Manufacturer’s representatives. Adjust schedule for interruptions in operability of equipment.

Training
Outline
Submit for instruction program for Owner's personnel
See requirements below in Part 3.

Lesson Plan Submit at least 30 calendar days prior to scheduled training for Owner's personnel.

See requirements below in Part 3.

Control
Software
Submit current copy of control software.

1.5 Unit Prices
A. Payment for system demonstration including materials, equipment, devices, labor, travel costs, expenses, power costs, water, and maintenance items, required in Contract Documents shall be included in price bid for items of Work for which systems demonstration and startup is specified.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for demonstration and training.

Project Owner DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 79 00 - 4
C. Payment for costs and expenses of representatives of material and equipment suppliers and subcontractors shall be included in price bid for items of Work for which systems demonstration and startup Is specified.

D. Payment for operation and maintenance training required in Contract Documents shall be included in price bid for items of Work for which operation and maintenance training is required.

E. If it is necessary for any of Owner’s inspectors or Owner’s Representatives to be present for retests or re-inspections of installed facilities, Contractor shall pay costs on per-diem rate as established between Owner and Owner’s Representative or inspector. Said amounts will be deducted from final payments to Contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Notify Owner's Representative of time and place of system demonstrations at least 7 calendar days before they begin.

B. Arrange for representatives of equipment suppliers and subcontractors to be present as required to successfully demonstrate installed system.

C. Provide gages, meters, recorders and monitors as required to supplement or augment instrumentation system provided under this contract to properly demonstrate equipment fully satisfies requirements of Contract Documents. Specifically select devices employed for purpose of measuring performance of facility's equipment and systems to provide level of uncertainty consistent with variables to be monitored. Instruments shall be recently calibrated.

Be prepared at all times to demonstrate, through re-calibration, uncertainty of instruments employed for testing purposes. Perform calibration procedures in accordance with applicable standards of ASTM, ISA and IEEE. Adequacy of gages, meters, recorders and monitors shall be subject to review of Owner’s Representative.

D. Furnish and install temporary valves, fittings, bulkheads, taps or other items necessary for system demonstration.

E. Unless otherwise specified, provide at no expense to Owner, power, fuel, water, power, utilities, supplies, lubricants, chemicals, materials, replacement parts, testing equipment, testing media, labor and necessary items and Work required to complete specified tests, inspection, and system demonstration. Provide at no expense to Owner temporary heating, ventilating and air conditioning for areas requiring it where permanent facilities are not complete and operable at time of installed tests. Maintain temporary facilities until permanent systems are in service.

F. Before system demonstration, identify and label equipment with nameplates. Check and tighten terminals and connection points, ensure wiring and equipment is properly installed, remove shipping blocks, clean equipment, repair damaged or scratched finishes, inspect for broken and missing parts, and review and collect Manufacturer's Installation Instructions and Shop Drawings for delivery to Owner’s Representative.

G. Complete functional test and check of control and electrical components before system demonstration. Clean components and equipment before commencement of functional testing. Functional test and check shall include:

1. Visual and physical check of cables, circuit breakers, transformers, and connections.

2. Field adjustment of overcurrent protection devices

3. Verifying of proper operation of relays, timers, and alarm contacts.

Project Owner DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 79 00 - 5

4. Verifying and adjustment of set points for limit switches, level switches, flow switches, pressure switches, temperature switches, timing relays, and other instruments and transducers used for process control.

5. Verifying systems deliver specified flowrates and pressures.

6. Verifying valves operate from open to closed under pressure.

7. Verifying proper operation of piping appurtenances and specialties.

8. Verify proper operation of trolley and specialty systems.

H. After completing initial settings, operate each subsystem in manual mode to demonstrate operation conforms to Contract Documents. Once manual mode of operation has been proven, demonstrate automatic operation to verify proper start and stop sequence and speed control of pumps, valves, compressors, HVAC, conveyance systems, and other equipment, proper operation of valves, and proper speed control.

I. Prior to system demonstration, provide test runs described in Section 01 75 00 to verify parts and subsystems are in place and in working order. Owner’s costs for delays during system demonstration due to Contractor’s failure to pre-test system and verify products are in place and functional will be back-charged to Contractor.

J. Provide signoff forms for installed and operational testing to be accomplished under this contract. Provide sign off forms containing provisions for recording relevant performance data for original testing and not less than 3 re-tests for each item of mechanical, electrical and instrumentation equipment provided or installed under this contract. Provide separate sections to record values for pre-operation checkout, initials of representatives of equipment manufacturers, Contractor and Owner’s Representative. Sign off forms shall include motor and driven device on same form and provide following information, as a minimum:

1. Equipment name

2. Manufacturer

3. Model

4. Serial Number

5. Equipment tag number

6. Diagram showing bearing locations

7. Operating parameters

8. Test equipment

9. Witness signatures

10. Date
K. Maintain master file of equipment sign off sheets, which shall be available for inspection by Owner’s Representative. Upon completion of testing, furnish Owner’s Representative with original and two copies of sign off sheet for each equipment item.

L. Following system demonstration, start-up shall only be attempted as a function of normal plant operation in which plan process flows and levels are routine and equipment operates automatically in response to flow and level parameters shall be considered only upon receipt of written request by Contractor.

3.2 System Demonstration
A. System demonstration shall conform to Owner-accepted System Demonstration Plan submittal.

Project Owner DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 79 00 - 6
B. Perform systems demonstration in presence of Owner's Representative who will record results on sign-off forms submitted. Start up and operate individual subsystems, pieces of equipment, instruments, and other Work.

C. After completion of installed testing and certification by Owner’s Representative that installed equipment conforms to Contract Documents, fill process units and liquid process systems, except those employing oil or chemicals, with water or acceptable substitute. Fill oil and chemical systems with specified fluid.

D. Upon completing filling operations, run test media through completed facility for period of at least that required in specific equipment specification section, during which all systems shall be operated as complete facility at various loading conditions, as required by Owner’s Representative. Should operational testing period be halted for any reason related to facilities constructed or equipment furnished under this contract, or Contractor's temporary testing systems, repeat operational testing program until specified continuous period has been accomplished without interruption. Bring process units to full operating conditions, including temperature, pressure, and flow.

E. Proceed with testing on step-by-step basis in accordance with Contractor's submitted and accepted System Demonstration Plan. Each individual step in procedures shall be witnessed by Owner’s Representative.

F. Contractor's testing Work shall be accomplished by skilled team of specialists under direction of coordinator whose sole responsibility shall be orderly, systematic testing of equipment, systems, structures and complete facility as a unit. Operate equipment and systems during plant operational testing period, to greatest extent practicable, at conditions which represent full range of operating parameters as defined by Contract Documents.

G. Disassemble, inspect, and replace defective components of equipment exhibiting unusual or unacceptable operating characteristics.

H. Failure to meet specified requirements shall be cause for retesting at Contractor’s expense until requirements are met. Interruption of continuous operation test due to equipment malfunction shall be cause to restart test after repairs.

I. SCADA system programming will be provided by Owner or contract SCADA programmer.

Accommodate testing of programming by Owner or SCADA programmer as necessary during system testing and demonstration. Equipment may be progressively operated and monitored by SCADA system as programming is tested.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Finished
Installation
Installation &
Leakage
Visual inspection of
finished installation
1 inspection Owner Owner
Motor
Installation
Before energizing
machines, visually
inspect for
serviceability. Check
Manufacturer's
Installation Instructions
for correct lubrication
and ventilation. Align
All motors Contractor Contractor
Project Owner DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 79 00 - 7

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
motors with driven
equipment. Check
nameplate for electrical
power requirements.

Motor
Insulation
Test motor insulation
winding to winding with
ohmmeter or microohmmeter and record
results
All motors Contractor Contractor
Motor Test
Run
Test run motors
uncoupled or unloaded
before placing into
operation. Check motor
for rotation, speed,
current, and
temperature rise under
normal load and record
results. Maintain proper
color codes for phase
identifications. This may
require lead swaps at
motor for proper
rotation. Use motor
phase rotation meter
prior to lead connection
at motor to minimize
alter swaps
All motors Contractor Contractor
System
Demonstrati
on
Demonstrate
compliance to Contract
Documents and
Manufacturer’s printed
literature using
accepted system
demonstration plan
described above
One 72-hour
demonstration
without
interruption. (If
test is
interrupted, clock
restarts at zero
for 72-hour
demonstration)
Contractor
(Owner will
pay for test
water)
Contractor
Control
System
Demonstrati
on
Refer to Section 40 90
20 1 test Contractor Contractor
Project Owner DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 79 00 - 8

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate
compliance to Contract
Documents and
Manufacturer’s printed
literature
1 test Owner Contractor
B. Provide qualified technicians and calibrated test instruments as needed to perform tests.

C. Provide certifications for test instruments.

D. Since coordination with other crafts and Contractors will often be required, workers assigned to checkout shall be available outside normal working hours when necessary.

E. In addition, furnish Contractor’s personnel, as needed, to make adjustments or alterations recommended by equipment Manufacturer’s representatives.

F. Promptly correct defects and malfunctions disclosed during System Demonstration, including malfunctions of equipment or control systems, leakage, excessive vibration and excessive noise. Work failing to perform its intended function, and which cannot be repaired, shall be replaced with new equipment.

G. Following testing, remove bulkheads and temporary equipment.

H. Dispose of test water according to local regulations and NPDES requirements.

I. Inspect for loose connections, leaking fluids, and any irregularities.

J. Check field-aligned equipment for required alignment and realign if necessary.

3.4 Training of Owner's Personnel
A. Training shall take place on-site or in Owner’s offices.

B. Do not commence training of Owner personnel prior to substantial completion of Work, unless accepted in writing by Owner.

C. After functional testing is complete, conduct training and instruction program on system operation for Owner-designated personnel.

D. Furnish services of qualified factory-trained and authorized instructors from applicable equipment Manufacturers, subject to acceptance by Owner.

1. Factory-trained instructors shall be familiar with Owner’s facility operation requirements in addition to being familiar with their products.

2. Factory-trained instructors shall be fluent in written and spoken English.

3. No substitute instructors will be accepted unless prior written acceptance is obtained from Owner.

E. Include instruction covering:

1. Overview of system,

2. Basic operation theory,

3. Preventative maintenance,

4. Routine maintenance and repair,

5. Safety procedures,
Project Owner DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 79 00 - 9

6. “Hands-on" operation of equipment.

F. For electrically powered equipment include training on operation, setup, maintenance, and trouble-shooting of:

1. Operator interfaces,

2. Switchboards,

3. MCC’s,

4. Solid state starters

5. Variable frequency drives,

6. Power monitoring

7. Ethernet and Devicenet communications.

G. If not otherwise specified, base duration of program on complexity of equipment involved.

Obtain Owner's acceptance of instruction adequacy before terminating program.

H. Consult Owner to schedule instruction.

I. Provide accepted Operation and Maintenance Manual for specific pieces of equipment or system at least 10 Working Days prior to training session for that piece of equipment or system.

J. Provide combination of classroom and field/machine shop training. Conduct classroom training at Owner’s specified location.

K. Provide “hands-on” demonstrations of common troubleshooting and corrective maintenance repairs as described in Contractor’s proposed Lesson Plan. Provide tools and equipment to conduct demonstrations. Submit requests for supplemental assistance and facilities with proposed Lesson Plan.

L. As part of training, provide attendees with names, contact persons, telephone numbers and addresses of authorized service centers within 100-mile radius of jobsite for equipment on which training is taking place.

M. System demonstration testing, final operation testing, and instruction of Owner's personnel may be performed simultaneously, subject to prior approval of extent of consolidation.

N. The following training is required:

ITEM LOCATION

CLASSROOM

TRAINING

DURATION
FIELD

TRAINING

DURATION

APPROXIMATE

NUMBER OF

ATTTENDEES
System Overview On-site 2 hours 2 hours 3-12 people
Building Maintenance
including HVAC, Plumbing
and Lighting
On-site 2 hours 2 hours 3-12 people
Trash Rack & Removal
Trolley System
On-site 4 hours 4 hours 3-12 people
Instruments and Controls On-site 2 hours 2 hours 3-12 people Engineered Valves On-site 4 hours 4 hours 3-12 people
Motor-Operated Valves On-site 2 hours 2 hours 3-12 people Project Owner DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 79 00 - 10

ITEM LOCATION

CLASSROOM

TRAINING

DURATION
FIELD

TRAINING

DURATION

APPROXIMATE

NUMBER OF

ATTTENDEES
Pump Back System On-site 4 hours 4 hours 3-12 people
Electrical System On-site 4 hours 4 hours 3-12 people

3.5 Lesson Plan
A. Include in Contractor's proposed Lesson Plan, as a minimum, elements presented in Outline of Lesson Plan below. Identify specific components and procedures in proposed Lesson Plan, and tailor it to Owner’s needs.

B. Submit resumes of instructors providing training.

C. Detail specific instruction topics in Contractor's proposed Lesson Plan.

D. Reference training aids to be used in instruction and attach where applicable to proposed Lesson Plan. Describe "Hands-On" demonstrations planned for instruction.

E. Use submitted Operation and Maintenance Manuals as basis for instruction.

F. Submit schedule of dates and estimated duration of each segment of training Lesson Plan.

G. Allow for multiple sessions when several groups or shifts are involved.

H. Lesson Plan Outline

1. General Information
a. Identify course title and objectives.
b. Identify recommended types of attendees (e.g. managers, engineers, operators, maintenance.)
c. Identify suggestions for audiovisual equipment to be provided by Owner. d. Provide brief course description and course content. e. Describe format of classroom training (lecture, demonstration) and field training (demonstration, or hands-on)
f. Identify handout materials.
g. Identify supplementary self-study materials

2. Equipment Operation
a. Describe equipment's operating (process) function.
b. Describe equipment's fundamental operating principals and dynamics. c. Identify equipment's mechanical, electrical and electronic components and features. d. Identify support equipment associated with operation of subject equipment (i.e., air intake filters, valve actuators, motors).
e. Provide standard operating procedures to cover start-up, routine monitoring and shutdown of equipment. f. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, troubleshooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each equipment item.
g. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation or maintenance, perform demonstration of required O&M procedures for all seasons.

Project Owner DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 79 00 - 11
h. Describe emergency procedures, interlocks, and safety items and procedures, such as lock-out/tag-out.
i. Prepare and insert additional data in Operations and Maintenance Manuals when need for additional material becomes evident during instruction.

3. Detailed Component Description
a. Identify and describe in detail each component's function. b. Where applicable, group related components into subsystem. Describe subsystem functions and their interaction with other subsystems.
c. Identify and describe in detail equipment safeties and control interlocks.

4. Describe Preventive Maintenance (PM)
a. Describe PM inspection procedures required to:
i. Perform inspection of equipment in operation.
ii. Spot potential trouble symptoms (anticipate breakdowns). iii. Forecast maintenance requirements (predictive maintenance). b. Define recommended PM intervals for each component.
c. Provide lubricant and replacement part recommendations and limitations. d. Describe appropriate cleaning practices and recommended intervals.

5. Equipment Troubleshooting
a. Define recommended systematic troubleshooting procedures. b. Provide component specific troubleshooting checklist. c. Describe applicable equipment testing and diagnostic procedures to facilitate troubleshooting.

6. Equipment Corrective Maintenance
a. Describe recommended equipment preparation requirements. b. Identify and describe use of any special tools required for maintenance of equipment. c. Describe component removal/installation and disassembly/assembly procedures. d. Perform at least 2 "hands-on" demonstrations of common corrective maintenance repairs.
e. Describe recommended measuring instruments and procedures, and provide instruction on interpreting alignment measurements, as appropriate. f. Define recommended torqueing, mounting, calibration and/or alignment procedures and settings, as appropriate.
g. Describe recommended procedures to check/test equipment following corrective repair.

3.6 Training Aids
A. Incorporate training aids as appropriate to assist in instruction. At a minimum, include text and figure handouts with training aids. Other appropriate training aids are:

1. Audio-visual aids (e.g., films, slides, videotapes, overhead transparencies, posters, blueprints, diagrams, catalogue sheets).

2. Equipment Cutaways and Samples (e.g., spare parts, damaged equipment).

3. Tools (e.g., repair tools, customized tools, measuring and calibrating instruments).

Project Owner DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 01 79 00 - 12
B. Furnish complete training materials to include Operation and Maintenance data to be retained by each trainee.

C. Contractor's instructor shall use descriptive class handouts during instruction. Provide quality reproductions of photocopied class handouts. Provide class handouts during instruction with frequent references made to them. Customized handouts developed especially for instruction are encouraged. Attach handouts planned for instruction with Contractor's proposed Lesson Plan.

3.7 Videography
A. Enlist services of professional videographer to record training sessions and “hands-on” demonstrations. Video recording shall be digital format and edited to provide professionalquality video product for Owner’s use in future training. Include in edited video introductory titles, captions where necessary, and transitions between scenes. Smoothly edit unproductive time (i.e. breaks, downtime, etc.) out of final product. Each equipment video shall follow format of Manufacturer-supplied lesson plan and be 1-hour maximum.

B. Provide draft video to Owner for review in DVD format. Prior to submittal to Owner, coordinate review by respective Manufacturer for content. Owner will review draft video and provide comments on quality and content. Contractor’s videographer shall edit video accordingly and re-submit final video in DVD format.

END OF SECTION
Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -1

SECTION 02 05 00

BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Basic requirements for public works improvements specified in the following divisions.

Division 2 – Existing Conditions
Division 3 – Concrete
Division 5 – Metals
Division 8 – Openings
Division 9 – Finishes
Division 13 – Special Construction
Division 22 – Plumbing
Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Division 26 – Electrical
Division 27 – Communications
Division 28 – Electronic Safety and Security
Division 31 – Earthwork
Division 32 – Exterior Improvements
Division 33 – Utilities
Division 40 – Process Integration
Division 41 – Material Processing and Handling Equipment B. Basic requirements for public works improvements specified in reference standards.

C. General procedures and requirements for submittals, initial submittal, submittals required on Owner's request, progress reports, Working Drawings, Shop Drawings, Product Data and samples, notification of affected residences and businesses, and submittal forms.

D. Inspection and testing laboratory qualifications, duties and responsibilities.

E. Contractor's quality control requirements.

F. Owner's inspection and testing.

G. The language herein duplicates that in the following sections:

1. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures

2. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements

3. Section 01 61 00: Common Product Requirements

4. Section 01 65 00: Product Delivery Requirements

5. Section 01 66 00: Product Storage and Handling Requirements

6. Section 01 73 24: Seismic Restraint

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 26 05 10: Common Work Results for Electrical B. Section 31 05 50: Protecting Existing Utilities

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install complete operating engineered systems including appurtenant structural, mechanical and/or electrical mountings fittings or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements, for compliance with applicable building codes and standards, and as needed to permit systems to perform all functions required by Contract Documents and described in Manufacturer’s printed literature.

Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -2

B. Where a system of parts, pieces, sub-assemblies, devices, or supporting equipment is necessary for a complete and operational system, provide all items necessary for a complete and operational system, whether or not Contract Documents expressly state the need for each part, piece, sub-assembly, device, or supporting equipment.

1.4 Quality Assurance
A. Work shall conform to Federal, State and local building codes, electrical codes, fire codes, mechanical codes, energy codes, green building standards codes, and plumbing codes, and to Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) Regulations. Nothing in Contract Documents shall be interpreted as permission or direction to violate any governing code or ordinance.

B. Where reference is made to third-party standards such as ANSI, AWWA or ASTM specifications, or standards or codes adopted or promulgated by a public agency, it shall mean latest edition thereof formally adopted and published at time of advertisement for bids.

C. “Tying” or “Bundling” of manufactured equipment into packages to thwart competition shall be considered in non-compliance with Contract Documents. Owner is under no obligation to accept any Manufacturer based on such “bundling” arrangements, and may elect to reject a bundled Manufacturer solely on basis such bundling, in Owner’s opinion, represents an unfair business practice.

D. Manufacturer’s production facilities shall be open for inspection by Owner or Owner’s Representative at all times during production and testing of products furnished under this Contract.

1. Notify Owner’s Representative in writing of time and place of factory tests no later than 14 calendar days before they begin.

2. Factory testing shall be performed during normal working hours.

3. Owner may elect to witness, at their expense, factory tests and certifications required by Contract Documents by reporting intent to do so to Contractor.

4. Complete manufacturing operations, checks, adjustments and tests before Owner’s factory inspection.

5. Notify Owner’s Representative promptly if scheduled test or inspection is cancelled or rescheduled. If Owner has given notice of intent to witness testing, Owner will back-charge Contractor for costs incurred by Owner due to Contractor’s failure to promptly notify Owner’s Representative of rescheduling or cancellation of tests and inspections.

6. Unless otherwise specified, testing equipment shall be calibrated by testing agency acceptable to Owner at intervals not to exceed 12 months or following repair or relocating of test equipment.

7. Factory-witnessed tests, where required, shall be completed no sooner than 14 calendar days after written notification is delivered to Owner. Owner will pay travel expenses for Owner’s personnel to and from laboratory performance test location within 50 miles of Work for first test only. If test results indicate, in opinion of Owner’s Representative, that tested equipment fails to meet specified requirements, Owner’s Representative will notify Contractor of performance test failure. Contractor shall thereupon notify Manufacturer to reschedule testing and notify Owner of time of retest. Manufacturer shall thereupon at no expense to Owner, make modifications and perform tests as required to demonstrate compliance with Specifications. Additional costs for job specific travel and subsistence shall be reimbursed to Owner by Contractor.

E. Furnish samples required for testing. Cost of material samples to be tested shall be paid by Contractor. Cost of testing, sampling and laboratory services shall be paid for by Owner or Contractor as shown.

F. Testing by independent testing agencies shall proceed as follows:

Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -3

1. Testing Agencies shall conform to ASTM E329, shall have 5 years’ minimum experience in appropriate area of specialty, and shall be listed on “Roster of Approved Testing Agencies” for either City of Los Angeles, or City of San Diego, or shall be accepted by Owner.

2. Where required by these specifications, or where tests occur more than 50 miles from Work, hire Owner-accepted independent laboratory to perform testing and certify results.

Provide labor, products, tools, instruments, water, and power as directed for sampling for required tests.

3. Samples for testing shall be representative of final work product. Samples treated differently from final work product will not yield valid test results.

4. Tests of products shall follow commonly recognized standards of national technical organizations, and specified sampling and testing methods.

5. Contractor shall pay for quality assurance testing unless otherwise shown.

6. Retest costs or other testing costs invoiced to Owner and specified to be paid by Contractor may be deducted from Contractor’s next progress payment in lieu of Contractor’s direct payment of invoice.

7. Owner may test representative samples of each type and size of product furnished using independent testing agency. Failure of samples to pass tests will be deemed sufficient cause to reject entire lot delivered.

G. Testing by Owner shall proceed as follows:

1. Notify Owner’s Representative in writing at least 14 calendar days before testing of materials is required. Written notice shall include name of supplier along with contact information, address and telephone number for material source or Manufacturer.

H. Employ only competent workers on Work. Employed persons found to be incompetent, intemperate, troublesome, disorderly, or otherwise objectionable or who fail to perform Work properly, acceptably and in accordance with Manufacturers’ installation and warranty requirements, shall be immediately removed from Work by Contractor and not reemployed on Work.

1. Welders shall be AWS certified for type of work they are performing.

2. Welders on steel pressure piping or tank work shall be AWS certified as boiler and pressure vessel welders per Section IX Part A of AWS B2.1 as required by AWWA C200 paragraph 3.3.3.1.

3. Fabricators shall have 5 years’ minimum experience in appropriate area of specialty and shall be listed on “Roster of Licensed Fabricators” for either City of Los Angeles, or City of San Diego, or shall be accepted by Owner.

4. Deputy Inspectors shall comply with ASTM E329 and have 5 years’ minimum experience in appropriate area of specialty and shall be listed on “Roster of Approved Testing Agencies” for either City of Los Angeles, or City of San Diego, or shall be accepted by Owner.

I. Upon completion of Contract, Work shall be finished, tested and ready for operation. Work shall fulfill its intended purpose as described in Contract Documents, in submittals, and in Manufacturer's literature.

J. Form of evidence of satisfactory fulfillment of installed test and inspection requirements shall be, at Owner’s Representative’s discretion, either tests or inspections carried out in Owner’s Representative's presence, or by certificates and reports of tests and inspections carried out by accepted persons or organizations.

Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -4

K. Tests of items at place of manufacture during and/or upon completion of manufacture, shall include material tests, hydraulic pressure tests, electric and instrumentation subsystem tests, performance and operating tests and inspections in conformance with relevant industry standards and as detailed in these Specifications. Tests shall satisfy Owner’s Representative that items tested and inspected comply with Contract requirements.

L. Piping systems and elements shall comply with ASME Codes, and appropriate ASTM, API or AWWA standards.

M. Products requiring electrical connection shall be listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose shown.

N. Wiring terminations shall match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials shown. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70.

O. Select options compatible with other products or materials where multiple choices are available for Contractor's selection of products or materials.

P. Contractor’s quality control shall ensure the following:

1. Arrange work to be readily accessible and easy to operate and maintain where detail drawings are not included in Contract Documents, supplementary drawings or Shop Drawings and submittals.

2. Combinations of manufactured equipment shall be fully compatible and work safely and successfully as a unit. Furnish necessary mountings, couplings and appurtenances with each unit.

3. Relocations or adjustment of existing facilities noted in Contract Documents shall be done as needed. If existing items are lost or damaged during construction, replace with new items of equal or better quality.

4. Make field measurements needed to fabricate and install Work before ordering or beginning work. Make minor changes in alignments and dimensions as needed to remedy or avoid utilities and structural conflicts.

5. If products are furnished which differ from those shown and which require changes to enclosures, mounting and support structures, power and control circuitry or other work to accommodate furnished product, provide changes required at no additional cost to Owner and of same quality as shown.

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. ANSI/AWS 2.4 Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing and Nondestructive Examination

2. ANSI/NSF 60 Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals – Health Effects

3. ANSI/NSF 61 Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects

4. ASCE 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures Chapter 13 and Chapter 15

5. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels, Division 1.

6. ASTM E329 Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection

7. AWWA C105 Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems

8. AWWA C200 Steel Water Pipe 6-inch and Larger

9. California Building Code (CBC)

10. California Electrical Code (CEC)

11. California Energy Code (CEnC)

12. California Fire Code (CFC)

13. California Green Building Code (CALGreen Code)

14. California Mechanical Code (CMC)

15. California Plumbing Code (CPC)

16. MSS SP127 Bracing for Piping Systems Seismic-Wind-Dynamic Design, Selection, Application

17. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC)
Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -5

18. SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems B. Manufacturers of structural components and systems shall use standards, specifications, recommendations, findings and interpretations of professionally recognized groups such as AISC, AISI, AAMA, AWS, ASTM, MBMA, Federal Specifications, and unpublished research by MBMA as the basis for establishing design, drafting, fabrication, and quality criteria, practices, and tolerances. For convenience, one or more sources may be referenced in a portion of these specifications. In all instances, however, the Manufacturer's design, drafting, fabrication and quality criteria, practices, and tolerances shall govern, unless expressly countermanded by Contract Documents.

1.6 Submittal Procedures
A. Submit descriptive information, including Shop Drawings, Product Data, Installation or Application Instructions, Operation and Maintenance Instructions, Certificates of Compliance, Engineering Calculations, Foundry and Test Record Transcripts, and other engineering data covering materials, equipment, and/or methods of work, which will enable Owner’s Representative to advise Owner whether Contractor's proposed materials, equipment, or methods of work are in general conformance with design concept and in compliance with Contract Documents. Submittals shall become permanent part of Work under this contract.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for accuracy and completeness of information in each submittal and shall assure material, equipment, or method of work is as described in submittals. Submittals shall contain required information, including satisfactory identification of items, units, and assemblies in relation to Contract Documents.

C. Submittals shall be made by Contractor, except where Owner and Contractor mutually agree in writing on case-by-case basis for Owner to deal directly with material or equipment supplier.

D. Verify Work described in each submittal conforms to Contract Documents. Contractor shall indicate by signed stamp on submittals that they have checked submittals and that Work shown conforms to Contract requirements and has been checked for dimensions and relationship with Work of other trades involved.

E. Ensure there is no conflict with other submittals. Notify Owner in each case where Contractor’s submittal may affect Work of another contractor or owner. Ensure coordination of submittals among related crafts and subcontractors.

F. Contractor may authorize material or equipment supplier to deal directly with Owner or Owner’s Representative with regard to submittal on a case-by-case basis with Owner’s consent. Contractor, however, shall be responsible for accuracy and completeness of information contained in submittals.

G. Number submittals using numbering system as directed by Owner’s Representative.

H. Shop Drawing Transmittal Form. Use form included at end of this section unless otherwise directed by Owner. Submit separate form for each submittal and assign a submittal number.

Form shall be first page of each digital submittal. Submittals without completed Contractor's Transmittal Form as first page will be returned without review and stamped "REJECTED/RESUBMIT AS SPECIFIED or REJECTED."
I. Stock or standard drawings will not be accepted for review unless full identification and supplementary information is shown thereon in ink or typewritten form.

J. Highlight and annotate exceptions and departures from Contract Documents along with brief justification for each exception or departure.

K. Provide space for reviewer’s review and acceptance stamp.

L. Show US units on submittals. For submittals prepared in foreign countries where Manufacturer’s literature is printed solely in metric units, Contractor may make hand annotations to convert to US units as long as annotations are legible and correct.

Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -6

M. Submittals not bearing US units will be returned without review.

N. Submittals bearing text in languages other than English will be returned without review.

O. Materials submittals shall include the following:

1. Brand names and Manufacturers.

2. I.D. Plate – Product No., etc.

3. Specification section and/or plan drawing number.

4. Intended use of product, locations, etc.

P. Use of contract drawing reproductions for Shop Drawings is subject to rejection.

1.7 Electronic (Digital) Submittals
A. Submit digital copy of each submittal using one of following methods chosen by Owner:

1. Email: Send submittal as pdf attachment to Owner and Owner’s Representative.

2. Data tracking System (DTS): Upload digital file to server maintained by Owner’s Representative.

3. CD: Burn a CD containing one or more submittals and furnish copy of CD to Owner and Owner’s Representative.

B. Multiple hard copies of submittals will not be accepted in lieu of digital submittal unless otherwise authorized or directed by Owner’s Representative.

C. One digital copy of stamped submittal with cover letter will be returned to Contractor by email or DTS as appropriate.

D. Verify emails sent with large attachments have been successfully received by Owner and Owner’s Representative. Do not send files in excess of 5 MB in size as attachments to emails due to size restrictions associated with users’ email systems.

1.8 Paper Submittals
A. Submit paper submittals for:

1. Electrical submittals

2. Reinforcing steel schedules larger than 11”x17” original format

3. Steel pipe lay diagrams larger than 11”x17” original format

4. Original drawings larger than 11”x17” size
B. Submit 6 copies of submittals unless otherwise stated.

C. Fold paper submittals to approximately 9”x12”.

D. Three copies will be returned to Contractor.

1.9 Installation, Application, or Assembly Instructions and Operation and Maintenance Manual Submittals
A. Installation, Application, or Assembly Instructions: Submit 2 paper copies for review and 4 copies of complete, bound set of assembly and installation manuals for each item of equipment for which manual is required. Submit digital file in pdf format of final submittal.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Submit 2 copies for review and 4 copies of complete, bound set of operation and maintenance manuals for each item of equipment for which manual is required. Included in binder shall be Shop Drawings and a section for Owner to add 11”x17” copies of record drawings. Submit digital file in pdf format of final submittal.

1.10 Owner’s Review of Submittals
A. Owner’s review or acceptance of submittals shall only constitute acceptance of:

1. Portions of submittal in compliance with Contract Documents.

Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -7

2. Exceptions or departures expressly noted on Contractor’s submittal as “exceptions” or “departures” and accepted in writing by Owner.

3. Exceptions or departures Owner or their Representative may by chance discover and acknowledge and accept in writing in Owner’s response to said submittal.

B. If any submittal’s exception or departure from Contract Documents is neither noted by Contractor on their submittal nor acknowledged and expressly accepted by Owner, Contract shall remain unchanged. Notwithstanding Owner’s acceptance of submittals containing exceptions or departures not brought to Owner’s attention, Owner’s failure to discover said exceptions and departures in submittals, shall not relieve Contractor of any Contract responsibilities, whether exceptions or departures were intentional or unintentional on Contractor’s part,
C. Resubmittal review will focus on items expressly noted by Owner or their Representative as requiring correction in prior submittals. Cleary identify changes made on resubmittals. If a resubmittal deviates from a prior submittal with respect to items accepted in prior submittal, and Contractor does not note exception or deviation, Contract shall remain unchanged.

Owner’s failure to discover exceptions and departures in resubmittals whether intentional or unintentional on Contractor’s part shall in no way relieve Contractor of any Contract responsibilities.

D. Review of submittals will proceed as follows:

1. Submit specified quantity of complete submittals together with Contractor's submittal forms to Owner’s Representative for review. At Owner’s discretion, Owner may review submittals prior to, parallel with, or after Owner’s Representative has reviewed submittals.

2. Submittals will be stamped "ACCEPTED", "ACCEPTED AS NOTED", "REVISE AS NOTED/RESUBMIT", "REJECTED/RESUBMIT AS SPECIFIED", “NO ACTION REQUIRED,” or “SUBMITTAL NOT REQUESTED, RETURNED WITHOUT REVIEW.” Three copies with letter of transmittal will be returned to Contractor.

3. If review indicates material, equipment, or Work method is in general conformance with design concept and complies with Contract Documents, submittal copies will be marked "ACCEPTED." In this event, Contractor may begin to implement Work method or incorporate material or equipment covered by submittal.

4. If review indicates minor corrections are required, copies will be marked "ACCEPTED AS NOTED." Contractor may begin implementing Work method or incorporating material and equipment covered by submittal in accordance with noted corrections. Provide corrected copy where submittal information will be incorporated in Operation and Maintenance Data.

5. If review reveals submittal is insufficient or contains incorrect data, copies will be marked "REVISE AS NOTED/RESUBMIT or REVISE CALCULATIONS." Except at their own risk, Contractor shall not undertake work covered by submittal until submittal has been revised, resubmitted, and returned marked either “ACCEPTED" or "ACCEPTED AS NOTED."

6. If review indicates material, equipment, or Work methods do not conform to Contract Documents, copies of submittal will be marked "REJECTED/RESUBMIT AS SPECIFIED or REJECTED." Submittals with exceptions and departures not clearly identified may be rejected. Except at their own risk, Contractor shall not undertake Work covered by submittals until new submittal is made and returned marked either “ACCEPTED" or "ACCEPTED AS NOTED."

7. If drawing or data is returned stamped "ACCEPTED", "ACCEPTED AS NOTED", “NO ACTION REQUIRED,” or “SUBMITTAL NOT REQUESTED, RETURNED WITHOUT REVIEW.” No further resubmittals will be required for that item.

8. If drawing or data is stamped "REVISE AS NOTED/RESUBMIT," or "REJECTED/RESUBMIT AS SPECIFIED or REJECTED," make necessary corrections and resubmit documents as required in Instruction 1. Contractor's submittal form Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -8

transmitting revised documents shall show that documents comprise a resubmittal.

Revisions and re-submittals shall be numbered as Revision #1, Revision #2, or as appropriate.

9. If changes other than those noted by Owner are made on submittal before resubmittal, note such changes on resubmittal.

10. Revise and resubmit submittals as required, until confirmation of compliance is obtained.

11. Include entire submittal package in resubmittals unless partial resubmittals are accepted in writing by Owner.

E. Costs incurred by Owner for original submittal and first re-submittal will be paid by Owner.

Costs incurred by Owner for 2nd and subsequent re-submittals will be deducted from payment due Contractor.

F. Allow not less than 31 calendar days for review and response to submittals. Review may be delayed if contingent on receipt of other submittals. Upon timely written request by Contractor, Owner’s Representative will make reasonable efforts to shorten review periods which may fall on Contractor's critical path.

G. Contractor shall have no claim for damages or extension of time due to any delay resulting from making required revisions to submittals.

H. Correct and resubmit rejected submittals within 14 calendar days.

I. Wait to correct and resubmit submittals until reviewed submittal has been returned to Contractor. Submittals revised and resubmitted prior to Contractor’s receipt of review comments for submittal will be returned without review to avoid generating confusion that might arise from having multiple versions of submittals in various stages of review generates confusion and will not be allowed.

J. Do not order products or begin work described in required submittals until such submittals have been reviewed and returned by Owner stamped "ACCEPTED" or "ACCEPTED AS NOTED". Contractor’s acceptance of delivery of products prior to receipt of Owner’s Representative's satisfactory return of applicable submittals shall be at Contractor's risk.

K. Review of submittals by Owner’s Representative shall extend solely to general type and layout of Work and shall not be construed as relieving Contractor of full responsibility for adequacy and accuracy of submitted designs and details shown in submittals.

L. Owner’s Representative’s review of submittals shall be limited to review of products to be incorporated in Work and to remain in place upon project completion.

1. Contractor shall have sole responsibility at all times for construction means, methods and jobsite safety.

2. Contractor shall retain services of California-licensed civil, structural or traffic engineer, as appropriate, to design and prepare plans for necessary safety equipment required by OSHA, Cal OSHA and other state and local regulatory authorities during construction, and to prepare summary documents for Contractor’s use for accomplishing said work including, but not limited to sheeting, shoring, trench plating, excavation protection, falsework, formwork, scaffolding, barricading, pedestrian safety and traffic control.

3. Originals of summary documents, signed and sealed by engineer of record who prepared them, shall be submitted solely as proof this requirement has been fulfilled.

4. Since Contractor has sole responsibility for means, methods and jobsite safety, review of said documents will be limited to verifying preparing engineer’s registration is current and that engineer of record has no active complaints filed against them with California Board for Professional Engineers and Land Surveyors.

M. Do not ship items to jobsite until applicable submittals have been accepted by Owner.

Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -9

1.11 Initial Submittals
A. Submit the following within 72 hours after bid opening.

1. Names and addresses of Manufacturers furnishing products valued greater than either 4 percent of contract value or $40,000, whichever is less. State locations of shops at which manufacture will take place. State whether products are already designed or in production.

Include brief description of products proposed, including sizes and catalog numbers.

2. Letter addressed to Owner’s Representative identifying Contractor's superintendent, safety officer, and traffic control coordinator, including emergency telephone numbers and signature authorization, and listing names, addresses and telephones for subcontractors.

B. Submit the following within 14 days after bid opening.

1. Proposed Construction Schedule.

2. Submittal Log, listing required submittals to be submitted, including required submittals by subcontractors. No extension of contract time will be granted as a result of Contractor’s failure to make timely submittals.

1.12 Submittals on Owner's Request - Supplemental Information A. Submit detailed construction schedule updates with monthly pay requests to describe scheduling of elements of construction requiring Owner's or Contractor's coordination with public, or other private parties or public agencies.

B. Supplemental information will be requested for "accepted equals" and may be requested when there is a question a Manufacturer's product conforms to Contract Documents. Owner reserves right to require submittal of supplemental information as described herein before acceptance of product.

C. Certification of compliance with listed reference standards shall be submitted by Manufacturers on Owner's request. Failure of Owner to request certification of compliance shall not serve as waiver of Contractor's duty to comply with reference standards.

D. Transcripts of results of acceptance tests performed at point of manufacture of products furnished shall be submitted by Manufacturers on Owner's request.

E. Samples shall be submitted on Owner's request.

F. Names and addresses of nearest local service representatives maintaining technical service personnel and complete inventory of spare parts and accessories shall be submitted on Owner's request.

G. List of 3 installations in which products comparable in size, capacity and rating with those required in Contract Documents are now in regular operation shall be submitted on Owner's request. Include listing of size capacity or rating of each installation. Include name and telephone number of at least one reference responsible for operations at each installation whom Owner’s Representative may contact.

1.13 Progress Reports
A. Daily log shall be submitted by Contractor's superintendent on one-page form provided by Owner. These logs shall be detailed with activities that took place during each day. Submit logs daily to Owner’s Representative by end of following workday.

B. Schedule updates shall be submitted with monthly pay requests. If Work falls behind schedule, monthly pay requests shall include revised schedules to demonstrate how Contractor intends to bring work back on schedule.

C. Record Drawings, consisting of one set of full size annotated blue-line plans and other drawings forming a part of contract, showing installed locations of improvements and changes made during construction shall be available to Owner for inspection throughout project.

Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -10

Record deviations from Contract Documents, including accepted change orders, using additional sketches or ink revisions, immediately after installing each portion of Work. Show locations of underground piping, conduit, sensor lines, valves, capped ends, branch fittings, pull boxes and Work. Keep one current record copy of Contract Documents, addenda, supplementary drawings, working drawings, change orders and clarifications at site and in good order. Report changes and deviations promptly to Owner’s Representative.

D. Partial payment requests may be withheld if daily logs, schedule updates or record drawings are damaged, lost or not kept current to satisfaction of Owner’s Representative.

1.14 Contractor’s Notice of Pending Delay Claim
A. If a delay claim is foreseen by Contractor, Contractor shall immediately notify Owner in writing.

Following said notice, Contractor shall have no more than 7 calendar days to furnish followup information as required by Owner to allow Owner to act judiciously to minimize losses. As a minimum, said information shall consist of a letter identifying and substantiating cost of expected claim per day of delay accompanied by schedule showing any available float and delay’s impact on overall schedule.

1.15 Working Drawings
A. Working Drawings shall be defined as job-specific drawings showing details of construction not shown on Plans and required to be designed by Contractor.

B. Working Drawings shall be prepared to scale wherever possible and shall include project name on shop drawing.

C. Working Drawings shall include:

SECTION TITLE SUBJECT PROFESSIONAL

ENGINEER
STAMP
01 50 00 Temporary Facilities Noise Control Plan Required 31 2 19 Excavation and Fill Traffic Control Plan Required 01 57 23 Temporary Stormwater Pollution
Control
Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan
(SWPPP)
Required
02 41 13 Selective Site Demolition Demolition Sequence Plan Required 01 35 19 Cofferdams Structure Excavation and Backfill Required 03 10 00 Concrete Forming Falsework Required
03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing Placing Reinforcement Not Required 8 General Prestressed Concrete Construction Required
05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing Structural Steel Falsework Required 31 05 50 Protecting Existing Utilities Pipe and Utilities Supports at Trench Crossings
Not Required
31 23 00 Excavation and Fill Shoring Plan Required
31 23 19 Dewatering Dewatering Plan Required

1.16 Shop Drawings
A. Shop Drawings shall be defined as job-specific drawings showing details of manufactured or assembled products proposed for incorporation in the Work.

B. Shop Drawings shall be prepared to scale wherever possible and shall include project name on shop drawing.

C. Except where preparation of a submittal is contingent upon acceptance of a prior submittal, Contractor shall make every reasonable effort to combine submittals relating to same class or portion of Work into one package, regardless of variety of trades or types of equipment required to construct that portion of Work. e.g. above ground piping, fittings, valves, actuators, pipe stands, couplings, flow meters and appurtenances shall be submitted as one package for review.

Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -11

1. Packages shall clearly reference specification sections and specified submittal requirements therein, showing where in submitted literature each submittal requirement is satisfied.

2. Packages clearly incomplete will be returned without review.

3. To facilitate approval of critical path items or to facilitate Contractor’s communication with multiple suppliers and subcontractors, packages may contain several submittals from several suppliers so long as relevant submittals are contained in package.

4. Where expedited review of one submittal item within package is desired to facilitate critical path items, notify Owner’s Representative in writing to request expedited review of said item. Contractor’s request for expedited review of a portion of a submittal package shall be taken as full acceptance of responsibility by Contractor for any subsequent field modifications or substitutions later necessary to remedy any conflict between expedited submittals and other submittals or to remedy any conflict between expedited submittals and Contract Documents not brought to Owner’s attention at time of submittal.

D. Shop Drawings for piping, casing ductwork, well screen, or tubing shall include:

1. Brand names and Manufacturers.

2. Specification section and/or plan drawing number.

3. Intended use and location of product.

4. Key or index showing locations of spools and fittings.

5. Order of installation. Each spool shall receive a unique mark number. No other spool or fitting, even on separate pipelines or casings included in Contract, shall have same mark number. Sequential order of mark numbers shall correspond to a logical order of installation for each pipeline.

6. Laying lengths, dimensions, clearances and tolerances for spools and fittings.

7. Lengths, dimensions, sizes, screen opening sizes, clearance and tolerances for casing, screen, fittings, and tubing.

8. Couplings and end types of casing, screen, fittings, and tubing.

9. Proposed casing, screen and tubing materials including thicknesses.

10. Clearly legible drawing showing each pipe, duct, or tube fitting and/or spool in plan view and in profile.

11. Station and invert elevation of grade changes and changes in horizontal alignment

12. Slopes of pipe not vertical or horizontal.

13. Horizontal and vertical alignment data for curves, bends, tees and outlets.

14. Couplings and end types of pipe, spools, fittings, outlets and adjacent valves or pipeline equipment.

15. Proposed pipeline linings and coatings including thicknesses.

16. How connections will be made between Work under this contract and existing work or work under other contracts.

17. Pipe, duct and valve support sizes and locations, including anchor bolt sizes and embedments.

18. Relationship of piping and ductwork to other Work.

E. Shop Drawings for valves, pumps or pipeline equipment shall include:

1. Brand names and Manufacturers.

2. I.D. Plate – Product No., etc.

3. Packager, assembler, or supplier.

4. Specification section and/or plan drawing number.

5. Intended use and location of product.

6. Laying lengths and dimensions, clearances, tolerances and end types.

7. Weight and type of valves, pumps or equipment.

8. Valve and pump port sizes and tolerances.

9. Dimensions and orientation of actuators and pilot systems. Locations of actuator stops.

Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -12

10. Valve stem extensions and supports, stem guides.

11. Sizing calculations and stem support design stamped by California-licensed engineer.

12. Proposed linings and coatings.

13. Performance characteristics.

14. Special features.

15. Parts and materials lists and ratings and details of Work, accessories, auxiliary items, and appurtenances to be furnished, along with references to appropriate ASTM, Federal Specifications and other reference standards and grades.

16. Piping and conduit attachments and sizes.

F. Shop Drawings for concrete forms and falsework shall include:

1. Detailed drawings of falsework proposed to be used to include a. General layout
b. Size of members
c. Anticipated stresses
d. Grade of materials to be used in falsework
e. Means of protecting existing construction which supports false work f. Typical soil conditions

2. Form ties and related accessories, including taper plugs, if taper ties are used.

3. Form gaskets

4. Proposed locations and type of construction joints, including joints shown on the construction drawings and joints required for construction, but not shown on the construction drawings

5. Sequence of forming and concrete placing operations

6. Engineering calculations signed and sealed by a professional Civil or Structural Engineer registered in State of California for both the falsework and forming systems and the stresses induced on the falsework and form systems.

G. Shop Drawings for structural and architectural items shall include:

1. Brand names and Manufacturers.

2. I.D. Plate – Product No., etc.

3. Specification section and/or plan drawing number.

4. Intended use and location of product.

5. Lengths, widths, thickness, embedment, dimensions and tolerances of structural members or architectural items.

6. Detailing of openings and wall penetrations including doors, windows, hatches, louvers, vents, ducts, pipes and floor, slab, wall and door penetrations.

7. Concrete foundations and bases for machinery and equipment, including joints, joint filler and sealer, and reinforcing.

8. Connection details including applicable sizes, diameters, thickness, spacing, embedment and edge distances of bolts, anchors, rivets, nails, screws, spikes, connection plates, holdowns, joints, sleepers and other fasteners and fastening systems.

9. Welding details using standard ANSI/AWS 2.4 symbols and showing type, electrode, length, spacing and thickness of welds.

10. Materials listing and properties, including types, strengths and finishes of concrete, grout, mortar, masonry, metals, wood, plastics, and other construction materials.

H. Shop Drawings for machinery and equipment shall include:

1. Brand names and Manufacturer.

2. I.D. Plate – Product No., etc.

3. Packager, assembler, or supplier.

4. Specification section and/or plan drawing number.

5. Intended use and location of product.

6. Dimensions, clearances, floor space, and servicing access requirements.

7. Weight and type of equipment.

Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -13

8. Location where product will be installed.

9. Anchor bolt sizes and embedments.

10. Finishes and coatings.

11. Performance characteristics.

12. Special features.

13. Parts and materials lists and ratings, and details of Work and appurtenances to be furnished, along with references to appropriate ASTM, Federal Specifications, and other reference standards and grades.

14. Gauges, meters, transducers, and other components.

15. Piping and conduit attachments and sizes, duct bank details, spacers, and means of securing conduits in place during concrete placement.

I. Include in Shop Drawings for electrically powered or controlled equipment, and for electrical and instrumentation panels the following in addition to the above requirements for Shop Drawings for machinery and equipment:

1. Plans, elevations, and sections, showing arrangements and positions of panel components, including nameplates.

2. Grounding.

3. Dielectric connections and materials used to isolate dissimilar metals.

4. Electrical diagrams as needed to show wiring circuit schematics, single line diagrams, voltage wire numbers, and identified interlocks and terminals.

5. Logic diagrams for programmable controllers or relays if used.

6. Nameplate data showing nameplate material, height of letters, number of lines, inscriptions and dimensions.

7. Special features.

J. Shop Drawings for replacement items shall include field measurements needed to verify fit in existing spaces.

1.17 Product Data, and Other Submittals
A. Product Data shall be defined as Manufacturer’s pre-printed drawings, catalog data, or catalog cut sheets which need not include project name. However, where multiple products or options are shown in same catalog cut, product or option being furnished shall be clearly delineated as specified below.

B. Product Data shall clearly indicate applicable items when several products are covered on one page. Using black ink, indicate on submitted Product Data, specification section or plan reference being satisfied.

C. Installation Instructions, Application Instructions, or Assembly Instructions shall be defined as Manufacturer's printed instructions including warranty requirements, clearances required and proper field procedures to deliver, handle, install and prepare product for use. In absence of Manufacturer's published literature, ASTM, AWWA or trade standards for installation will usually be accepted. If no instructions are submitted for installing or applying item of Work, Owner reserves right to stop work on subject item at any time, and to retain experts of Owner’s choosing to prepare appropriate instructions to control Contractor’s work. Installation Instructions shall include recommended bolt torques for assembly and installation of bolted items.

D. Operation and Maintenance Instructions shall be defined as Manufacturer's printed instructions for correct operation and maintenance procedures for product, along with data which must accompany manual as directed by current regulations of government agency.

Include operating instructions for each piece of equipment. Describe equipment function, operating characteristics, limiting conditions, operating instructions, startup procedures, normal and emergency conditions, regulation and control, and shutdown. Include preventative maintenance instructions. List warranty requirements. Explain and illustrate preventative maintenance tasks. Include lubrication charts, lists of acceptable lubricants, trouble shooting Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -14

instructions, and lists of required maintenance tools and equipment. List recommended spare parts, their costs, and ordering information for one Manufacturer who can supply these parts.

Index instructions for easy reference. Include information for installed equipment only.

E. Manufacturer's Statement of Responsibility shall be copy of form attached, signed by authorized factory representative for Manufacturer whose product is being furnished.

F. Certificates of Compliance shall mean the same thing as “affidavits of compliance” and shall certify materials or procedures have been sampled, tested and found to comply with applicable reference standards. Do not ship items described therein until Certificates of Compliance are accepted by Owner.

G. For powered equipment over 2 horsepower, obtain Manufacturer’s certification that:

1. Equipment has been factory-checked or field-checked as necessary and is approved for operation.

2. Equipment operates within allowable limits for vibration.

3. Controls, protective devices, instrumentation, and control panels furnished as part of equipment package are properly installed, calibrated, and functioning.

4. Control logic for start-up, shutdown, sequencing, interlocks, and emergency shutdown have been tested and are properly functioning.

5. Equipment has been installed and adjusted in accordance with Manufacturer's requirements and is properly aligned and ready for operation.

6. Equipment has been serviced, lubricated and properly prepared to perform in accordance with intent of Contract Documents.

7. Equipment is ready for operation, and Owner’s Staff is suitably instructed in operation and maintenance of equipment.

8. Specified Manufacturer's warranty will commence, and be in full force from date of final acceptance of project or applicable portion of project by Owner.

9. Signer has visited site, inspected equipment and installation, and certifies equipment is ready and suitable for full time operation under full-load conditions.

H. Engineering Calculations shall be clearly legible, shall follow recognized engineering principles and shall be sufficiently detailed to permit ready check of procedures used. Where published tables or charts are included in calculations, clearly show design or load variables used to make selection, highlighting applicable columns or rows in tables and highlighting intersecting variables on chart axes. Engineering calculations shall demonstrate compliance with current state and local codes, applicable standards, and contract requirements.

Calculations shall be sealed by registered engineer licensed in State of California.

Calculations or drawings bearing seals with expired expiration dates will not be accepted.

I. Foundry or Test Record Transcripts shall fully describe required tests in accordance with specified test standards, shall certify that factory quality control, testing and inspection requirements have been successfully completed. Do not ship items described therein until Certificates of Compliance are accepted by Owner.

J. Statements of Qualifications for optional maintenance contracts from Manufacturers or suppliers of products shall fully describe Manufacturer’s qualifications, experience, pricing, and recommended maintenance schedule. Contractor’s submittal of Manufacturer’s qualifications for optional maintenance contracts shall not be construed as placing maintenance service contracts within scope of this contract, except Contractor may be obligated to pay for maintenance contract if:

1. Contract Documents expressly state Contractor shall bear this responsibility and expense under warranty or other express obligations, or
Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -15

2. Acceptance of a Manufacturer as an accepted equal is predicated in writing on Contractor’s furnishing operation and maintenance services for stipulated period as part of warranty requirement.

K. Samples shall be submitted as follows:

1. Furnish samples, finished as specified, and as intended to be used on or in Work. Send samples to Owner’s Representative, carriage prepaid.

2. Submit samples at least 21 days before date by which Owner’s approval is required. Allow 14 days for review and return of samples.

3. Submit 2 of each sample, except for field samples. Attach completed Contractor's submittal form to sample. List items being transmitted, stating proposed use and location, product, color, trade name, lot, style, and model as appropriate.

4. Resubmit samples until acceptable. One of each sample will be returned to Contractor upon acceptance.

5. Samples of finishes shall be 8" x 10". and shall be of minimum thickness consistent with sample presentation. In lieu thereof, submit actual full-size item.

6. Samples of value may be returned to Contractor for use in Work after review, analysis, comparison, and/or testing as may be required by Owner’s Representative.

7. Furnish one sample of accepted products, colors, or textures to Owner’s Representative for final record. Show identification previously described including, if finish sample, Manufacturer, mix proportion, name of color, building, Contractor, subcontractor, and surfaces to which applied on back of sample.

L. Furnish the following submittals

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Preconstruction
Photographs or Videos
Preconstruction photographs or videos shall be submitted to Owner before Work is performed which has potential to disturb or modify public or private property not owned by Owner. Photographs shall be of sufficient quality and thoroughness to fully document preexisting damage or wear to photographed property for which Contractor or Owner might be asked to compensate property owner were it not for photographic evidence of preexisting damage. Where existing cracks in concrete, masonry or other materials are wider than thickness of a dime, include dime or similar visual standard in photo or video for reference.

Failure by Contractor to submit preconstruction photographs or videos, may be taken by owner as evidence that subsequent claims by property owners for damage to their property can be rightfully attributed to Contractor's actions.

Refer to Section 01 32 33.

Schedule for Lubrication and
Run-in Procedures
Submit 2 weeks before beginning procedures.

Certificates of Compliance Submit on Owner’s Request
Transcripts of Acceptance
Test Results
Submit on Owner’s Request as needed to verify quality of manufactured products Reports of Installed Test
and Inspection Results
Provide and use forms acceptable to Owner’s Representative which show test information, including specified operational parameters.

Manufacturer’s Certification Submit certification letters on Manufacturer’s letterhead for powered equipment over 2 horsepower.

Manufacturer’s Statement
of Responsibility
Furnish where required in Contract Documents.

Engineering Calculations Submit for seismic anchorage systems per Engineering Calculations requirements.

Manufacturer’s Written
Acceptance of Installation
(where "Manufacturer's
Written acceptance of installation of products shall be certified and submitted by authorized factory representative. This written acceptance shall state factory authorized representative has inspected installation, alignment, lubrication and .

Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -16

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Statement of
Responsibility" is required)
operation of furnished equipment and found it to fully comply with specified design and warranty requirements and be ready for safe operation.

Warranty Unless otherwise stated, furnish one-year warranty from date of final acceptance.

M. Furnish the following submittals for items requiring seismic restraint.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Shop Drawings Submit per structural Shop Drawing requirements. .

Product Data Submit for pre-manufactured systems per Product Data requirements.

Engineering Calculations Submit for seismic anchorage systems per Engineering Calculations requirements.

N. Under California Building Code and ASCE 7 §13.1.4, Engineering Calculations are not required for:

1. Seismic restraint of components weighing 20 pounds or less.

2. Seismic restraint of components mounted 4’ or less above floor level weighing 400 pounds or less.

3. Seismic restraint of piping, utility or distribution systems weighing 5 pounds per lineal foot or less.

O. For wall and slab-mounted equipment, requirement for engineering calculations will be waived if Contractor submits unsealed calculations demonstrating to Owner’s satisfaction that either

1. Bolting strength in shear for floor-mounted equipment exceeds weight of equipment. (For bolt strengths in shear, shear, refer to CBC Table 1911.2 or ICC data for concrete anchors) or

2. Bolting strength in shear for wall-mounted equipment exceeds twice weight of equipment. (For Bolt strengths in shear, refer to CBC Table 1911.2 or ICC data for concrete anchors) P. Calculations required for seismic restraint of nonstructural components shall be sealed by California-licensed civil or structural engineer and shall follow ASCE 7 §13.3 where:

1. Ip shall be assumed to be 1.5 unless otherwise shown on Structural Plans.

2. SDS shall be as shown on Structural Plans or Geotechnical Report. If not shown, use SDS equal to 1.0

3. ap and Rp shall be as shown in ASCE 7 Table 13.5-1 or Table 13.6-1 as appropriate.

4. Under ASCE 7, §13.4.2, anchors in concrete and masonry shall be designed for 1.3 times calculated force Fp

5. Where earthquake lateral design loads for nonstructural components are shown on Plans for Contractor’s convenience, typically as a multiple of wet weight (W) of furnished item shown on Sheet S1, either this conservative Plan value may be used, or a more exact value based on exact elevation of furnished item may be used and substantiated by calculation.

Q. When anchoring new structures into existing concrete foundations, seismic design of foundation anchors shall provide lugs for at least 2 redundant anchor bolts beyond those required by seismic Engineering Calculations. These shall be placed to accommodate unexpected field conditions, field interferences, pre-existing embedments, or concrete cracking, deterioration, spalling or honeycombing. If field conditions render up to 2 anchor bolts ineffective, up to 2 redundant bolts may be omitted in the field.

1.18 Notification of Affected Residences and Businesses A. Written notification, with Contractor's 24-hour emergency phone number, shall be provided to residences and businesses fronting project on either side of street for work within 500’ of projects on sites outside of right-of-way. Notify these parties 72 hours in advance of Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -17

construction which will affect these properties. Door-hangers or other means of notification shall be submitted to and accepted in advance by Owner’s Representative.

1.19 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.

1.20 Delivery, Storage and Handling
A. Before shipping, verify field dimensions, utility locations and electrical compatibility for items of Work which may require relocation, refitting, or different electrical motors and wiring if field dimensions differ from those shown on Plans.

B. If Contractor discovers conflict during surveying, staking, verification of field dimensions, verification of utility locations or verification of electrical compatibility, they shall bring this matter to Owner’s attention as soon as conflict is discovered and before materials or equipment are shipped. Owner will make adjustments to Contract requirements needed to accommodate field conditions, and will pay reasonable costs for upgrades or modifications required to be made at place of manufacture prior to shipping to accommodate conflicts discovered.

C. Owner will not pay costs of shipping and returning items to place of manufacture unless:

1. Owner has acted to prevent Contractor from completing surveys, staking, verification of field dimensions, verification of utility locations or verification of electrical compatibility, and Contractor has notified Owner of this fact in writing before shipping equipment, or

2. Changes required are direct result of buried utility conflicts where said utilities were neither shown on Plans in their approximate location, nor located by Underground Service Alert, nor evident from surface features.

D. Ship and deliver products to jobsite as follows:

1. Do not ship, accept delivery of or store items on site for which applicable submittals have not been accepted.

2. Before shipping, operate valves, motors, pumps, actuators, and mechanical equipment at factory to ensure products are complete and in working condition.

3. Deliver or store only products of accepted Manufacturers at site.

4. Delivered items may be inspected to satisfy Owner’s Representative that items are of specified quality and workmanship and are in good order and condition at time of delivery.

Be prepared to remove all coverings, containers or crates to permit Owner’s Representative to inspect delivered items. Should Owner’s Representative find evidence of damage or deficient workmanship, provide necessary documentation or conduct such tests deemed necessary by Owner’s Representative to demonstrate compliance.

5. Coordinate with Owner and equipment supplier/Manufacturer, as necessary, and perform inventory and inspection to include all necessary unpacking and repacking operations to examine items delivered. Record in writing any apparent defects, damage, or missing portions and provide copy to Owner.

6. Deliver products in undamaged condition to jobsite in Manufacturer's original, unbroken, unopened, labeled packaging containers or bundles. Tag or label packages containers or bundles as needed to identify contents and name of equipment of which contents form a part.

7. For Owner-furnished products and equipment, Owner will make good all deficiencies noted in inventory and inspection at no cost to Contractor. Once received, Contractor shall be responsible for Owner-furnished items the same as for Work under the Contract, including proper insurance coverage, except Owner will correct any subsequently Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -18

discovered latent or hidden damage or defects in Owner-furnished items that could not be ascertained at time of delivery and were not caused by Contractor.

8. Deliver large multi-component assemblies in sections facilitating field handling and installation.

9. Ship oil-lubricated gearing, bearings, and other lubricated components with oil-soluble protective coating as described in warranty requirements or recommended by Manufacturer.

10. Parts and coatings contacting potable water, coating shall be NSF-listed. Coating shall provide protection for one year after final acceptance.

11. Pipes and fittings without openings covered will not be accepted for delivery.

E. Store products at jobsite as follows:

1. Contractor shall be responsible for damage or loss to products until Final Acceptance.

2. Store materials per Manufacturer’s recommendations, and in protected area at temperature between 35°F and 110°F.

3. Store products so as to preserve their quality and fitness for Work.

4. Locate stored products and equipment to be incorporated in Work to facilitate prompt inspection.

5. Store products with seals and labels intact and legible.

6. Protect products against moisture, weather, temperature extremes, dust, debris, tampering, theft, vandalism, ultraviolet radiation, or damage from improper handling, storage, or exposure.

7. Protect exposed metals from rust and corrosion, even for items which may be sandblasted or otherwise cleaned before painting.

8. Ventilate materials subject to corrosion or moisture damage to prevent condensation.

9. Corrosion in evidence prior to final acceptance shall be removed, or product shall be removed or replaced.

10. Store items not designed for outdoor exposure off-ground and under cover.

11. Inspect products periodically to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under required conditions. Maintain log of inspections and make available upon request.

12. Store aggregate in well-drained area to minimize change in moisture content. Prevent contamination by other materials.

13. Store cementitious materials in weather-tight spaces. Keep free from moisture.

14. Store fasteners and connectors in original unopened containers until used.

15. Cover stored materials with tarpaulin or other covering to prevent soiling or exposure to weather. Fasten coverings to prevent removal by wind

16. Cover plastic and similar brittle items to protect from sun exposure and temperature extremes.

17. Store flammable products to conform to City, County, State, and Federal safety codes for storage of flammable materials.

18. Cover, plug, or cap pipe ends, valve ends, and equipment openings with rubber, plastic, or canvas to prevent intrusion or contamination at all times when installation is not in progress. These provisions shall apply during noon hour as well as overnight.

19. String pipe along right of way in manner that will not interfere with free passage of vehicles.

Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -19

20. Do not store pipe on roadway or parkway of residential streets for more than 10 days, or on business streets for more than 3 days.

21. Do not use pipeline as drain for removing water that has infiltrated into trench. Maintain inside of pipe free from foreign materials and in a clean and sanitary condition until final acceptance.

22. Store items in accordance with requirements of project Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP), if applicable. If no SWPPP has been prepared for project, store items in accordance with appropriate best management practices (BMP’s) listed in California Stormwater Quality Association (CASQA) Stormwater Best Management Practice Handbook for Construction latest edition. Comply with all City, County, State and Federal pollution prevention laws and permits.

23. Between delivery and installation, store all equipment to be incorporated into Work in manner to prevent damage or deterioration. Provide environmental controls, such as heaters or protective encapsulation, to guard against condensation and moisture damage.

24. Motor space heaters shall be operational at all times when motors are stored on site.

25. If prolonged (more than 90 days) storage is required for any item of rotating equipment, institute preventive maintenance program to include grease protection of bare metal surfaces, periodic indexing of rotating parts, renewal of grease in bearings and any procedures recommended by Manufacturer. Maintain records to demonstrate full compliance with these requirements.

26. To insure adequate protection of all electrical and instrumentation equipment and panels and electric motors, store all such equipment in suitable enclosure designed to protect equipment from dust and moisture. Maintain storage facilities and stored equipment, providing all utilities required.

27. Notify Owner in writing if delivered or stored product is damaged. Exterior surfaces of delivered items shall be in perfect unblemished condition. Do not repair damaged products without prior written approval.

F. Handle products as follows:

1. Handle products with care, using proper equipment according to Manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products, materials, and equipment by methods to prevent soiling and damage.

3. Provide protection during handling to prevent marring and otherwise damaging products, packaging, and surrounding surfaces.

4. Lift large heavy items only at points designated by Manufacturer. Do not drop, drag, bump, bend or handle products in manner that causes abrasions, bruises, cracks, mars, scars, scratches, or other damage. Use padded slings and hooks for lifting as needed to prevent damage. Improper handling shall be cause to reject mishandled products.

5. Use rubber or canvas belt slings or pneumatic-tired cradles to lift or lower coated pipe, valves and other products. Sling width shall equal or exceed pipe or product diameter. Do not handle coated products using ropes, hooks, chains, calipers or cables. Store such materials on padded skids.

6. Inspect each product item for damage, defects, completeness and correct operation before installing.

7. Notify Owner in writing if delivered or stored product is damaged. Do not repair damaged products without prior written acceptance.

Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -20

8. Before installation, swab joints and interiors of piping materials to remove foreign matter and contaminants.

9. Clean and protect machined surfaces and shafting from corrosion using proper type and amount of coating as described in Manufacturer’s warranty requirements to assure protection to one year after final acceptance.

10. Maintain records for Owner's review of deliveries to show Contractor's order number, purchase order number, and equipment number. Include labeling or shipping tag in records.

G. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of products.

1.21 Project/Site Conditions
A. Ascertain suitability of native soil for backfill before submitting bid. If native soil is found to be unsuitable, provide suitable material for meeting compaction requirements at no additional cost to Owner.

B. Items furnished shall be capable of fulfilling their intended purpose in environment in which they are installed. Allow for local temperature extremes, climactic conditions and corrosive environments where necessary to ensure proper functioning of furnished products.

C. The action of beginning installation, application or erection of a product shall be deemed sufficient evidence both Contractor and installer accept existing field conditions as acceptable for installation, application or erection of that product, except where written notice is given of Contractor or installer’s concerns before starting applicable work.

1.22 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of the lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant thereto.

B. Payment for construction surveying and staking will be included in the price bid for items of Work for which alignment or limits must be staked.

C. Payment for verification of field dimensions and utility locations will be included in the price bid for items of Work which may require relocation or refitting if field dimensions differ from those shown on Plans.

D. Payment for startup, including materials, equipment, devices, labor, travel costs, expenses, and maintenance items, required in Contract Documents will be included in the price bid for items of work for which systems demonstration and startup is specified.

E. Payment for services of Manufacturer's representatives will be included in price bid for their products or items to which their products are appurtenant. No additional payment will be made for services or expenses needed for testing, startup or demonstration if duration of services needed to provide complete working system exceeds those expected or exceeds durations stated in writing in correspondence from Manufacturer to Owner, Contractor or other party.

1.23 Warranties
A. Furnish warranty submittals as required above.

B. Warranties shall cover improper assembly or erection, defective workmanship and products, and incorrect or inadequate operation.

C. Furnish one-year warranty for Work and manufactured items unless otherwise stated.

Warranty shall cover parts, labor, and prompt service for repair of defects, performance failure or damage due to normal wear and tear or due to any cause other than acts of God, or intentional or active and extreme abuse of product. Warranty period shall extend one year beyond final acceptance of completed contract by Owner.

Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -21

D. In addition to Manufacturer's standard warranty, furnish services of factory-authorized and factory-trained service technician to promptly provide repair service for mechanical equipment for specified warranty period. This service shall be provided at no cost to Owner and shall include cost of all replacement parts and labor required during that period.

E. Correct within 10 days following receipt of notice from Owner of unsatisfactory material or workmanship which may be discovered within one year after final acceptance. Correct unsatisfactory material or workmanship without extra charge, notwithstanding that faulty Work may have been overlooked in prior inspections and accepted by Owner.

F. Should Manufacturer or supplier of any product have reason to suspect said Manufacturer’s product has not been installed in accordance with Manufacturer’s warranty requirements, Manufacturer shall have right to send their factory authorized representative to inspect facility.

G. Should Manufacturer’s factory-authorized representative elect to inspect installation, said Manufacturer shall promptly notify Owner in writing of any observed deficiencies in installation procedures which might affect required warranty.

H. Should Manufacturer elect to forego inspection of installation of their products, said Manufacturer shall be precluded from claiming faulty installation by others as relief from honoring furnished warranties.

I. Refer to Section 3.4, below, for requirements for 11-Month Anniversary Warranty Inspection.

J. 3-year minimum warranty shall be furnished for:

1. Manhole linings

2. Pumps and motors

3. Motorized aeration and mixing equipment

4. Other motorized equipment using motors 2-hp or larger

5. Reservoirs

6. Skid-mount chemical feed systems

7. Tanks

8. Seismic valve controllers

9. Air-conditioning and refrigeration systems
K. 3-year warranty shall be 3-year parts-and-labor non-prorated extended warranty extending from date of Owner’s final acceptance. Warranty need not exceed 5 years from date of shipping.

L. Where System Integrators or unit manufacturers are required to furnish skid-mount or packaged chemical feed, air conditioning or refrigeration systems requiring 3-year or extended warranties, every component of system furnished shall be covered under extended warranty, not withstanding clauses in other sections which may stipulate a lesser warranty for certain components.

M. 10-year minimum warranty shall be furnished for:

1. Reservoir coatings and liners

2. Roofing
N. 10-year warranty shall be 10-year parts-and-labor non-prorated extended warranty extending from date of Owner’s final acceptance. Warranty need not exceed 12 years from date of shipping.

O. Extended warranties shall cover parts, labor and prompt service for repair of defects, performance failure or damage due to normal wear and tear, or due to any cause other than acts of God, Owner’s failure to perform minimum maintenance as set forth in O&M instructions furnished with warranty, or intentional or active and extreme abuse of product. Warranty period shall extend the stipulated number of years beyond final acceptance of completed contract by Owner.

Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -22

P. Extended warranties shall cover Owner’s full cost of restoring non-functional components to their full function as described in Contract Documents and in Manufacturer’s published literature. Prorated warranties will not be accepted. Replacement of damaged parts with old or recycled parts will not be accepted.

Q. Should Manufacturer refuse to provide full extended warranty, Contractor may be required to purchase extended warranty or negotiate with Owner a fair value for a shorter warranty period.

R. Repair or replace Work that may prove to be defective in workmanship and/or materials within warranty period, along with Work which may be damaged or displaced during performance of warranty Work, at no additional expense to Owner.

S. Where sections of specifications stipulate longer warranty period than stipulated in this section, the longest and most stringent warranty requirement shall apply.

T. Warranty period shall begin on the earliest of 2 milestones:

1. Date of formal notification of completion or

2. 30 calendar days after both substantial completion and Owner taking over beneficial use of project.

U. Warranties shall cover:

1. Parts

2. Labor

3. Diagnostics

4. Servicing

5. Removal or Installation Charges

6. Setup and Reconfiguration of System with Replacement Parts

7. Shipping
V. Where a part is replaced during warranty period, warranty for replaced part and shipping shall be extended to not less than one year following replacement date. Warranty for labor shall be unchanged.

W. Following notification of Contractor of an extended warranty issue, Contractor or their agent shall have 10 days to inspect and 30 days to remedy defective work. Failure to perform within this stipulated period will result in damages being assessed against Contractor and responsible parties retroactive to date of discovery.

1.24 Owner-Furnished Equipment and Materials Warranties A. Product warranties on Owner-furnished equipment and materials will be provided by equipment and materials manufacturers directly to Owner.

B. Contractor shall install equipment and materials in accordance with the requirements of this section as necessary to maintain product warranties.

C. Contractor shall correct and repair any defects caused by faulty installation during the life of the product warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Products of listed acceptable Manufacturers shall meet specifications notwithstanding the fact that Manufacturer is "listed". Owner reserves right to reject submittals and products from "acceptable Manufacturers" if they fail to demonstrate compliance with specifications.

B. Similar items on project shall be products of one Manufacturer. Where one Manufacturer offers multiple brands, similar items shall be products of same brand heritage.

Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -23

C. Coordinating items which function as interconnected parts of a single system shall be products of one Manufacturer. Where one Manufacturer offers multiple brands similar items shall be products of same brand heritage.

D. Equipment furnished shall operate through its full operating range powered by amperages specified or shown on Plans. Equipment requiring larger amperage than specified or shown is unacceptable absent written statement from Owner electrical infrastructure and switchgear can support increased amperage.

2.2 General Product Requirements
A. Products shall be new and of current design and manufacture, free from defects and imperfection that might impede serviceability of product for its intended purpose.

B. Products and workmanship shall match Contractor's submittals as accepted by Owner's Representative.

C. Products or Work for which no technical specifications are set forth shall be of best grade in quality and workmanship obtainable in market from firms of established good reputation, or, if not ordinarily stocked, shall conform to usual standards for first class products of kind required, considering intended use. Work shall be in full conformity and harmony with intent to secure best standard of products and construction.

D. Materials and materials sources shall be accepted by Owner at least 3 days before use of materials in Work.

E. Connections and mountings required to install products shall comply with connections and mountings shown in Contract Documents and submittals on a location-specific basis. Do not assume approval of connections or mountings at a specific location constitutes approval of same at all locations.

F. Conform to federal, state and local regulations governing VOC content, percentage solids by volume, and other paint and solvent properties.

G. Corresponding parts of identical products shall be interchangeable.

H. Materials for complete paint or sealant system, including primer, finish coats, thinners, cleaners and drying agents, and other additives shall be end products of one Manufacturer to ensure product compatibility and unit responsibility.

I. Pack gaps between seismic anchorage lugs and floors or foundations with grout to inhibit corrosion of bolts in space between lug and floor or foundation. In areas subject to chemical exposure use appropriate chemical-resistant grout.

J. Design and fabrication of products shall ensure products withstand stresses and loads which may occur during testing, installation, start-up, and normal operation.

K. Products shall be capable of fulfilling their intended purpose in environment in which they are installed. Allow for local temperature extremes, climactic conditions and corrosive environments where necessary to ensure proper functioning of furnished products.

L. For purposes of chemical compatibility, use the following materials for tanks, valves, pipe fittings, pipe, elastomers, and bolts unless otherwise recommended by Manufacturer and accepted by Owner:

ENVIRONMENTAL

OR CHEMICAL

EXPOSURE

STRENGTH ACCEPTABLE

BOLTING
METALS

ACCEPTABLE

PIPE AND

VALVE BODY
METALS

ACCEPTABLE

PIPE AND
VALVE

PLASTICS

ACCEPTABLE
TANK

MATERIALS

ACCEPTABLE

ELASTOMERS

INORGANIC CHEMICALS
Aluminum Sulfate
(Al2SO4)3)
316SS SS PVC, CPVC,
HDPE
FRP, X-linked
HDPE SG=1.65
EPDM,
PTFE Teflon®
Ammonium
Hydroxide NH4OH
316SS SS PVC, CPVC,
HDPE
FRP, X-linked
HDPE SG=1.35
EPDM,
PTFE Teflon®
Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -24

Ammonium Sulfate
(NH4)2SO4
316SS SS PVC, CPVC,
HDPE
FRP, X-linked
HDPE SG=1.35
EPDM,
PTFE Teflon®
Bioxide 316SS SS PVC, CPVC,
HDPE
FRP, X-linked
HDPE SG=1.65
EPDM,
PTFE Teflon®
Calcium Carbonate
(CaCO3)
316SS PVC, CPVC,
HDPE
FRP, X-linked
HDPE SG=1.65
EPDM,
PTFE Teflon®
Calcium Chloride
(ClO3)2)
Titanium PVC, CPVC,
HDPE
FRP / Crosslinked HDPE SG
≥1.65
EPDM,
PTFE Teflon®
Chlorine Dioxide
(ClO2)
Cast Iron,
Ductile Iron,
Steel
FPM Viton®,
PTFE Teflon®
Chlorine Gas (CL2) Hastelloy C Use plastic PVC, CPVC n/a PTFE Teflon® Chlorine Water 0.8% Hastelloy C Use plastic PVC, CPVC,
HDPE
FRP / Crosslinked HDPE
SG≥1.35
FPM Viton®,
PTFE Teflon®
Ferric Chloride
(FeCl3)
Titanium Use plastic PVC, CPVC,
HDPE
EPDM,
PTFE Teflon®
Ferric Sulfate
((Fe2(SO4)3)
316SS,
Hastelloy C,
Titanium
Use plastic PVC, CPVC,
HDPE
FRP / Crosslinked HDPE SG
≥1.65
EPDM,
PTFE Teflon®
Ferrous Chloride
(FeCl2)
<96% Titanium Use plastic PVC, CPVC FRP / Crosslinked HDPE SG≥1.9
EPDM,
PTFE Teflon®
Ferrous Sulfate
(FeSO4)
Hastelloy C,
Titanium
Use plastic PVC, CPVC,
HDPE
FRP / Crosslinked HDPE SG
≥1.65
EPDM,
PTFE Teflon®
Hydrochloric Acid
(HCl)
<37% Hastelloy C Use plastic PVC, CPVC FRP / Crosslinked HDPE SG≥1.9
PVDF Kynar®,
PTFE Teflon®
Hydrofluoric Acid
(HF)
Hastelloy C Use plastic Polypropylene FRP / Crosslinked HDPE SG≥1.9
FPM Viton®,
PTFE Teflon®
Hydrofluosilicic Acid
(H2SiF8)
23-27% Hastelloy C Use plastic PVC, CPVC FRP / Crosslinked HDPE SG≥1.9
EPDM,
PTFE Teflon®
Hydrogen Gas (H2) 316SS Carbon Steel,
304SS, 316SS
PVC, CPVC n/a EPDM,
PTFE Teflon®
Hydrogen Peroxide
(H2O2)
<50% Hastelloy C,
Titanium
Use plastic PVC FRP / Crosslinked HDPE
SG≥1.9
FPM Viton®,
PTFE Teflon®
Hydrogen Sulfide
(H2S)
316SS 316SS PVC, CPVC PVDF Kynar®,
PTFE Teflon®
Magnesium Chloride
(MgCl2)
30% Titanium Use plastic PVC, CPVC,
HDPE
FRP / Crosslinked HDPE SG
≥1.65
EPDM,
PTFE Teflon®
Ozone (O3) 316SS Use plastic PVDF Kynar® n/a EPDM,
PTFE Teflon®
Phosphoric Acid
(H3PO4)
<50% 316SS Use plastic PVC, CPVC FRP / Crosslinked HDPE SG≥1.9
FPM Viton®,
≥50% Hastelloy C PTFE Teflon®
Potassium Hydroxide
(KOH)
<50% Hastelloy C Use plastic PVC, CPVC Cross-linked
HDPE SG≥1.9
EPDM,
PTFE Teflon®
Sodium Bisulfite
(NaHSO3)
38% 316SS Use plastic PVC, CPVC,
HDPE
FRP / Crosslinked HDPE SG
≥1.65
EPDM,
PTFE Teflon®
Sodium Carbonate
(Na2CO3)
Titanium Use plastic PVC, CPVC,
HDPE
FRP / Crosslinked HDPE
SG≥1.35
EPDM,
PTFE Teflon®
Sodium Chloride
(NaCl)
Hastelloy C,
Titanium
Use plastic PVC, CPVC,
HDPE
FRP / Crosslinked HDPE SG
≥1.65
FPM Viton®,
PTFE Teflon®
Sodium Chlorite
NaClO2)
316SS Use plastic PVC, CPVC FRP / Crosslinked HDPE
SG≥1.9
FPM Viton®,
GE Goretex®
Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -25

Sodium Fluoride
(NaF)
Hastelloy C Use plastic PVDF Kynar®
or PTFE
Teflon®
FRP / Crosslinked HDPE
SG≥1.9
FPM Viton®,
GE Goretex®
Sodium Hydroxide
(NaOH)
<50% 316SS Use plastic PVC, CPVC,
HDPE
FRP / Crosslinked HDPE SG
≥1.65
EPDM,
PTFE Teflon®
Sodium Hypochlorite
(NaClO)

0.8% 316SS Use plastic PVC, CPVC FRP / Crosslinked HDPE SG≥1.35
FPM Viton®,
PTFE Teflon®

12.5% Titanium FRP / Crosslinked HDPE
SG≥1.9
Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4) <80% Hastelloy C Use plastic PVC, CPVC FRP / Crosslinked HDPE SG≥1.9
EPDM,
FPM Viton®,
PTFE Teflon®
80-92% FRP / Crosslinked HDPE
SG≥2.2 with
antioxidant inner
liner
>93% FRP / Crosslinked HDPE
SG=2.20 with
antioxidant inner
liner

ORGANIC CHEMICALS
Acetic Acid
(CH3COOH)
316SS SS Polypropylene FRP / X-linked
HDPE SG=1.90
PTFE Teflon®
Acetylene (HCCH) 316SS SS PVDF Kynar®,
PTFE Teflon®
EPDM,
PTFE Teflon®
Alcohols (ROH) 316SS SS PVDF Kynar®,
PTFE Teflon®
PTFE Teflon®
Aldehydes (RCHO) 316SS SS Polypropylene EPDM,
PTFE Teflon®
Citric Acid (C6H8O7) 316SS SS PVDF Kynar®,
PTFE Teflon®,
Polypropylene
FRP / Crosslinked HDPE SG
≥1.65
EPDM,
PTFE Teflon®
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
(CH4N2O)
316SS SS PVDF Kynar®,
PTFE Teflon®,
Polypropylene
FRP / Crosslinked HDPE SG
≥1.65
FPM Viton®,
PTFE Teflon®
Esters (RCOOR)
Ethers (ROR) 316SS SS PVDF Kynar®,
PTFE Teflon®
PTFE Teflon®
Ethylene Glycol
(CH2OHCH2OH)
316SS SS PVC, CPVC,
Polypropylene
FRP / Crosslinked HDPE
SG≥1.35
EPDM,
PTFE Teflon®
Ketones (RC(=O)R 316SS SS ABS, PTFE
Teflon®
EPDM,
PTFE Teflon®
Gasoline/Kerosene/D
iesel
316SS SS PVDF Kynar®,
PTFE Teflon®
FPM Viton®,
PTFE Teflon®
Lubricating Oil 316SS SS PVDF Kynar®,
PTFE Teflon®
FPM Viton®,
PTFE Teflon®
Aliphatic
Hydrocarbons
316SS SS PVDF Kynar®,
PTFE Teflon®
FPM Viton®,
PTFE Teflon®
Aromatic
Hydrocarbons
Carbon Steel DIP PVDF Kynar®,
PTFE Teflon®
PTFE Teflon®
Chlorinated
Hydrocarbons
316SS SS PVDF Kynar®,
PTFE Teflon®
PTFE Teflon®
Nitro Hydrocarbons 316SS SS PVDF Kynar® PTFE Teflon®
Polymers 316SS SS PVC, CPVC FRP / Crosslinked HDPE SG
≥1.65
EPDM,
PTFE Teflon®

ENVIRONMENTS
Potable Water n/a 316SS Bronze, CIP,

DIP, CML&C
Steel, SS

PVC, CPVC,
HDPE
FRP / Crosslinked HDPE
SG≥1.35

BUNA N,
EPDM,
PTFE Teflon®
Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -26

Chloraminated
Potable Water
n/a 316SS Bronze, CIP,

DIP, CML&C
Steel, SS

PVC, CPVC,
HDPE
FRP / Crosslinked HDPE
SG≥1.35
FPM Viton®,
PTFE Teflon®
Raw Water n/a 316SS Bronze, CIP,

DIP, CML&C
Steel, SS

PVC, CPVC,
HDPE
FRP / Crosslinked HDPE
SG≥1.35

BUNA N,
EPDM,
PTFE Teflon®
Recycled Water n/a 316SS Bronze, CIP,

DIP, CML&C
Steel, SS

PVC, CPVC,
HDPE
FRP / Crosslinked HDPE
SG≥1.35
EPDM,
PTFE Teflon®
Deionized Water n/a 316SS Epoxy-Coated
Iron, SS

PVC, CPVC,
HDPE
FRP / X-linked
HDPE SG=1.65
EPDM,
PTFE Teflon®
Wastewater n/a 316SS Epoxy-Coated
Iron, SS

PVC, CPVC,
HDPE
FRP / X-linked
HDPE SG=1.65
EPDM,
PTFE Teflon®
Return Activated
Sludge
316SS Epoxy-Coated
Iron, SS

PVC, CPVC,
HDPE
FRP / X-linked
HDPE SG=1.65
CR Neoprene®,
PTFE Teflon®
Waste Activated
Sludge
316SS Epoxy-Coated
Iron, SS

PVC, CPVC,
HDPE
FRP / X-linked
HDPE SG=1.65
CR Neoprene®,
PTFE Teflon®
Sea Water Hastelloy C,
Titanium
Use plastic PVC, CPVC FRP / Crosslinked HDPE
SG ≥1.65
FPM Viton®
Hot Water 316SS Bronze, CIP,

DIP, CML&C
Steel, SS

PVC, CPVC,
HDPE
FRP / Crosslinked HDPE
SG ≥1.65
FPM Viton®,
PTFE Teflon®
Steam <300 º F n/a 316SS Steel, SS Use metal n/a FPM Viton®, PTFE Teflon®
Steam >300 º F n/a 316SS Steel, SS Use metal n/a FPM Viton®, PTFE Teflon®
Natural Gas n/a 316SS Bronze, Steel,
SS
Use plastic for
buried piping
HDPE n/a EPDM,
PTFE Teflon®
Direct Sunlight n/a 316SS Bronze, CIP,

DIP, CML&C
Steel, SS
Painted CPVC,
Painted PVC,
HDPE
FRP / Crosslinked HDPE EPDM
M. Electrical equipment shall be built to NEMA and UL standards for NEC §505 Classifications specified.

2.3 Materials
A. Dissimilar metals, when used in conjunction with each other shall have suitable insulation provided between adjoining surfaces to eliminate direct contact and resultant current.

B. Electrolytic insulation shall be bituminous impregnated felt, heavy bituminous coatings, nonmetallic separators, bushings, washers, or other accepted materials.

C. Refer to Section 33 05 31 for pipeline joint materials.

D. Unless otherwise specified, furnish and install Type 316 stainless steel nuts, bolts, and washers on bolted connections.

E. Liberally apply anti-seize thread lubricant to threaded portion of stainless steel bolts during assembly.

F. All-thread or close nipples are prohibited.

G. Mating ends of pipe shall match.

H. Mating ends of valves, meters and couplings shall match ends of adjacent pipe.

I. Mating ends of pipes, well casing, and well screens and couplings shall match.

J. Minimum working pressure of valves, couplings and fittings shall equal or exceed class of pipe to which they are attached or 150 psi, whichever is higher.

Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -27

K. Castings shall be sound, clean, free from porosity, cold shots, blisters, holes and defects of any nature that would render them unacceptable. No plugging, filling, brazing or welding of defects will be allowed

2.4 Equipment
A. Stainless steel inscribed nameplates shall be securely fastened in conspicuous locations for mechanical equipment having moving parts. Show Manufacturer's name, year of manufacture, serial number, principal rating data and equipment item number. Nameplates shall be in English and use American measuring units.

B. Valves shall be marked to show name of Manufacturer, year of manufacture, size of valve, maximum working pressure, and arrow to show direction of flow.

C. Valves shall close drip tight at rated pressures.

D. Valves shall be satisfactory for applications involving valve operation after long periods of inactivity.

E. Motors shall meet, as minimum requirements, the published standards, rules and regulations of NEMA, ANSI and IEEE as to application, manufacture and tests. Motor windings shall be insulated and braced for full voltage operation.

F. Motors shall develop sufficient torque for required service throughout acceleration range at voltage 10 percent less than motor nameplate rating. Motors shall develop sufficient torque when started using reduced voltage starters.

G. Provide grounding lugs inside conduit boxes for motor frame grounding.

H. Grease fittings shall be standard button-head type. Grease fittings shall be serviceable by a single type of grease gun. Extend fittings as necessary to provide easy access, or as directed by Owner's Representative.

I. Furnish special tools, wrenches and appliances needed to adjust, operate, maintain or repair mechanical equipment supplied.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Inspection
A. Products and Work shall be subject to field and factory inspection and testing in accordance with standards required and defined in Contract Documents. Waiver by Owner of their right to inspect shall not relieve Contractor of duties to comply with Contract Documents.

B. Contractor shall provide and pay for independent inspection, deputy inspection and testing services required by Contract Documents.

C. Owner will provide certain inspection and testing duties not required of Contractor under Contract Documents. Performance of these tests and costs will be borne by Owner; except, that Contractor shall pay cost of failing tests.

D. Inspection will be provided by Owner's Representative. Inspection shall not be considered as direct control of individual workman and his work. Inspections, tests, or approvals by Owner's Representative or others shall not relieve Contractor from their duty to perform Work in accordance with Contract Documents.

E. Inspection and testing fees imposed by public agencies other than Owner shall be paid for by Contractor. If Contract Documents, permits, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction require Work to be inspected, tested, or approved by someone other than Contractor, give Owner's Representative timely notice of readiness.

Submit required certificates of inspection, testing or approval to Owner's Representative.

Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -28

F. Maintain access to Work for Owner and Owner's Representatives. Permit authorized representatives and agents of Federal or State agencies to inspect work, products, and other relevant data and records. Provide safe and proper facilities to access and observe Work and to inspect or perform tests.

G. Owner’s Representative will inspect products after delivery and throughout construction process. Products will be subject to rejection at any time on account of failure to meet Contract Documents even though samples may have been accepted as satisfactory at place of manufacture.

H. Before backfilling or covering Work, request inspection by Owner’s Representative to verify proper installation of buried or covered Work.

I. Before finishing, request inspection by Owner’s Representative to verify no surfaces to receive product have defects or errors which could result in poor or potentially defective application or cause latent defects in workmanship.

J. If Work is covered contrary to written instructions or work is covered before Contractor requests and receives inspection, uncover it at Contractor's expense, if requested by Owner's Representative. Replace at Contractor's expense.

K. If Owner's Representative considers it advisable covered Work be reinspected or tested by others, at Owner's Representative's written request, uncover Work in question, furnishing necessary labor, products, and tools. If Work is found defective, Contractor shall pay for uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory reconstruction.

If, Work is not found defective, Contractor will be allowed an increase in Contract Price or an extension of Contract Time, or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing and reconstruction, and a Change Order will be issued.

3.2 Preparation
A. Contractor represents they have carefully examined Contract Documents and site where Work is to be performed and they have familiarized themselves with local conditions and federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations that may affect performance of Work.

B. Refer to Section 01 32 33 for preconstruction and construction photographic and video documentation requirements.

C. Carefully lay out work in advance to minimize cutting, channeling, chasing or drilling of structural pads or elements. Review in advance with Owner’s Representative cuts, channeling, drilling, or welding required to accommodate mechanical or electrical equipment.

Do not begin such work until notified by Owner’s Representative. Repair damage to structures, piping equipment or finishes using skilled workers of appropriate trades.

D. Relocations or adjustment of existing facilities needed to facilitate construction must be accepted in writing by Owner’s Representative and subsequently relocated or adjusted by Contractor as directed. If existing items are lost or damaged during construction, replace with new items of equal or better quality.

E. Trimming of existing tree branches and roots required to accommodate construction activities shall be done under direction of certified arborist.

F. Make field measurements needed to fabricate and install Work before ordering or beginning work. Make minor changes in alignments and dimensions as needed to remedy or avoid utilities and structural conflicts.

G. Material safety data sheets (MSDS) shall be available and maintained at Project site.

3.3 Installation / Application / Erection
A. Maintain complete set of Contract Documents including shop drawings at jobsite field office or superintendent's truck at all times.

Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -29

B. Additional costs incurred by Contractor resulting from Owner’s Representative's direction in resolving installation instruction conflicts will be reimbursed as Extra Work. Costs incurred by Contractor, through failure to timely notify Owner’s Representative of a conflict, shall be borne by Contractor.

C. Unless otherwise shown, install equipment on concrete bases at least 6” high. Anchor baseplates to concrete base with required anchor bolts. For equipment with grouted bases, fill space beneath with grout as specified. Grout equipment base after initial fitting and alignment.

D. Before welding, abutting joints shall be free of strain.

E. Prime and paint exposed surfaces of ferrous products, piping, and conduit except for stainless steel or galvanized or sherardized surfaces or unless otherwise shown. Clean painted surfaces and touch up bare or marred spots with finish to match factory finish.

F. Paint and coat in workmanlike manner to produce an even film of uniform thickness. Pay attention to edges, angles, flanges, corners, crevices, and joints to insure they have been thoroughly cleaned and they receive specified thickness of paint or coating. Finished surfaces shall be free from runs, drops, ridges, waves, shiners, laps, brush marks, and variations in color, texture and finish. Hiding shall be so complete that addition of another coat would not increase hiding. Apply coats so as to produce film of uniform thickness.

G. Do not force-fit or spring pipe, conduit or equipment into place. Corrective measures for cases of poor alignment shall be accepted in advance by Owner's Representative.

H. Deflections at joints shall fall within Manufacturers' published tolerance limits.

I. Mitered piping joints are not permitted.

J. Pipe bends shall conform to ASME B31.3 and be free from wrinkles, creases or corrugations.

K. Water pipe bends shall use accepted AWWA fittings, except API standard fittings may be used for above-ground steel pipe.

L. Cut pipe threads with sharp dies and make up joints with accepted thread sealing compound.

Threads to be seal-welded shall be made up dry. Do not use Teflon sealers.

M. Epoxy coated pipe, valves and fittings shall be fabricated and installed without cutting, notching or welding.

N. Install valves and equipment so as to be easy to operate and service. Where geometry of manufactured valves and equipment and field conditions make it difficult or impossible for average worker to operate or service an installed item, notify Owner’s Representative of conflict before installing item.

O. Unless otherwise shown, encase buried valves and ductile iron pipe in two layers of 8-mil polyethylene wrap in accordance with ANSI A21.5/AWWA C105.

P. Furnish mounts, guides, bearing plates, flanges, anchor and attachment bolts and screws, saddles, supports, pads and skids necessary to securely mount products and equipment.

Q. Tighten bolts to Manufacturer’s specifications using torque wrenches. Unless otherwise directed, use lubricant such as Copperkote or blue Teflon when making up bolts.

R. Require Manufacturers to furnish factory-authorized technical representative to visit site as needed to provide technical support in resolving field problems associated with Manufacturer’s product.

3.4 Field Quality Control
A. Materials and equipment shall be installed by specialists properly skilled in trades and professions required to assure first-class workmanship. Where required by Contract Documents, Contractor shall cause installation of specific equipment items to be Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -30

accomplished under supervision of factory-trained installation specialists furnished by Manufacturers.

B. Be prepared to document skills and training of workmen engaged in installation of equipment furnished either by Contractor or Owner.

C. Coordinate with Manufacturer when Manufacturer's field services are required. Provide Owner at least 30 days’ written notice prior to need for Manufacturer's field services furnished by Contractor.

D. Materials and equipment shall be installed by specialists properly skilled in trades and professions required to assure first-class workmanship. Where required by Contract Documents, Contractor shall cause installation of specific equipment items to be accomplished under supervision of factory-trained installation specialists furnished by Manufacturers.

E. Install products according to Manufacturer's Installation and Warranty requirements.

F. Install products to tolerances recommended by Manufacturer.

G. Install products according to and at location shown in Plans, Shop Drawings, and submittals.

H. Unless otherwise shown, install equipment true, plumb, and level using precision gauges and levels. Do not shim between machined surfaces.

I. Refer variances between Manufacturer's installation instructions and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

J. Upon completion of Contract, Work shall be finished, tested and ready for operation. Work shall fulfill its intended purpose as described in Contract Documents, in submittals, and in Manufacturer's literature.

K. Frequency of sampling and testing shall be as shown, and shall be performed at such other times as necessary to document contract compliance.

L. Notify Owner’s Representative and regulating authorities 3 days before field tests.

M. Perform field tests in presence of Owner’s Representative who will record results.

N. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY

FIRST TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
All Work Installation &
Leakage
Visual inspection of finished
installation
1 inspection Owner Owner
Concrete
Flatwork
Grade
Conformance
Do not deviate from plan
elevation by > ¾”
All Work Owner Contractor
Steel Work Welds Continuous, watertight, and
conforming to Structural
Welding Code of American
Welding Society. Welds shall
be free of sharp points or
edges
All Work Owner Contractor
Walls and
Ceilings
Plumb and
Level
Acceptable deviations from
plumb or level shall not exceed
¼” in any 32” section
All Work Owner Contractor
Exposed
Surfaces
Finishing Finished in appearance. Round
or chamfer corners of exposed
structural shapes for personal
protection.

All Work Owner Contractor
Roofing
Systems
Leakage Leak-Free demonstrated by 1-
hour hose test
All Roofing Contractor Contractor
Electrical
Motors
Motor Current Record current in each phase
of each motor and include in
Each phase of
each motor
Contractor Contractor
Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -31

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY

FIRST TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
O&M manual. Repair or
replace motor or motor-driven
equipment if current exceeds
motor nameplate FLC value.

Pressure
Pipelines and
Appurtenances
Hydrostatic
Test
Refer to Section 33 08 11,
AWWA C600 and AWWA M41
All new ductile
iron pressure
pipe
Contractor Contractor
Leakage No visible leaks
Joints watertight and airtight
All new piping Owner Contractor
Potable Water
Pipe
Disinfection Refer to Section 33 13 00 and
AWWA C651.

All new ductile
iron potable
water pipe
Contractor Contractor
Gravity
Pipelines and
Electrical
Conduits
Horizontal
Alignment
1” maximum horizontal
deviation from plan alignment
Mirror each
straight section
of pipe
Contractor Contractor
Vertical
Alignment
¼” maximum horizontal
deviation from plan grades
Mirror each
straight section
of pipe
Contractor Contractor
Mandrel Test
for
Obstructions
and Pipe or
Conduit
Deflections
SSPWC §306-1.2.12
Owner’s Representative
reserves right to require
mandrel testing to demonstrate
compliance before subsequent
work such as paving, before
charging or commissioning of
piping, or before installation of
wire within conduit.
1 test per run
of pipe
Contractor Contractor
Video
Inspection
Video entire new alignment.

Submit copy of video to Owner
All new gravity
pipe
Contractor Contractor
Gravity
Pipelines
Pressure Test
for Leakage
and Infiltration
Refer to Section 33 08 31 1 test per run
of pipe
Contractor Contractor
All Work Field
Performance
Demonstrate Work conforms to
Contract Documents and
Manufacturer’s printed
literature
1 test Contractor Contractor
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Confirm Work conforms to
Contract Documents and
Manufacturer’s printed
literature
1 test Owner Contractor
O. Repair, correct or replace work failing tests or inspection. Repeat tests at Contractor’s expense, until results satisfy specifications. Repair damages resulting from tests.

P. Repair damage to Work that is not cause for rejection.

Q. Work done beyond lines and grades shown on Plans, or extra Work done without written authority of Owner’s Representative will be considered as unauthorized and no compensation will be made therefor. Remove nonconforming materials from site.

R. Remove rejected work from jobsite. Work rejected by Owner's Representative for failure to comply with Contract Documents, shall be removed within 10 calendar days after Written Notice of rejection, whether incorporated in Work or not, unless repairs have been made to Owner's satisfaction.

Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -32

S. Promptly replace and re-execute removed Work in accordance with Contract Documents and without expense to Owner. Contractor shall bear cost of making good Work of other Contractors destroyed or damaged by such removal or replacement.

T. Defective Work or unsuitable materials and/or equipment may be rejected, even though such defective items may have been previously overlooked by Owner’s Representative.

U. If Contractor fails to remedy, remove, replace, or correct Work under provisions of this section within 10 calendar days after receipt of Written Notice, Owner may remove such Work and store products at Contractor's expense. Owner shall have authority to cause defective work to be remedied, or removed and replaced, and unauthorized work to be removed by Owner forces, or otherwise. Further, Owner shall have authority to deduct costs thereof from monies due or to become due to Contractor, or to bring suit against Contractor and Contractor’s sureties for money damages sustained by Owner or for specific performance of contractual obligations of Contractor.

V. Repair, correct or replace work failing tests or inspection. Repeat tests at Contractor’s expense, until results satisfy specifications. Repair damages resulting from tests.

W. Repair damage to work that is not cause for rejection.

X. Work done beyond lines and grades shown on Plans, or extra Work done without written authority of Owner’s Representative will be considered as unauthorized and no compensation will be made therefor. Remove nonconforming materials from site.

Y. Warranty inspection will be conducted during 11th month following completion of Work and prior to release of bonds.

1. Owner will establish date for warranty inspection and will notify Contractor at least 30 days in advance. If notification of inspection date does not occur within 12 months after final acceptance, first anniversary inspection shall be considered to be waived.

2. Locations found in warranty inspection where paving, coating, or paint has peeled, bubbled, or cracked, and locations where rusting is evident will be considered system failures. Repair defective work identified during warranty inspection by removing deteriorating paving, coating or paint system, cleaning surface, and repaving, recoating, or repainting with same system. Electrically test repaired painted areas.

3. Warranty Inspection Report will be prepared by Owner’s Representative and delivered to Contractor. It will set forth the number and type of failures observed and the names of persons making the inspection.

4. If area of failure exceeds 25% of total paved, coated or painted area on any structure or surface, remove and recoat entire paving, coating or paint system per original specification.

5. Repair other failed products found in warranty inspection per warranty requirements.

END OF SECTION
Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -33

SHOP DRAWING TRANSMITTAL FORM
FROM: DATE:

PROJECT NAME:

TO: PROJECT NO.:

OWNER:

ATTN:

Construction Manager

THIS IS AN ORIGINAL THIS IS A REVISION
SUBMITTAL NO.: SUBMITTAL OF SUBMITTAL NO.:

SUBJECT OF SUBMITTAL:

SPECIFICATION SECTION(S):

PLAN SHEET NUMBER(S):

CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION: Check & Complete either (A) or (B) below:
(A) We have reviewed in detail and certify the material, equipment or construction procedure(s) contained in this submittal meet all the requirements specified in or shown on the Contract Documents, with no exceptions.
(B) We have reviewed in detail and certify the material, equipment or construction procedure(s) contained in this submittal meet all requirements specified in or shown on the Contract Documents, except for the following deviations:

CONTRACTOR'S AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE:

Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -34

MANUFACTURER'S STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY
Project Name: _________________________________________________________________ Specification Section Number: ___________
Item: ________________________________________________________________________ Serial Numbers:________________________________________________________________ Owner: _______________________________________________________________________ Contractor: ____________________________________________________________________ Supplier: ______________________________________________________________________

1. We have reviewed applicable sections of the Contract Documents describing requirements for our product, including Sections entitled "Submittal Procedures," "Quality Requirements," "Product Requirements," "Starting and Adjusting," "Closeout Procedures," "Operating and Maintenance Data,” “Demonstration and Training," “Basic Civil Engineering Requirements,” and "Painting and Coating."

2. Before shipping, we promise to review Contractor's submittals from other Manufacturers who will supply products that interface with our product, and may affect our product's performance.

Also, we promise to request and review data concerning quality of water, soils or other materials which may contact or adversely impact performance of our product.

3. Should we have cause to believe our product is, for any reason, incompatible with an interfacing product or material, we will inform Owner of our concern before shipping our product. In such case, we will not ship our product until our concerns have been satisfactorily resolved.

4. We further understand that Owner reserves right to request a factory-authorized representative's written acceptance of installation, application and/or erection of our product as described in Section of Contract Documents entitled “Starting and Adjusting”, before paying Contractor for our product.
_________________________________
Authorized Factory Representative

Project Owner BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING EQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 05 00 -35

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Project Owner SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 41 13 - 1
SECTION 02 41 13

SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Site, mechanical and electrical demolition outside building envelopes.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 35 43: Environmental Procedures
D. Section 01 35 44: Environmental Procedures for Hazardous Materials E. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
F. Section 01 50 00: Temporary Facilities and Controls
G. Section 01 66 00: Product Storage and Handling Requirements H. Section 01 74 00: Cleaning and Waste Management
I. Section 02 05 00: Basic Civil Engineering Requirements J. Section 02 41 14: Paving Removal and Resurfacing
K. Section 02 41 15: Utility Line Removal and Abandonment L. Section 26 05 10: Common Work Results for Electrical M. Section 31 23 00: Excavation and Fill

1.3 System Description
A. The following facilities must remain in operation while demolition is in progress:

1. Calexico Waste Water Treatment Plant
B. Facility operators will be working at the site during demolition and will require access throughout the plant throughout construction.

C. Remove the following items.

1. Site items including:
a. Incidental concrete removal and AC pavement
b. Chain link fence
c. Buried interfering portions of 8” and 16” sewer in vicinity of new pump back system d. Buried interfering portions of 18” storm drain in vicinity of new pump back system e. Trees shown for demolition

2. Mechanical items including:
a. New River security gate

3. Items shown on Plans for demolition including asphalt, fencing, concrete and masonry work, piping, valves, and electrical work.

D. Abandon the following items in place:

1. 8” and 16” sewer in vicinity of new pump back system

2. 18” storm drain in vicinity of new pump back system
Project Owner SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 41 13 - 2

3. Other items shown on plans for abandonment in place
E. The following items to be removed shall be replaced with new work in locations shown:

1. Light posts

2. Curb, gutter and sidewalk

3. Chain link fence in vicinity of new pump back system

4. AC pavement
F. The following items will need to be temporarily relocated during construction and may be returned to their pre-construction location or relocated to new location upon project completion.

1. Storage shed in vicinity of new pump back system

2. Water sampling bridge at New River

3. USGS gaging station
G. Salvage the following items to Owner.

1. New River existing security screens.

1.4 Quality Assurance
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen trained and experienced in necessary trades and crafts and completely familiar with specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of this section.

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. California Building Code (CBC)

2. California Fire Code (CFC)

3. California Green Building Code (CGBC)

4. California Mechanical Code (CMC)

5. California Plumbing Code (CPC)

6. NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC)

1.6 Hazardous Materials Survey
A. A hazardous materials survey has not been completed for this project.

B. Under EPA Regulations and Imperial County APCD regulations, if >100 square feet of material containing over 1% asbestos, must be disturbed during construction, a California Occupational Safety Health Administration (CAL-OSHA)-certified site surveillance technician and or certified asbestos consultant (CAC) is required to:

1. Conduct visual and/or bulk surveys of property prior to demolition and to prepare a hazardous material survey outlining appropriate remediation measures.

2. Prepare hazardous material survey, reporting testing results and recommending appropriate remediation measures.

C. In addition, per Cal-OSHA and EPA requirements, if lead, or other hazardous material must be disturbed during construction, CDPH Certified Inspector must:

1. Conduct visual and/or bulk surveys of property prior to demolition and to prepare a hazardous material survey outlining appropriate remediation measures.

Project Owner SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 41 13 - 3

2. Prepare a hazardous material survey, reporting testing results and recommending appropriate remediation measures.

D. Contractor shall hire remediation firm separate from hazardous materials consulting firm to perform appropriate remediation measures. For asbestos concentrations exceeding 0.1%, or other hazardous material concentrations exceeding 1%, remediation work shall be done by personnel OSHA-certified and trained in use of OSHA-required PPE and respirators.

1.7 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Working Drawings Submit Working Drawing detailing removal operations and showing methods and sequence of removal and equipment to be used.

B. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for definition of requirements for Working Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Shut off or disconnect utilities affecting demolition work. Schedule shutdowns with Owner, and notify Owner 3 days in advance of any shutdown required to perform Work.

B. Owner will open/close valves on piping and electrical disconnects required for shutdowns.

3.2 Demolition
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic execution requirements.

B. Demolish items as shown on Plans.

C. Nonstructural items not shown on Plans for demolition but interfering with (or damaged by) installation of new items, may, at Contractor’s option, and pending acceptance by Owner’s Representative, be temporarily demolished and replaced following installation of new items subject to the following:

1. Items to be demolished may not be on a structural load path and may not include roofing, decking, trusses, beams, columns, bearing walls, shear diaphragms, connections, or foundations.

2. Non-structural and non-essential items including railings, ladders, supports, piping, conduit, wiring, boxes, lighting fixtures, and other interferences may be removed and shall be replaced with new and similar material pending written permission in advance from Owner.

D. The following demolition standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable EPA, OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

2. Other applicable building, fire, plumbing, mechanical and electrical code requirements E. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

F. Asbestos shall be remediated according to guidelines set up by EPA, OSHA, CalOSHA and other regulatory agencies. Procedures shall include but not be limited to:

1. Adhere to CCR Title 8, §1529, including construction safety orders regulating dusts, fumes, mists, vapors, and gases associated with asbestos.

2. Asbestos removal shall be performed by trained and registered personnel.

Project Owner SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 41 13 - 4

3. Within vaults, deactivate HVAC systems prior to asbestos removal. Close and temporarily seal registers.

4. Control measures may include wet methods, encapsulation, or removal with HEPA-filterequipped vacuums into labeled polyethylene bags.

5. Refer to Section 02 41 15 for procedures for removing asbestos-cement pipe if encountered. Remove asbestos pipe in whole pipe pieces where possible. At Contractor’s option, buried asbestos pipe outside any foundation footprints may be hot-tapped or snapcut in wetted condition per Section 02 41 15. Do not sawcut asbestos.

6. Demolition shall comply with Imperial County Air Pollution Control District. Asbestosrelated work conducted during demolition shall be performed by a California-licensed asbestos-abatement contractor under supervision of a California State Certified Asbestos Consultant.

7. Remove and dispose of asbestos-containing construction materials (ACCM’s) in compliance with notification, monitoring, and asbestos-removal procedures stipulated in Imperial County Air Pollution Control District to reduce asbestos-related health risks.

8. Throughout Work, maintain records of compliance with APCD Rules.

9. Air monitoring relating to asbestos removal work shall be performed by or under direct supervision of a California State Certified Asbestos Consultant as required by law.

10. Refer to Section 01 35 44 for procedures for disposing of asbestos materials.

G. Lead-based paint (LBP) or lead-containing paint (LCP) shall be remediated according to guidelines set up by EPA, OSHA, CalOSHA, Imperial County Air Pollution Control District and other regulatory agencies. Procedures shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. Lead-based paint removal shall be performed by trained and registered personnel.

2. Notification to California Department of Public Health (CDPH) shall be completed through filing of an Abatement of Lead Hazards Notification CDPH Form 8551.

3. Removal of LBP’s or LBP’s shall be completed by Certified Lead Supervisor or Certified Lead Works as defined by §35008 and §35009 of LBP Regulations respectively.

4. Work shall conform to procedures specified In Chapter 12 Abatement in “Guidelines for the Evaluation and Control of Lead-Based Paint Hazards in Housing” published by United States Department of Housing and Urban Development in June 1995.

5. Encapsulate any deteriorating lead paint prior to removal.

6. Lead paint that is intact and not delaminating may be disposed of as construction material as long as it is attached to its original substrate.

7. Non-encapsulated paint chips and debris shall be wet-sanded or scraped, collected and disposed of in accordance with local, state and federal regulations.

8. If any paints containing Lead or Chromium must be disturbed or made airborne during Work by activities such as abrasive blasting, welding, cutting or torch burning, provide worker protection in accordance with OSHA Lead in Construction Standard and other applicable regulations.

9. Containment of LBP or LCP shall prevent contamination of non-work areas with leadcontaminated dust, lead-contaminated soil, or lead-based paint debris.

10. Removal of LBP or LCP materials shall be conducted in accordance with an Abatement Plan prepared by a Certified Lead Supervisor, Certified Lead Project Monitor, or Certified Lead Project Designer. Abatement plan shall encompass requirements specified in §35100(4)(A) of LBP Regulations.

Project Owner SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 41 13 - 5

11. Throughout Work, Certified Lead Supervisor shall maintain records of compliance with LBP regulations for Owner inspection upon request, including:
a. Evidence of notification of CDPH,
b. Maintenance of Abatement Plan shall be retained on-site throughout demolition activities for Owner review upon request,

12. Demolition activities shall be subject to inspection by CDPH or Owner to verify compliance with requirements of LBP regulations and Abatement Plan.

13. Following completion of abatement activities, retain services of a Certified Lead Inspector/Assessor or Certified Lead Project Monitor to conduct clearance inspection in accordance with CCR Title 17 Division 1 Chapter 8 §35000a and §36000(c)(3).

14. Submit copy of results of clearance inspection to Owner and to City Planning Division upon completion of abatement and inspection activities.

15. Legally dispose of paint removed during progress of demolition and Work. When paint debris is found to contain >5 ppm lead or hexavalent chromium when tested in accordance with Waste Extraction Test (WET) method of CCR Title 22, it shall be disposed of as hazardous waste.

H. Mercury shall be remediated according to guidelines set up by EPA, OSHA, Cal OSHA and other regulatory agencies. Dispose of intact units in accordance with local, state and federal regulations.

I. Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB’s) shall be remediated according to guidelines set up by EPA, OSHA, Cal OSHA and other regulatory agencies. Dispose of intact units in accordance with local, state and federal regulations.

J. Following remediation, demolition shall occur as follows:

1. Facilities scheduled for demolition shall be removed, salvaged and disposed of as shown in Contract Documents. Remove and dispose of portions of items scheduled for demolition which interfere with project construction.

2. Backfill and compact site areas disturbed by demolition work with earth or gravel backfill in accordance with Section 31 23 33.

3. Protect work not intended to be removed or salvaged. If in opinion of Owner’s Representative a demolition method used may endanger or damage parts of structure or affect satisfactory operation of facilities, promptly change method upon receipt of notification from Owner’s Representative.

4. No blasting will be permitted.

5. Equipment, material and piping, scheduled for demolition and not required to be salvaged to Owner shall become Contractor’s property and shall be removed from project site and disposed of legally.

6. Do not reuse material salvaged from demolition work on this project except where permitted by Contract Documents.

K. Concrete structure removal shall occur as follows:

1. Exercise care to protect existing structures to remain.

2. Repair collateral damage from demolition as directed by Owner’s Representative.

3. Before beginning removal operations, sawcut minimum 1” deep true line along limits of demolition on faces of elements to be visible in finished Work.

4. Carefully remove concrete, leaving clean, tooled, near-planar surface for new concrete to bond to.

Project Owner SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 41 13 - 6

5. If removal damages edge of existing concrete to be bonded to new concrete, sawcut behind damaged concrete and replace to sawcut line.

6. Burn off reinforcing steel exposed by concrete removal in areas not to be covered by new Work. Burn steel off 1” below concrete surface, and patch voids with epoxy mortar.

7. Burn off reinforcing steel 2” below new finished surface in areas to be covered by new Work.

8. Remove debris from cavities created by demolition.

L. Steel structure removal shall occur as follows:

1. Exercise care to protect existing structures to remain.

2. Repair collateral damage from demolition as directed by Owner’s Representative.

3. Burn off anchor bolts exposed by concrete removal in areas not to be covered by new Work. Burn steel off 1” below concrete surface, and patch voids with Portland cement concrete, or Class E cement mortar.

4. Remove debris from cavities created by demolition.

M. Patching shall occur as follows:

1. Patching shall include restoration of surface or item to condition as near as practicable to match existing adjoining surfaces unless otherwise directed.

2. Where patching involves cleaning, painting, special coating, wall covering or other applied finish, clean and refinish entire surface plane, wall or ceiling unless complete refinishing of entire space is required elsewhere.

N. Dispose of removed materials legally and off-site in licensed and Owner-accepted landfill.

O. Each load for landfill disposal shall be accompanied by manifest verifying hazardous materials were legally disposed of to absolve Owner of responsibility. Return completed copy of manifest to Owner after disposal.

3.3 Salvage and Removal of Existing Equipment
A. Existing equipment, materials, and appurtenances designated to be demolished or removed, and not to be salvaged, shall become property of Contractor, shall be removed from site, and shall be legally disposed of at Contractor’s expense.

B. Clean and relocate salvaged items to plant area designated by Owner’s Representative.

During construction Owner’s Representative may designate more items to be salvaged whether Contract Documents indicate items are to be salvaged or not.

C. Furnish tools, equipment, material, and supplies, and perform labor required to remove from service, prepare for storage, inventory, package, mark, and deliver to Owner equipment and/or materials designated as salvage in Contract Documents. Prepare and submit listing of equipment identified for salvage. After equipment is removed, revise and resubmit list to include removal dates, estimated weight, description, and condition of each item.

D. Disassemble and remove equipment carefully to prevent damage. Empty fluids from equipment, and plug openings. Bubble wrap or double box delicate equipment. Box sizes shall be suitable for item to be packed with cushioning material, but without bulge, and shall be minimum 200-lb. test weight, taped on unmade seams using 2" minimum clear 2-mil minimum industrial tape. Provide 48” x 48” pallets with minimum 2”x4” main rails and 1” thick (nominal) cross stiles nailed on both sides of main rails. Bolt larger equipment to wooden pallets. Wrap equipment with waterproof plastic. Prepare individual manifests for each equipment container.

Insert manifest into clear cover envelope and tape to side of container.

Project Owner SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 41 13 - 7
E. Use care in loading and delivering material to prevent damage, splitting and breakage of material. Owner’s Representative will designate receiving party for salvage material at one of the following locations:

1. As directed by Owner

END OF SECTION
Project Owner SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 41 13 - 8

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Project Owner PAVING REMOVAL AND RESURFACING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 41 14 - 1
SECTION 02 41 14

PAVING REMOVAL AND RESURFACING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, removal, replacement, and sealing of paved surfaces disturbed by construction.

B. Refer to plans for trench replacement requirements.

C. Refer to plans for requirements for trench backfill and re-pavement.

D. Refer to plans for requirements for partial concrete replacement for cross gutters and spandrels.

E. Unless otherwise noted, refer to County of Imperial Department of Public Works Standard Drawings and Details for requirements for pavement removal, excavation, backfill, and resurfacing.

F. Unless otherwise noted, refer to County of Imperial Department of Public Works Standard Drawings for requirements for curb, gutter, sidewalk and driveway replacement.

G. Unless otherwise noted, refer to County of Imperial Department of Public Works Standard Drawings for requirements for concrete pavement replacement.

H. Unless otherwise noted, refer to County of Imperial Department of Public Works Standard Drawings for requirements for asphalt-concrete pavement replacement.

I. Refer to Section 32 12 16 for paving asphalt.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 66 00: Product Storage and Handling Requirements E. Section 02 05 00: Basic Civil Engineering Requirements F. Section 03 30 00: Cast-in-Place Concrete
G. Section 09 90 00: Painting and Coating
H. Section 31 23 00: Excavation and Fill
I. Section 32 12 16: Paving Asphalt
J. Section 32 13 13: Concrete Paving

1.3 Quality Assurance
A. Resurfacing of existing pavement and surfaces disturbed in connection with construction of project improvements and appurtenances, shall conform to provisions of applicable permits issued by agencies having jurisdiction over work within their right-of-way.

B. Finish surfaces shall be formed and adequately sloped to prevent ponding.

C. Pay related fees and conform to permit and license requirements of property owners, agencies, cities, or counties, whose paving is disturbed by Work.

1.4 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

Project Owner PAVING REMOVAL AND RESURFACING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 41 14 - 2

1. Asphalt Institute MS-4 The Asphalt Handbook

2. County Of Imperial Department of Public Works Engineering Design Guidelines and Standard Drawings and Details

3. SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook)

1.5 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Certificate of
Compliance
Submit report from testing laboratory certifying that aggregate material is asbestos-free and conforms to specified gradations or characteristics.

Delivery
Tickets
Submit for all asphalt and concrete used.

Deliver submittal to jobsite inspector.

B. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for definition of requirements for certificates of compliance.

1.6 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 and 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of asphalt materials.

1.7 Unit Prices
A. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Refer to applicable referenced sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to install pavement before beginning work. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

B. Photograph and measure locations of pavement markings to allow replacement upon completion of paving operations.

C. Before saw-cutting, excavating, or cold-milling existing pavement, use metal detector of adequate strength to scan Work area. Locate and protect manholes, water valve cans, utility access frames and covers, survey monuments, or other metal appurtenances buried below existing pavement surface whether shown on Plans or not.

D. Cold-mill from gutter edge to gutter edge, extending from curb return to curb return where shown.

E. Sawcut transverse joint lines at curb returns in conformance with SSPWC (Greenbook) §300-

1.3.2. F. Dispose of removed material and millings outside right of way in conformance with SSPWC (Greenbook) §300-1.3.2.

Project Owner PAVING REMOVAL AND RESURFACING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 41 14 - 3

3.2 Pavement Removal
A. Remove pavement or road surfacing within limits of construction excavations prior to excavation operations of any nature. Remove surplus material and dispose of as specified.

B. Prior to removal of existing surfacing, make pavement cuts for pipelines at limits of excavations as shown or required by permit. Pavement cuts for trenches shall be neat and straight along both sides of trench and shall parallel pipe alignment to provide un-fractured level pavement joints for bonding existing surfacing to new pavement replacement. Make pavement cuts for pipelines at least 12” outside trench face to provide benched surface of undisturbed base on which new pavement will be placed to match existing pavement.

C. Where large irregular surfaces are removed, trim or cut paving parallel or perpendicular to roadway centerlines. Cut edges shall have clean, solid vertical faces free from loose material.

D. Cutting of flatwork shall be done only after permission is granted in excavation or encroachment permit.

E. Sawcut Portland cement concrete pavement, including cross gutters, curbs and gutters, sidewalks, driveways, and other concrete surfaces to depth ≥ 1½” prior to removal.

1. Sawcut concrete pavement at edge of trench or excavation.

2. Saw-cut concrete curbs, gutters and sidewalks to nearest score marks or construction joints beyond damaged portion as may be required in each case by authority having jurisdiction.

3. Pneumatic tools may be used to cut concrete pavement only with written permission of Owner's Representative. In such event, a subsequent saw-cut shall be made after backfilling, and additional concrete pavement shall be removed and disposed of by Contractor prior to resurfacing.

4. Do not demolish Portland cement concrete using impact equipment such as stomper attachments on backhoes and excavators, wrecking balls, or other means of demolition that may result in vibration and ground shaking unless prior written acceptance is secured from Owner’s Representative at least 3 working days before start of demolition.

F. Asphalt concrete surfaces shall be initially cut by means of sawcutting, or pneumatic pavement cutters or other accepted equipment prior to removal of surfacing. Pavement sawcutting will be required within rights-of-way of county roads and highways, or as required by permits or local governing bodies.

G. Road-mixed surfaces shall be cut at limits of trench and/or excavation prior to removal of existing surfacing. Cuts may be made with pneumatic tools or other accepted equipment. The extra trimming width by saw cuts prior to resurfacing will not be required unless otherwise shown.

H. Removed pavement shall be recycled or disposed of as required by law.

3.3 Temporary Paving
A. Replace pavement removed by trenching operations with minimum 2 inches of temporary asphalt paving mix after compaction is accepted by Owner's Representative or within 3 days after pipe installation, whichever comes first.

B. Place temporary pavement on cross streets and accesses on same day that excavation is made.

C. Maintain temporary pavement so a smooth traversable surface is available at all times for vehicular traffic, free from ruts, depressions, holes, or loose gravel.

D. Inspect temporary paving at no greater than 12-hour intervals, 7 days per week during periods of measurable precipitation. Repair and/or replace temporary asphalt paving as needed on discovery of damage.

Project Owner PAVING REMOVAL AND RESURFACING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 41 14 - 4
E. Cost for installing, maintaining and removing temporary paving shall be included in contract unit prices for Work, and no extra compensation will be made to Contractor.

3.4 Installation
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install asphalt concrete resurfacing at locations shown on Plans and Submittals and approved by Owner’s Representative.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

2. Applicable building code requirements

3. Per drawing plans and specifications

4. County of Imperial Department of Public Works Engineering Design Guidelines and Standard Drawings and Details

5. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements

6. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction

7. Asphalt Institute MS-4 The Asphalt Handbook
D. Refer variances between the above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

E. Asphalt resurfacing shall proceed as follows:

1. If existing pavement is undercut or deprived of subgrade support, remove pavement from unsupported area, and backfill and compact unsupported area as provided for in excavated areas.

2. Remove existing surfacing before resurfacing. Dispose of or recycle removed surfacing as required by law.

3. Restore subgrades, base materials, and paved surfaces above trenches or damaged sections with subgrades, base materials and paved surfaces equal to or better than those found prior to Contractor beginning Work.

4. Unless otherwise shown on Contract Documents or permits, thickness of finished aggregate base course shall be 1” greater than asphalt thickness prior to construction, but not less than 4” thick.

5. Unless otherwise shown on Contract Documents or permits, thickness of finished asphalt concrete course shall be 1” greater than asphalt thickness prior to construction, but not less than 4” thick.

6. Restore surface to original grade and crown section in areas where surface is removed, broken, or damaged by equipment, or where ground has caved or settled due to installation of Work.

7. Trenches or excavations in bituminous pavement under 300’ long shall be squared up and tack-coated beyond cut line at least 12” and capped with fine or sand hot-mixed asphalt concrete to provide a smooth riding surface.

8. Trenches in bituminous pavement over 300’ long shall be capped with a Barber-Greene (or equivalent paving method) hot-mixed asphalt concrete overlay.

9. Asphalt concrete overlay shall extend ≥24” beyond edges of excavation or pavement cracked by excavation. Asphalt concrete overlay shall consist of fine or sand hot-mixed asphalt concrete placed at minimum practical thickness (≥1”) to provide dense and smooth riding surface.

Project Owner PAVING REMOVAL AND RESURFACING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 41 14 - 5

10. Lap trench section at least 12” on each side and hand rake so lapped section feathers-in with existing pavement. Resulting edge of contact between new and existing pavement on each side shall parallel existing trench in a straight and neat join line.

11. Prior to placing cap pavement, clean pavement receiving cap to remove loose material.

12. Apply asphalt emulsion tack coat to surfaces receiving cap pavement.

13. Apply asphaltic emulsion tack coat to vertical faces of asphalt concrete pavement against which pavement replacement materials are to be placed.

14. Feather edges of cap pavement to meet the existing pavement.

15. When ready for acceptance, thoroughly compact completed surface true to grade and cross section.

16. Work shall match appearance of existing improvements.

F. Seal coating over asphaltic paving shall proceed as follows:

1. After completing paving and immediately prior to final acceptance, apply seal coat as specified.

2. Coordinate application with Owner.

3. Allow seal coat to dry at least 4 daylight hours before restriping or admitting traffic over sealed portion.

4. Restore striping over sealed portion before admitting traffic.

G. Portland cement resurfacing shall be installed according to requirements of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction. Installation shall proceed as follows:

1. Replace Portland cement concrete sidewalks, curbs, gutters and driveways to nearest scoreline or over sufficient width to replace any portions of concrete damaged, fragmented, cracked, or otherwise disturbed due to construction operations.

2. Where new PCC pavement contacts existing PCC pavement, dowel and epoxy #4 smooth bars, 16” in length, spaced at 18” on-center, located vertically in center of the PCC pavement. Drill 8¾”-long hole in exposed edge of existing PCC pavement just large enough to accept #4 smooth bar and epoxy bar into place in existing PCC prior to placing new concrete. Install expansion joint material as required by local governing body, agency, or association having jurisdiction over public and private streets.

3. Construct cold joints between sections of new PCC pavement using either #4 deformed bars spaced at 18” on-center, located vertically in center of PCC pavement, or by forming keyway at cold joints. Thoroughly vibrate PCC into adjoining keyway during placement of each pavement section.

H. Furnish and place permanent resurfacing within 7 days after order to do so by Owner.

I. Minimum paving course thicknesses are shown below under field quality control.

J. Following pavement replacement and sealing, replace pavement markings in kind.

Project Owner PAVING REMOVAL AND RESURFACING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 41 14 - 6

3.5 Field Quality Control
A. Field testing shall include the following for asphalt paving:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Asphalt
Concrete
Paving
Minimum
Thickness
Thickness of
section removed
plus 1”
As directed Owner Contractor
Aggregate
Base
Minimum
Thickness
Thickness to equal
thickness of section
removed and shall
extend at least 4”
beneath asphalt
As directed Owner Contractor
Drainage Flood paved
areas
sufficiently to
demonstrate
absence of
ponding and
“bird-baths”
As directed Owner Contractor Drainage
Finish
Grade
Finish
Surface
No deviations from
existing grade in
excess of ⅛” in 10’
As directed Owner Contractor
No ruts,
depressions,
ponds, or
irregularities in
excess of ⅜” deep
As directed Owner Contractor
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate
compliance to
Contract
Documents and
Permit
Requirements
1 test Owner Contractor
Project Owner PAVING REMOVAL AND RESURFACING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 41 14 - 7
B. Field testing shall include the following for Portland cement concrete paving:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Portland
Cement
Concrete
Minimum
Thickness
Thickness to equal
thickness of section
removed (4”
minimum)
As directed Owner Contractor
Aggregate
Base
Minimum
Thickness
Thickness to equal
thickness of section
removed and shall
extend at least 8”
beneath PCC
As directed Owner Contractor
Finish
Grade
Finish Surface
Rolling
No deviations from
existing grade in
excess of ⅛” in 10’
As directed Owner Contractor
No ruts, depressions
or irregularities
exceeding ⅜” deep
As directed Owner Contractor
Drainage Flood paved areas
sufficiently to
demonstrate
absence of ponding
and “bird-baths”
As directed Owner Contractor
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate
compliance to
Contract Documents
and Permit
Requirements
1 test Owner Contractor

END OF SECTION

Project Owner PAVING REMOVAL AND RESURFACING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 41 14 - 8

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Project Owner UTILITY LINE REMOVAL OR ABANDONMENT
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 41 15 - 1
SECTION 02 41 15

UTILITY LINE REMOVAL OR ABANDONMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and Work required to abandon or remove existing pipes, conduit and buried structures.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 35 44: Environmental Procedures for Hazardous Materials D. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
E. Section 01 74 00: Cleaning and Waste Management
F. Section 02 05 00: Basic Civil Engineering Requirements G. Section 02 41 13: Selective Site Demolition
H. Section 03 60 00: Grouting
I. Section 26 05 10: Common Work Results for Electrical J. Section 31 05 50: Protecting Existing Utilities
K. Section 31 23 00: Excavation and Fill

1.3 Quality Assurance
A. Use adequate number of skilled workmen trained and experienced in necessary trades and crafts and completely familiar with specified requirements and methods for proper performance of Work of this section.

1.4 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. California Building Code (CBC)

2. California Fire Code (CFC)

3. California Mechanical Code (CMC)

4. California Plumbing Code (CPC)

5. NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC)

6. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §306-5

1.5 Unit Prices
A. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for utility line removal or abandonment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to abandon or remove pipes, conduits, and structures and rejoin with new pipe or conduit before disturbing existing improvements.

Project Owner UTILITY LINE REMOVAL OR ABANDONMENT
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 41 15 - 2
B. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work.

3.2 Field Procedures
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic execution requirements.

B. Abandon or remove pipes, conduits and structures at locations and as shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. The following standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

2. Published requirements of owners of facilities to be abandoned or removed

3. California Building Code

4. Other applicable fire, plumbing, mechanical and electrical code requirements

5. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) for pipeline abandonment.

6. Unless otherwise noted, refer to Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) for requirements for abandonment seals for storm drain manholes and inlets.

D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

E. Where expressly called out on Plans, or in specifications or pay items, backfill pipes, conduits and structures to be abandoned by filling with 2-sack cement slurry.

F. When other buried piping, conduits or structures have been or are to be abandoned and interfere with construction, remove interfering portion and securely seal open portions as follows:

1. Where greater internal dimension of conduit is 48” or less, seal with one of the following methods:
a. A minimum 6” thick concrete wall or plug
b. A minimum 8” thick wall of brick and mortar
c. A blind flange bolted to an available existing flange d. A manufactured cast-iron, ductile-iron or PVC cap
e. Filling pipe with 2-sack slurry
f. Filling pipe with controlled low-strength material
g. Filling pipe with grout

2. For larger openings, seal as shown on Plans.

3. Where existing valves are to be abandoned, abandon valves as follows:
a. If possible, before depressurizing main, verify closed valve to be abandoned is watertight. b. Abandon valve in closed position.
c. Remove existing valve valve extension, can, and lid. d. Backfill valve can with 2-sack slurry
e. If valve cannot be verified as watertight, provide flange or plug on downstream side of valve.

4. For catch basin connector pipes, inlet opening to mainline pipe shall also be sealed.

Project Owner UTILITY LINE REMOVAL OR ABANDONMENT
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 41 15 - 3

5. Where pipes, conduits, sanitary sewers, or storm drains are to be abandoned within specified limits, abandon or remove connected structures and appurtenances within said limits.

6. Where catch basins, manholes, vaults, valves, or other structures are to be abandoned, remove upper portion to at least 12” below street subgrade. Seal conduits connecting to structure as provided herein. Perforate or break bottom of concrete or watertight structures to prevent entrapment of water. Backfill with suitable material compacted to 90%, except in layers where stricter compaction requirements are specified or shown.

7. Where catch basins, manholes, vaults, valves, or other structures are to be removed, remove to full depth of structure, including foundation. Backfill with suitable material compacted to 90%, except in layers where stricter compaction requirements are specified or shown.

8. Salvage cover sets, gratings, and other steel components (except reinforcing bars) of removed and abandoned structures. Contact respective owners, and, if required, deliver and load salvaged materials to owner’s truck at Work site. Otherwise, such material shall become Contractor’s property and shall be legally disposed of outside Work site.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Trench
Backfill
Compaction ASTM D1557 1 test Owner Contractor
CementSand
Slurry
Backfill
Slump (6”
maximum)
ASTM C143 1 each batch Owner Contractor

END OF SECTION

Project Owner UTILITY LINE REMOVAL OR ABANDONMENT
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 02 41 15 - 4

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Project Owner CONCRETE FORMING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 10 00 - 1
SECTION 03 10 00

CONCRETE FORMING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, erection and removal of concrete formwork including formwork, bracing, shoring, supports, falsework, and appurtenant Work.

B. Setting of embedded bolts, anchors, pipe sleeves, conduit sleeves, conduit and similar work under direction of respective trades.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 66 00: Product Storage and Handling Requirements E. Section 02 05 00: Basic Civil Engineering Requirements F. Section 31 23 00: Excavation and Fill
G. Section 03 15 00: Concrete Accessories
H. Section 03 20 00: Concrete Reinforcing
I. Section 03 30 00: Cast-in-Place Concrete
J. Section 03 39 00: Concrete Curing
K. Section 09 90 00: Painting and Coating

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install concrete formwork including appurtenant structural, or mechanical mountings or connections required for compliance with applicable building codes and standards.

B. Forms, shoring and falsework shall:

1. Confine concrete ingredients including water, sand and cement while placing concrete,

2. Confine concrete to required lines, grades and construction tolerances.

3. Provide safe working environment in accordance with OSHA regulations.

4. Support dead loads and live loads plus superimposed construction loads including equipment, stored materials, personnel, impact loads form falling concrete or other materials, foundation pressures repetitive stress loads from vibrating concrete, and other vertical and lateral loads during construction.

5. Be of sufficient number and area to allow construction to proceed on schedule.

6. Upon removal, leave concrete with nontoxic, clean, dry surface, free from ridges, fins, offsets, deflection marks, or similar defects. Surface shall be in condition that can be finished by Contractor as required by Contract Documents.

C. It shall be Contractor’s responsibility to design, construct and maintain safe forms, shoring and falsework at all times in accordance with applicable OSHA regulations.

D. Forms, shoring and falsework failing to provide all above functions shall be removed from jobsite immediately at no additional cost to Owner.

Project Owner CONCRETE FORMING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 10 00 - 2
E. Cap protruding reinforcement bars for worker protection in accordance with applicable safety codes.

1.4 Quality Assurance
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen trained and experienced in necessary trades and crafts and completely familiar with specified requirements and methods for proper performance of Work of this section.

B. Design of structures shown on drawings includes no allowance for imposed construction loads.

C. Provide forms, shoring and falsework of suitable material and of type, size, shape, quality, and strength to withstand dead loads and live loads plus imposed loads during construction.

D. Formwork shall conform to CCR Title 8 §1717 and ACI 347R, except as exceeded by requirements of other regulatory agencies or as otherwise shown.

E. Forms shall be true to line and grade, mortar-tight, and sufficiently rigid to resist deflection during concrete placement.

F. Remove dirt, chips, sawdust, nails, laitance, and foreign matter from forms before placing concrete. Form surfaces shall be smooth and free from irregularities, dents, sags, and holes that might deface finished surfaces.

G. Thoroughly clean previously used forms of dirt, mortar, and foreign matter before reuse.

H. Tolerances of formwork shall conform to ACI 117. Failure of finished concrete work to meet specified tolerances shall be remedied at Contractor’s expense.

I. Before placing concrete, treat inside surfaces of forms with accepted form-release agent which will leave no objectionable film on form surface that can be absorbed by concrete. Take care to avoid depositing form-release agent on previously placed concrete.

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. ACI 117 Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials

2. ACI 301 Structural Concrete

3. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete

4. ACI 347R Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork

5. APA H330G APA Source List

6. ASTM A36 Structural Steel

7. ASTM C470 Molds for Forming Concrete Test Cylinders Vertically

8. California Building Code (CBC)

9. California Division of Occupational Health and Safety Construction Safety Orders

10. NLMA Design Specifications for Stress-Grade Lumber and its Fastenings

11. U.S. Product Standard PS1 Construction and Industrial Plywood Concrete Forms, Class 1

12. U.S. Product Standard PS20 American Softwood Lumber Standard

13. SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §303-1 Concrete Structures”

14. WCLIB Standard Grading and Dressing Rules No 16 of West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
Project Owner CONCRETE FORMING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 10 00 - 3

15. WWPA Standard Grading Rules for Western Lumber

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Working
Drawings -
Falsework
At least 30 days before form fabrication, submit Working Drawings bearing stamp of registered professional civil or structural engineer for falsework, formwork, and vertical shoring per Working Drawing requirements.

Show size, number, and locations of cleanouts at form bottoms.

Show panel sizes and panel joint locations in Class A and Class B forms.

Working Drawings for falsework shall coordinate with drawings required by Section 03 30 00.

Minimum Design Criteria shall conform to design criteria shown below, taken from SSPWC §303-1.6

DESIGN LOADS
Live Load – Other Structures 30 psf per square foot horizontal area
Transverse Loading for Longitudinal
Bracing
2% of vertical load

MINIMUM UNIT STRESSES FOR FALSEWORK (USED MATERIAL)
Axial Tension and Bending 1,400 psi
Compression Perpendicular to
Grain
350 psi
End Grain Bearing 1,300 psi
Shear Parallel to Grain 125 psi
Timber Columns S(psi) =1300 (1-L/60d)
Where d= least dimension of column
in inches and
Timber Columns
If Contractor furnishes new grademarked material for falsework, allowable unit stresses shall be
those recommended in WWPA
Standard Grading Rules increased
25% for short-term loading.
d= least dimension of column in
inches
L = Unbraced length of column
L/d ≤ 50 for bracing
L/d ≤ 30 for main members
Project Owner CONCRETE FORMING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 10 00 - 4

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Falsework may be bolted or spiked at Contractor’s option but use of bolts or spikes shall not be combined in same connection.

Refer to NLMA Design Specifications for Stress-Grade Lumber and its Fastenings
(increased 25% for short-term loading) for connection strengths of bolts or spikes.

Tie ends of columns bearing on wedges in both directions by girts.

Show construction and expansion joints placement and for sequence of forming and concrete placing operations per structural Shop Drawing requirements.

Show conduit, piping and other wall penetrations per structural Shop Drawing requirements.

Submit for form ties, taper tie plugs (if used), form gaskets related work per Product Data requirements.

Product
Data
Submit for falsework, formwork and vertical shoring per Engineering Calculations requirements. Calculations shall include statement from preparing engineer certifying falsework, formwork and vertical shoring design meets or exceeds design requirements of Cal OSHA Construction Safety Orders including Subchapter 4 Article 29 §1717, “Falsework and Vertical Shoring” and design criteria above taken from SSPWC §303-1.6 Engineering
Calculations
Submit for falsework, formwork and vertical shoring per Engineering Calculations requirements. Calculations shall include statement from preparing engineer certifying falsework, formwork and vertical shoring design meets or exceeds design requirements of Cal OSHA Construction Safety Orders including Subchapter 4 Article 29 §1717, “Falsework and Vertical Shoring” and design criteria above taken from SSPWC §303-1.6 B. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for definition of requirements for Working Drawings, Product Data, and Engineering Calculations.

C. Maintain at least one copy of accepted Shop Drawings on site throughout concrete placing operations.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 / 01 66 00 / 02 05 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of concrete formwork.

C. Cover and protect forms to prevent surface damage or deterioration which might cause unsatisfactory appearance or condition in finished concrete.

1.8 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for concrete forming.

Project Owner CONCRETE FORMING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 10 00 - 5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Form Ties Burke / Edoco (Penta-Tie System) Long Beach, CA (310) 834-3401 Dywidag Systems International Long Beach, CA (562) 529-2109 Richmond Screw Anchor
Company (Snap Tys)
Miamisburg, OH (513) 866-5936
Simpson Strong Tie Company Riverside, CA (714) 871-8373 Accepted equal
Plywood Use BB-Plyform, Medium Density
Overlay(MDO), or High-Density
Overlay (HDO) products from APA
member-mill Manufacturers listed
in APA Source List.

Reusable and
Wash-off Forms
for Site Concrete
Labrado – wash off Dana Point, CA (949) 830-9464
L M Scofield Company “Lascolite”
- reusable
Los Angeles, CA (800) 800-9900
Accepted equal
Concrete Form
Release Agents
GCP (Grace Concrete Products) /
Applied Technologies “Pieri®”
Cambridge, MA (617) 876-1400
W R Meadows Sealtight
Duogard®
Hampshire, IL (800) 342-5976
Accepted equal
Form Coatings GCP (Grace Concrete Products) /
Applied Technologies “Formfilm”
Cambridge, MA (617) 876-1400
Sika Chemical Corporation
“Antisot”
Lyndhurst, NJ (800) 325-9504
Sonneborn / BASF “Form-Saver” Shakopee, MN (800) 433-9517 Accepted equal

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Unless expressly accepted by Owner’s Representative, lumber brought onto jobsite for use as forms, shoring, or bracing shall be new surfaced material of grade shown on accepted Shop Drawings. Form surfaces shall be smooth. Do not use badly checked or warped lumber.

Project Owner CONCRETE FORMING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 10 00 - 6
C. Owner’s Representative may permit rejected lumber or plywood to be used on formwork for concrete surfaces to be completely enclosed or buried.

D. Form materials that remain or leave residues on or in concrete must be classified as acceptable for potable water use by Environmental Protection Agency within 30 days of application or use. Concrete formwork containing arsenic or other toxic materials shall be removed from jobsite and disposed of off-site.

E. Materials for formwork shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Wall Forms Steel Design per ACI 347R
Provide rubber grommets where ties pass through forms to prevent loss of cement paste.

Plywood
Panel
PS1 Class 1 Exterior B-B Plyform or better
Edge-sealed but not mill-oiled
Douglas Fir or Southern Yellow Pine plywood manufactured especially for formwork.

Place forms in widths ≥48” and uniform lengths ≥96” except where minimum panel dimensions exceed dimensions of
member formed.

Thickness ≥ ⅝” with stud spacing ≤12” center-to-center and close enough to prevent deflection marks.

Thickness ≤ ⅝” may only be used with continuous backing of ¾” sheeting.

Use new forms at start of Work for concrete exposed to view and replace as directed.

Refer to Paragraph 3.3 herein for finish requirements.

Coat or treat sheathing to prevent chemical deterioration or discoloring of formed concrete surfaces
Floor
Gasket
1” to 1½” diameter polyethylene rod gasket to seal bottom of wall forms resting on floor slabs or footings to prevent loss of fines and paste during concrete placing and vibration.

Roof and
Floor
Forms
Plywood Conform to PS1 Class 1 Exterior B-B Plyform or better Edge-sealed but not mill-oiled
Douglas Fir or Southern Yellow Pine plywood manufactured especially for formwork.

Place forms in widths ≥48” and uniform lengths ≥96” except where minimum panel dimensions exceed dimensions of
member formed.

Thickness ≥ ⅝” with stud spacing ≤12” center-to-center and close enough to prevent deflection marks.

Project Owner CONCRETE FORMING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 10 00 - 7

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Thickness ≤ ⅝” may only be used with continuous backing of ¾” sheeting.

Use new forms at start of Work for concrete exposed to view, and replace as directed.

Refer to Paragraph 3.3 herein for finish requirements.

Coat or treat sheathing to prevent chemical deterioration or discoloring of formed concrete surfaces
Forms for
Curbs and
Coping
Wood Thickness ≥1½”
Width ≥depth of curb or coping
All Other
Forms
Steel
Panels or
TongueandGroove
Lumber
Design per ACI 347R
Provide rubber grommets where ties pass through steel forms to prevent loss of cement paste.

Plywood Conform to PS1 Class 1 Exterior B-B Plyform or better Edge-sealed but not mill-oiled
Douglas Fir or Southern Yellow Pine plywood manufactured especially for formwork.

Thickness ≥ ⅝” with stud spacing ≤12” center-to-center and close enough to prevent deflection marks.

Thickness ≤ ⅝” may only be used with continuous backing of ¾” sheeting.

Use new forms at start of Work for concrete exposed to view, and replace as directed.

Refer to Paragraph 3.3 herein for finish requirements.

Coat or treat sheathing to prevent chemical deterioration or discoloring of formed concrete surfaces
Lumber for
Falsework,
Studs,
Headers,
and Wales
Douglas Fir
or
Southern
Yellow
Pine
Conform to PS 20 Construction Grade or better
Manufactured for use in concrete forming applications
No. 2 or better conforming to WWPA grading rules
Construct forms for outside surfaces with stiff wales at right angles to studs and form clamps or bolts extending through and fastening such wales.

Use new lumber.

Used lumber may be used for flatwork or Work to be buried.

Project Owner CONCRETE FORMING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 10 00 - 8

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Surfaced 4 sides.

Steel for
Falsework
Steel Conform to ASTM A36
Form Ties,
Clamps or
Bolts
Metal Rods
or Bolts
Of sufficient strength and quantity to prevent spreading of forms.

Terminate embedded rods at least 1½” inside formed concrete face.

Ties for walls in contact with backfill or water shall have waterstop shields ≥3” diameter
Do not use snap ties which cause spalling of concrete upon form stripping or tie removal.

Do not use twisted-wire loop ties to hold forms in position.

Do not use wooden spreaders unless accepted by Owner’s
Representative.

Form Ties
with
Removable
Cones
Metal Rods
or Bolts
Plastic
Cones
Plastic removable-cone-type.

Do not use snap ties which cause spalling of concrete upon form stripping or tie removal.

Ties for walls in contact with backfill or water shall have integral waterstop shields ≥3” diameter
Cone diameter ≤1½”
Temporary
Anchors
EpoxyAdhesiveType Refer to Section 05 50 00
Do not use powder-actuated fasteners, expansion bolt
anchors, bolts or nails driven into drilled holes, or lead anchors.

F. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Tolerances Allowable
Deviations
Refer to Paragraph 3.3 Field Quality Control
Forms and
Falsework
Strength
Design
Design Load Design of structures shown on drawings includes no allowance for imposed construction loads. Provide forms, shoring and falsework adequate for dead loads and live
loads plus imposed vertical and lateral loads during
construction.

Chamfers
and Fillets
Chamfers Provide ¾” chamfer on exterior corners except where otherwise shown.

Project Owner CONCRETE FORMING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 10 00 - 9

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Fillets Do not provide fillets on reentrant corners except where shown.

Form Ties Holes Form ties shall leave holes of regular shape for reaming.

Design Provide with plastic cone or other means of forming conical hole to ensure form tie may be broken off back of concrete face.

Removable
Taper Ties
May be used if accepted by Owner’s Representative. Insert preformed neoprene or polyurethane tapered plug (sized to seat at wall center) in hole left by taper tie removal.

Form
Coating
Acceptable
Materials
Non-grainraising, non-staining resin or polymer type coating Unacceptable
Materials
Coatings leaving residual matter on concrete surface.

Coatings adversely affecting concrete bonding to paint, plaster, mortar, protective coatings, waterproofing or other applied materials.

Coatings containing mineral oils, paraffins, waxes, or other nondrying ingredients.

Form Joint
Sealers
Design Resilient foam rubber strips, non-hardening plastic type caulking compound free of oil.

Alternate
Design
Waterproof pressure sensitive plastic tape of minimum 8-mil thickness and 2” width.

Form Tie
Hole Filling
Use rubber plugs, plastic caulking compound or equal
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to install concrete formwork before submitting shop drawings or ordering. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

B. Install plumb and string lines before placing concrete and maintain throughout concrete placement.

C. Forms for cast-in-place concrete sewer or storm drain structures or conduits may be omitted for concrete placed directly against trench walls or sheeting provided:

1. For concrete placed directly against excavation faces, faces must be firm, compact, able to stand without sloughing, and shall be outside concrete lines shown on Plans. Entire faces of excavation against which concrete is to be placed without forms shall be gunited to sufficient thickness to prevent raveling of exposed earth faces during placement of reinforcing steel, forms and concrete.

2. For concrete placed against sheeting, sheeting shall be closely fitted and placed outside concrete lines shown on Plans. Face surfaces against which concrete will be placed with Project Owner CONCRETE FORMING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 10 00 - 10
building paper. Except as otherwise shown, remove sheeting after at least 7 days or after concrete has reached compression strength of 2000 psi.

3. Avoid damaging concrete when removing sheeting. Backfill voids left by sheeting or pile removal using fill material having SE 30 or better. Consolidate by jetting or as directed by Owner’s Representative.

4. Where sheeting removal is not practical, portions of sheeting may, at Owner’s discretion be left at place, provided sheeting is free of toxic or harmful materials.

5. Steel reinforcing is secured accurately in place.

6. Satisfactory results are obtained at no cost to Owner.

7. Contractor accepts risk of damage to Work due to their use of this construction method.

D. Set pipe stubs, wall sleeves, anchor bolts and other embedded work in forms where required before placing concrete. Use templates to maintain anchor bolts in position during concrete placing.

E. Place embedded items as follows:

1. Locate embedded items so as not to reduce strength of construction and as shown in the drawings.

2. Embedded items shall be supported independently from reinforcing steel in manner preventing metallic contact and electrolytic deterioration.

3. Walls or slabs ≤4½” thick shall have no embedded items (parallel to surface).

4. For corrosion protection, place embedded metallic items to provide at least 2” clearance between embedded metallic items and concrete reinforcement. Do not secure embedded items in place by wiring or welding to reinforcement.

5. Place supplemental reinforcing around openings as indicated on the drawings.

F. Affix wood grade strips, or V-grooves to forms where shown, to define limits between successive concrete placements.

G. Forms shall not be constructed continuously, except for battered or sloped surfaces. Remove and reset forms for each lift. Sheathing of reset forms shall not overlap previously placed concrete by more than 1”. Tighten forms against hardened concrete so forms will not spread and permit loss of concrete or cause abrupt irregularities. Use supplementary bolts and form ties as needed to secure reset forms against hardened concrete.

H. Build forms for sloped or battered concrete surfaces so sheathing can be placed board-byboard or panel-by-panel immediately ahead of concrete placement to facilitate access for concrete placement, vibration and inspection. Construct sheathing so sheathing can be removed, board-by-board, from bottom up. Form surfaces of construction joints and finished surfaces with slopes > 5 horizontal to 1 vertical as required herein.

I. Clean forms and embedments before placing concrete.

1. Remove encrusted dirt, concrete, mortar or grout from forms or embedments.

2. Treat form surfaces with release agents acceptable to Owner’s Representative before using forms.

3. Remove excess lubricant before placing concrete.

4. Take care to keep lubricant off surfaces of steel reinforcement and embedded items.

J. Verify proper placement of forms before and during concrete placement.

1. Use plumb-bobs, known offsets, and other measurements as needed to detect formwork movement and verify specified tolerances are attained.

Project Owner CONCRETE FORMING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 10 00 - 11

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install concrete formwork at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

2. Applicable building code requirements

3. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

E. Install concrete formwork to tolerances recommended by Manufacturer and as described below to meet tolerances shown under Paragraph 3.3 “Field Quality Control.” Unless otherwise shown, install concrete formwork true, plumb and level using precision gauges and levels.

F. Construct formwork as follows:

1. Place plywood with grain of outer plies in direction of span.

2. Construct forms so form marks conform to general lines of structure.

3. Place panels in neat, symmetrical pattern with horizontal joints level and continuous.

4. Camber forms for girders and slabs as required by Owner’s Representative.

5. Construct forms so portions may be removed for finishing without disturbing portions of forms to remain in place.

6. Fill joints with accepted quick-setting compound and finish flush with form interior.

7. Place chamfer strips with ¾” leg dimensions in form corners for exposed exterior corners to produce beveled edges.

8. Forms and form joints shall be tight and shall not leak mortar or paste. Use closed-cell rubber or synthetic polymer foam strips under base plates of wall forms. Foam strips shall butt against adjacent strips to prevent loss of mortar or paste. Foam strips shall be at least 4” wide and ¾” thick.

9. Do not fasten form ties to reinforcing steel or embedded parts.

10. Form coatings shall not contact reinforcing steel or concrete surfaces on which additional concrete or bonded coatings will be placed.

11. Form all vertical surfaces except where concrete placement against earth is shown.

12. For members of comparatively limited height, where character of ground is such it can be trimmed to required lines and stand securely without caving or sloughing throughout concrete placement, Owner’s Representative may permit placing concrete against earth at Contractor’s risk. Should ground fail during concrete placement for any reason, including weather, or other natural or manmade causes, Contractor shall remove concrete in areas of earth failure and reconstruct with forms and new concrete at Contractor’s sole expense.

13. Where concrete is permitted to be placed against trimmed ground in lieu of forms, add at least 1” thickness of additional concrete to face of concrete being formed against earth.

14. Where taper ties are accepted for use, larger end of taper tie shall be on wet side of walls in structures retaining water or groundwater

15. Secure gaskets at bottom of wall forms before placing concrete.

Project Owner CONCRETE FORMING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 10 00 - 12

16. Provide adequate cleanout holes at bottom of each lift of forms.

17. Provide form windows where concrete cannot be placed from top of wall in manner that meets contract document requirements.

18. Quantity and dimensions of cleanout holes and form windows shall be subject to acceptance by Owner’s Representative.

G. Make Concrete construction joints only where shown on Contract Documents and accepted Shop Drawings or accepted in writing by Owner’s Representative. When second lift is placed on hardened concrete, ensure quantities, locations, and tightness of form ties prevents unsatisfactory effects on finished concrete.

H. Contractor shall assume all risks involved in form removal. Minimum times shown herein are based on optimum field conditions, temperatures and concrete mixtures. In no case shall forms be removed on load-bearing members until cylinder tests demonstrate to Contractor’s satisfaction concrete has reached sufficient strength to withstand expected dead loads and field loads during construction.

I. Minimum elapsed times prior to formwork and falsework removal shall be:

APPLICATION LOCATION
CEMENT
TYPE

MINIMUM TIME BEFORE

FORM REMOVAL

MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURES
Miscellaneous
Structures
Forms Supporting Direct Loads
or Resisting Bending Stress
Type II/V 7 days
Curb Forms Type II/V Remove in time to permit
finishing after concrete
has set sufficiently to
keep its shape

STANDARD STRUCTURES
Catch Basins Outside Forms and Inside Wall
Forms not Supporting Top Slab
Type II/V 2 days
Top Slab Forms Type II/V 5 days
Standard
Transition
Structures
Outside Forms and Inside Wall
Forms not Supporting Top Slab
Type II/V 5 days
Top Slab Forms Type II/V Remove when
f’c>20x(span length in
feet)+1000

CHANNELS AND COUNDUITS
Channels and
Conduits
Open Channel Walls Type II/V 7 days
Slab Forms Type II/V 48 hours
J. Arrange to cure and protect concrete immediately following form removal.

K. Remove forms not permitted to remain in place and clean concrete surfaces of loose material.

Project Owner CONCRETE FORMING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 10 00 - 13

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Allow Owner’s Representative to inspect formwork before and during concrete placement.

B. Obtain Owner’s Representative’s acceptance of formwork before placing concrete.

C. Monitor plumb and string line positions continually throughout concrete placement and correct deficiencies immediately.

D. Special inspection and field testing required by Chapter 17 of CBC (Table 1705.3) shall be completed by ICC-certified special inspector selected by Owner and shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY

FIRST TEST

PAID FOR BY

RETESTS PAID
FOR BY
Concrete
Formwork
Shape,
Location
and
Dimensions
of Item
Being
Formed
ACI 318 6.1.1, and
paragraph E below
Periodic per
CBC Table
1705.3
Owner Contractor to
reimburse Owner
for costs of first
deputy inspector
if re-inspection is
required
E. Additional field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Formwork
and
Finished
Concrete
Tolerance
of Finished
Concrete
Work
As described below and
ACI 117
Manometer survey may
be required for horizontal
slabs to demonstrate
compliance
Inspection at
Owner’s discretion
(may occur after
concrete is in
place)
Owner Owner
F. Tolerances of finished concrete shall be:

ITEM TOLERANCE
Variation of Constructed Linear Outline from
Established Position in Plan
¼” maximum in 10’
½” maximum in 20’ or more
Variation from Level or from Grades Shown ¼” maximum in 10’ ½” maximum in 20’
¾” maximum over entire structure
Variation from Plumb ¼” maximum in 10’
½” maximum in 20’ or more
Variation in Thickness of Slabs and Walls Minus ¼”
Plus ½”
Variation in Locations and Sizes of Slabs and
Wall Openings
±¼”
Project Owner CONCRETE FORMING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 10 00 - 14

3.4 Adjusting and Cleaning
A. Remove forms taking care not to damage concrete. Contractor shall remedy damage from improper or premature form removal at their sole expense.

1. Do not use stay-in-place formwork. Remove all forms.

2. No heavy loading on green concrete will be permitted.

3. Do not disturb formwork until concrete has hardened, and in no case sooner than 24 hours after concrete placement.

4. Forms supporting non-load-bearing vertical members, including walls and columns shall remain in place at least 2 days.

5. Forms supporting roof slabs and above-ground beams or floor slabs shall remain in place for at least 14 days and until test cylinders for supported concrete show tested concrete has attained 90% of specified 28-day compressive strength, and meets the other requirements of ACI 301.

6. In addition, forms supporting roof slabs and above-ground beams or floor slabs shall remain in place and until test cylinders for slabs, panels, walls, columns, and supporting members adjacent to that item show tested concrete has attained 90% of specified 28- day compressive strength.

7. Forms for items of Work not mentioned herein shall remain in place for time periods determined by Owner’s Representative.

8. Do not apply construction, equipment or permanent loads on columns, supported slabs or supported beams until all concrete in load path to foundation has attained 28-day design compressive strength.

9. Time to reach 90% of specified 28-day compressive strength shall be established by Owner’s Representative based on test cylinders taken for this purpose.

10. Provide advance notice to Owner’s Representative of Contractor’s intent to remove forms.

11. After Owner’s Representative accepts forms for removal, promptly remove them, taking care to prevent concrete damage.

12. Defective concrete revealed by form removal, or concrete damaged during form removal shall be immediately repaired while concrete is still green.

13. Refer to Section 03 30 00 for concrete repair procedures.

14. Immediately after removing forms, wet concrete surfaces and keep surface moist until curing procedures begin.

15. Refer to Section 03 39 00 for concrete curing requirements.

B. Form tie removal shall proceed as follows:

1. No form-tying device or part thereof other than metal shall be left embedded in concrete.

2. Do not remove ties in such manner as to leave hole extending through interior of concrete members.

3. Where metal rods extend through concrete to support or strengthen forms, rods shall remain embedded and shall terminate at least 1” back from formed face or faces of concrete,

4. Where taper ties are removed, ream holes left by removal of form tie cones with suitably toothed reamers. Finished surface of holes shall be clean and roughened for bond before being filled with mortar.

Project Owner CONCRETE FORMING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 10 00 - 15

5. A precast neoprene or polyurethane tapered plug shall be placed at wall centerline. Hole shall then be completely filled with non-shrink or regular cement grout for above grade walls that are dry on both sides.

6. Exposed faces of walls and ceilings, and floors shall have outer 2” of exposed face filled with cement grout matching color and texture of surrounding wall surface.

C. Forms may be reused only if in good condition and if acceptable to Owner’s Representative.

1. Lightly sand form faces between uses to obtain uniform surface texture on exposed concrete surfaces.

2. Plug or fill residual tie rod holes with metal caps or other methods accepted by Owner’s Representative.

3. Thoroughly clean form before reuse.

END OF SECTION

Project Owner CONCRETE FORMING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 10 00 - 16

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Project Owner CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 15 00 - 1
SECTION 03 15 00

CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of water-stops and construction joints for concrete and masonry work.

B. Refer to Section 05 50 00 for cast-in-concrete and retrofitted anchor bolts.

C. Refer to Section 33 05 37 for concrete accessories around pipe penetrations.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 66 00: Product Storage and Handling Requirements E. Section 01 74 00: Cleaning and Waste Management
F. Section 02 05 00: Basic Civil Engineering Requirements G. Section 03 10 00: Concrete Forming
H. Section 03 20 00: Concrete Reinforcing
I. Section 03 30 00: Cast-in-Place Concrete
J. Section 05 50 00: Metal Fabrications
K. Section 33 05 37: Wall Pipes, Seep Rings and Penetrations

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install concrete accessories where shown, including water-stop and construction joint materials.

1.4 Quality Assurance
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen trained and experienced in necessary trades and crafts and completely familiar with specified requirements and methods for proper performance of Work of this section.

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. ACI 301 Structural Concrete for Buildings Chapter 8.

2. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete

3. California Building Code (CBC)

4. US Army Corps of Engineers CRD-C572 Polyvinyl-chloride Water-stop

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals:

Project Owner CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 15 00 - 2

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Product
Data
Submit for water stops and other accessories per Product Data requirements.

Installation
Instructions
Submit for accessories per Installation Instructions requirements.

Show methods and equipment proposed for joint cleanup and waste disposal.

Certificate of
Compliance
At least 48 hours before placing concrete, submit certification from each trade having embedded items in concrete to be placed stating embedded items for each trade are properly located, placed and braced.

Warranty Furnish one-year warranty from date of final acceptance B. In addition to requirements of ACI, refer to Section 02 05 00 for definition of requirements for Product Data, Installation Instructions, and Certificates of Compliance.

1.7 Delivery, Storage and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 / 01 66 00 for delivery storage and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instruction and warranty requirements for delivery, storage and handling of concrete accessories.

C. Storage of materials shall conform to requirements of ACI 301.

D. Store materials to prevent damage by moisture or breakage.

E. Do not use aluminum embedments in concrete.

1.8 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for concrete accessories.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Plastic CrackControl Strips BoMetals, Inc. Carrolton, GA (770) 832-2000 Accepted equal
Pre-Formed
Polyethylene
Joint Filler
Sonneborn / BASF “Sonofoam” Shakopee, MN (800) 433-9517 W R Meadows Sealtight® Poly-Grip® Hampshire, IL (800) 342-5976 Accepted equal
Pre-Formed
Urethane
Foam Joint
Filler
Backer Rod Mfg. Inc. “Denver
Foam®”
Denver, CO (800) 595-2950
Accepted equal
CETCO Water-stop-RX® Hoffman Estates, IL (800) 527-
9948
Project Owner CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 15 00 - 3

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Hydrophilic
(Swelling)
Water-Stops
Sika Greenstreak Swellstop Lyndhurst, NJ (800) 325-9504 Sika Hydrotite Lyndhurst, NJ (800) 325-9504
Accepted equal
Hydrophilic
Water-Stop
Primer
Adhesive
Use same Manufacturer as for
Hydrophilic Water-stops
PVC WaterStops BoMetals, Inc. Carrolton, GA (770) 832-2000 Sika Greenstreak Lyndhurst, NJ (800) 325-9504
Vinylex Corp. Knoxville, TN (800) 845-1417
W R Meadows Sealtight® Hampshire, IL (800) 342-5976
Accepted equal

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Materials for concrete accessories shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
PVC Waterstops Virgin Poly-VinylChloride Compound Ribbed, uniform in dimensions, dense, homogeneous, free from porosity conforming to
the following:

Tensile Strength (ASTM D412) 2,000 psi
Ultimate Elongation (ASTM D412) 350%
Shore Hardness (ASTM D2240) 75 ± 5
Specific Gravity (ASTM D792) 1.3
Stiffness in Flexure (ASTM D747) 600 psi
Cold Brittleness (ASTM D746 -35°F
Water Adsorption – 48 hours
(ASTM D570)

0.320%
max
Tear resistance ASTM D624) 290 lb/in
Pre-Molded
Joint Filler,
SubCaulking, or
Backing
Rod for
SelfLeveling
Sealants
Extruded, Closed-Cell,
Polyethylene Foam
Refer to Section 07 92 00.

Preformed Expansion
Joint Filler for Concrete
(Bituminous)
Refer to Section 07 92 00.

Non-Extruding and
Resilient Filler
(Bituminous)
Refer to Section 07 92 00.

Pre-Molded
Joint Filler –
Non-Water
Neoprene Sponge or
Polyurethane
Refer to Section 07 92 00.

Project Owner CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 15 00 - 4

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Holding
Structures
Joint
Sealant
Primer Conform to sealant Manufacturer’s
recommendations.

Plane Horizontal Joints
Self-Leveling 2-
Component
Polyurethane
Refer to Section 07 92 00
Joint Sealant - Water-stop
Conform to ASTM C920 Class 25 Grade P
Vertical and Overhead
Surfaces
Non-Sag 2-Component
Polyurethane
Refer to Section 07 92 00
Joint Sealant - Water-stop
Conform to ASTM C920 Class 25 Grade NS
C. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Plastic CrackControl Strips
(Zip Strips)
Virgin PolyVinyl-Chloride
Compound
2-part assembly designed to permit removal of top
portion after concrete has hardened, creating clean,
neatly defined joint groove for application of caulk or sealant as specified.

Provide 1", 1½” and 2" strips as applicable.

Water-stops Butt Splices Provide Teflon-coated thermostatically controlled water-stop splicing irons for field butt splices.

Corners,
Intersections,
and Transitions
Provide shop-made corner fittings.

Do not splice corners in field.

Hydrophilic
Water-stops
Water-stops Swellable strip-applied
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to install concrete accessories before submitting shop drawings or ordering. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

B. Before placing concrete within forms, each trade having embedded items, including waterstops within forms and affected by pour shall certify items are properly located, placed and braced. Accuracy of placement of embedded items is Contractor’s responsibility.

C. Construction joints shown on Contract Documents and accepted shop drawings may be made as shown with provision of keys or other locking shapes to secure proper union with subsequent work.

3.2 Installation/Application
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install concrete accessories at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations
Project Owner CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 15 00 - 5

2. California Building Code Chapter 19 “Concrete”

3. Other applicable building code requirements

4. ACI 301 Structural Concrete for Buildings Chapter 8.

5. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete

6. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

E. Locate and prepare construction joints as follows:

1. Construction joint is defined as a planned joint where 2 placements of concrete meet, across which development and maintenance of bond and water tightness are required, and through which reinforcement that may be present is not interrupted.

2. Locate construction joints as shown on Plans or as accepted by Owner’s Representative.

3. Construction joints may be vertical or horizontal.

4. Unless otherwise accepted, initial construction joint cleaning shall be done at latest practicable time and as last operation before setting forms and installing embedded items.

5. Clean construction joints in concrete Work, removing loose or defective concrete, coatings, sand, curing compound, laitance, stains, and other foreign material that may reduce bond and water tightness of joint.

6. Clean concrete such that clean, sound mortar and some coarse aggregate are exposed.

7. Methods for cleaning concrete construction joint surfaces may include wet sandblasting, high-pressure water-blasting, or other methods that do not damage bond surface, cause excessive cutting of surface and undercutting of coarse aggregate particles, or poor uniformity of surface treatment as accepted by Owner’s Representative.

8. Perform high-pressure water-blasting with proper equipment that is operated at 6,000 psi or greater.

9. Green cutting, removal of unhardened concrete surfaces by water or air-water jet, will not be permitted.

10. Waste Disposal: Method used in disposing of waste water employed in cutting, washing and rinsing concrete surfaces shall ensure waste water does not stain, discolor, or affect exposed surfaces, or damage environment of project area. Disposal method shall be subject to Owner’s acceptance.

F. Install contraction joints containing plastic strip in slabs at locations shown on Plans or as accepted by Owner’s Representative.

1. Use metal straightedge (guillotine) of same size as plastic strip to cut slot in fresh concrete for insertion of plastic strip.

2. Install plastic strip flush with concrete surface.

3. Work concrete surfaces adjacent to inserted strip with float to close voids around strip and produce contact of concrete with strip.

4. When concrete has hardened, remove upper portion of plastic strip to create joint groove for sealant.

G. Install water-stops as follows:

1. Position water-stops so center of water-stop is centered on joint.

2. Properly butt-splice water-stops. Do not lap water-stops or use adhesives, or solvents.

Qualified splicers shall make heat-fuse-welded field butt splices, using Manufacturer- Project Owner CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 15 00 - 6
approved, Teflon-coated, thermostatically controlled, water-stop splicing irons at approximately 380°F. Make splices on portable bench provided on-site. Use miter guide and portable power saw to cut ends to be joined to ensure proper alignment and contact between joined surfaces.

3. Check joints for strength and pinholes after splicing.

4. Water-stop splices will be rejected if:
a. Tensile strength is less than 75% of parent section. b. Misalignment of center-bulb, ribs, and end bulbs exceeds 1/16” and misalignment reduces water-stop cross section more than 15%, except these requirements may be altered at Owner’s direction for connecting existing water-stop to new water-stop that is not identical in profile.
c. Bond failure at joint creates opening deeper than 1/16” or reduces material thickness at least 15%.
d. Porosity or pinholes are visible in weld.
e. Bubbles or inadequate bonding are observed.
f. Visible signs of splice separation are found when cooled splice is bent by hand at sharp angle.
g. Charred or burnt material is observed.

5. Where preformed expansion joint material is used in conjunction with water-stop, allow for equal water-stop embedment on each side in concrete.

6. Make adequate provision to support and protect water-stops throughout Work.

7. Replace or repair, water-stops punctured or damaged before final acceptance of Work.

8. Connect ends of radial water-stop in wall footing joints to circumferential water-stop in wall to wall footing joint and to circumferential water-stops in floor to wall-footing joints if they exist.

9. Secure water-stop in place in forms using split forms, hog rings at 12” on-center, end nails, or other accepted method to secure water-stop in correct position and alignment and facilitate placing and tying of water-stops to reinforcing steel forms or form ties.

10. Horizontal and vertical water-stops not accessible during pouring shall be tied off in 2 directions every 12” in such manner to prevent bending or displacement.

11. Seal bottom of each vertical water-stop to other cutoff systems.

12. Bend horizontal water-stops up during placing of concrete until concrete has been brought to level of water-stop. Then place additional concrete over water-stop after which concrete shall be thoroughly vibrated.

13. Install water-stops to form continuous watertight diaphragms in each joint or as shown on Plans.

14. Thoroughly work concrete near water-stops to maximize density and imperviousness of concrete.

15. Seal joints not requiring water-stop with mastic joint sealer.

16. Provide suitable guards to protect exposed projecting edges and ends of partially embedded water-stops from damage after concrete placement is complete.

17. Apply sealant materials in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations.

H. Install hydrophilic water-stops as follows:

Project Owner CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 15 00 - 7

1. Thoroughly work concrete near water-stops to maximize density and imperviousness of concrete.

2. Ensure water-stops are correctly positioned during installation.

3. Remove dust, oil, laitance, etc. from concrete surface prior to adhering water-stop.

Concrete surface shall be smooth, even and dry, and cured for at least 24 hours prior to applying water-stop.

4. Splice water-stop by butting ends of water-stop together to ensure no separation and no air pockets. Do not overlap ends of water-stop. Construct 90° corners, crosses, and tees in similar manner. Water-stop may be bent around corners eliminating 90° splices. Place in maximum practical lengths to minimize splicing.

5. Brush-apply one coat of water-stop primer adhesive 2” wide continuously along joint.

6. Allow primer adhesive to dry for 2 hours prior to application of water-stop. Press waterstop firmly and continuously in place over primed area.

7. Make adequate provision to support and completely protect water-stops during progress of Work.

8. Mechanically fasten water-stop to concrete using concrete nails, in addition to using primer adhesive, at 12” on center.

9. Install water-stops to form continuous watertight diaphragms in each joint or as shown on Plans.

10. Replace or repair, at no expense to Owner, water-stops displaced or damaged before final acceptance of Work.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Field testing of concrete accessories shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST
PAID
FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
WaterBearing
Concrete
Structures
Water-stop
and Joint
Effectiveness
Refer to Section 03
08 50
As directed Owner Owner
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate
compliance to
Contract Documents
and Manufacturer’s
printed literature
1 test Owner Contractor

END OF SECTION
Project Owner CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 15 00 - 8

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Project Owner CONCRETE REINFORCING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 20 00 - 1
SECTION 03 20 00

CONCRETE REINFORCING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of steel reinforcement in concrete and masonry, including reinforcing bar, couplers, concrete inserts, wires, clips, supports, chairs, spacers, epoxy embedment, and other embedded accessories.

B. Conform to Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §201-2.2, §302, and §303, applicable permits, and requirements herein.

C. Refer to Section 03 60 00 for requirements for non-shrink grout.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 66 00: Product Storage and Handling Requirements E. Section 02 05 00: Basic Civil Engineering Requirements F. Section 03 10 00: Concrete Forming
G. Section 03 30 00: Cast-in-Place Concrete
H. Section 03 60 00: Grouting
I. Section 09 90 00: Painting and Coating

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install steel reinforcement including appurtenant structural, mechanical and/or electrical mountings or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and compliance with applicable building codes and standards.

1.4 Quality Assurance
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen trained and experienced in necessary trades and crafts and completely familiar with specified requirements and methods for proper performance of Work of this section.

B. Factory testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Steel
Reinforcement
Material
Properties
ASTM A615
ASTM A706
As required by
Owner
Owner Contractor
Steel
Reinforcement
Welding
Compliance
with AWS
D1.4
AWS D1.4 As required by
Owner
Owner Contractor

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

Project Owner CONCRETE REINFORCING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 20 00 - 2

1. ACI 117 Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction Materials

2. ACI 315 Details and Detailing of Structural Reinforcement

3. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete

4. ASTM A497 Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed, for Concrete

5. ASTM A615 Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

6. ASTM A706 Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

7. ASTM A1064 Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete

8. AWS D1.4 Structural Welding Code – Reinforcing Steel

9. California Building Code (CBC)

10. CRSI MSP1 Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Manual of Standard Practice

11. SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §201-2 “Reinforcement for Concrete”

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
CBC Chapter 17
Special Inspection
Required Contractor
Statement of
Responsibility
Submit as required in CBC §1706
Working Drawings
Concrete Reinforcing
Submit per Working Drawing requirements.

Show bending diagrams, assembly diagrams, placing lists and drawings of reinforcing steel required per structural Shop Drawing requirements. Conform to ACI 315.

Show actual bar lengths to nearest inch measured to intersection of tangent extensions of outside bar surface.

Bar placement diagrams shall clearly show dimensions of each bar splice or lap.

Show location of any coupler used with details of how they are installed in formwork.

Show locations of construction and expansion joints.

Show locations of all embedded items including anchor bolts, wall sleeves, conduit and piping which may conflict with steel reinforcing
After shop drawing acceptance, submit weight sheets, indicating pounds of reinforcing steel detailed and furnished with each bar cross-referenced to Working Drawings for payment purposes Installation
Instructions
Submit written welding procedure for each type of rebar weld for each size of bar intended to be spliced by welding. (A mere statement that AWS procedures will be followed is unacceptable.) Project Owner CONCRETE REINFORCING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 20 00 - 3

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Test Record
Transcripts
For each load of steel reinforcement delivered, submit
Manufacturer’s certified mill test report of chemical and physical properties of each melt of steel as needed to verify steel materials.

Also, submit information needed to determine carbon equivalent of any steel to be welded in accordance with AWS D1.4 and per test record transcript requirements.

Welder Qualification
Certificates
Submit as specified in AWS D1.4 for welders performing welding of steel reinforcement.

Also submit certifications of procedure qualifications for each welding procedure used.

B. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for definition of requirements for Working Drawings, Product Data, Installation Instructions, Test Record Transcripts, and Material Samples.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 / 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow CRSI recommendations included in Manual of Standard Practice for delivery, storage and handling of steel reinforcement.

C. Bundle reinforcement and tag with suitable identification of quantity, grade, and size to facilitate sorting, placing and transport.

D. Tagging and identification requirements shall be identical for both shop- and field-fabricated reinforcing steel.

E. Bars with kinks or bends not shown on shop drawings shall be removed from site.

F. Bars with rust, scale, oil or any other coating that would reduce or destroy bond between concrete and steel shall be removed from site.

G. Store reinforcement on blocks above ground to allow drainage below.

1.8 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for concrete reinforcing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Dowel System
(alternate to slip
dowels)
Sika - Greenstreak “Speed Dowel” Lyndhurst, NJ (800) 325-9504 Accepted equal
Rebar Supports Dayton Superior Miamisburg, OH (888) 977-9600 Accepted equal

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

Project Owner CONCRETE REINFORCING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 20 00 - 4
B. Refer to Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §201-2.2 for materials requirements for steel reinforcing for concrete.

C. Furnish full-length reinforcement bars to extant practicable. Splices shall be made as shown on Plans and accepted by Owner’s Representative.

D. Materials for steel reinforcement shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Steel Bar Reinforcement Steel Conform to ASTM A615 Grade 60 Billet Steel Deformed Bars
Steel Bar Reinforcement -
Welded
Low Alloy
Steel
Conform to ASTM A706 Grade 60
Deformed Bars
Steel Wire Reinforcement
- Deformed
Steel Conform to ASTM A497
Tie Wire Black
Annealed Steel
14 gauge minimum
E. Materials for bar supports, chairs or dobies shall conform to CRSI Manual of Standard Practice 1 Chapter 3 and shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Concrete Blocks
(Dobies)
(Do not use in slabs or
walls less than 6” thick,
or where architectural
finish is to be applied.)
Concrete Minimum 28-day compressive strength f’c
equal to that of concrete but not less than
4000 psi.

Embed wire ties in concrete block bar
supports.

Plastic Bar Supports
(Do not use on grade)
Plastic CRSI Class 1 gray
F. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Welded
Splices
Provide where shown on accepted shop drawings.

Splices shall develop 125% of yield strength of reinforcement being spliced.

Provide materials required to meet AWS D1.4.

Bending and
Forming Bars
Conform to ACI 315, ACI 318. And CRSI MSP Manual of Standard Practice
Fabricate to tolerances shown in ACI 117.

Project Owner CONCRETE REINFORCING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 20 00 - 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to install steel reinforcement before submitting shop drawings or ordering. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

B. Remove loose rust, mill scale, soil and other foreign materials which might adversely affect bond with concrete.

C. Protect reinforcement from moisture until concrete is placed around it.

D. Coat ends of bars left projecting from concrete for more than one week with heavy coat of neat-cement grout.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish, accurately position and install steel reinforcement at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

2. California Building Code Chapter 19 “Concrete” §1907 “Modifications to Reinforcement” and §1908 “Modifications to ACI 318”

3. Other applicable building code requirements

4. ACI 315 Details and Detailing of Structural Reinforcement

5. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete

6. Manufacturer’s installation instructions and warranty requirements D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

E. Minimum cover for non-pre-stressed steel reinforcement per ACI 318 and as indicated on the drawings.

F. Minimum spacing between parallel bars shall be as indicated on the drawings.

G. Installation of steel reinforcement bars shall proceed as follows:

1. Install steel reinforcement to tolerances shown in ACI 117 and ACI 318 §7.5.

2. Do not straighten or re-bend reinforcing steel in manner that might damage material. Do not use bars with bends not shown on Plans. Bends shall be cold-bent. Do not use heat.

3. Reinforcing shall be supported and wired together at sufficient intervals to prevent displacement during concrete placement and vibration.

4. Use annealed iron wire ties or clips at intersections. Use concrete, plastic or metal supports, spacers or metal hangers.

5. Where concrete is placed against earth, use supporting concrete dobies in sufficient numbers to support bars without settlement, but in no case shall support be continuous.

Tie reinforcing steel to dobies with wire ties embedded in blocks.

6. Where concrete is placed over formwork, furnish concrete, metal, plastic or other acceptable bar chairs and spacers.

7. Bar support methods shall leave no marks or impressions on finished concrete surfaces exposed to view.

Project Owner CONCRETE REINFORCING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 20 00 - 6

8. Tie bar reinforcement at all intersections except where bar spacing is less than 12” in each direction, in which case alternate intersections shall be tied.

9. No tie wire shall remain within 1½” of concrete surface. Bend tie wires away from forms to provide specified concrete cover.

10. Accessories used to support reinforcing bars shall be placed and spaced such that deflections of supports due to weight of supported bars remains within tolerances specified by ACI 117 and ACI 318.

11. Where additional bars are provided by Contractor for any reason, they shall be provided at no additional cost to Owner unless Owner’s preapproval is evidenced by written change order issued prior to placing steel reinforcement.

12. Bars may be moved as necessary to avoid conflicts with other reinforcement steel, conduits or embedded items.

13. Provide at least 1” clear distance between steel reinforcement and anchor bolts or other embedments.

14. If bars are moved by more than one bar diameter or enough to exceed specified tolerances, secure acceptance from Owner’s Representative before placing concrete.

15. Provide additional reinforcing bars around sleeves and openings as shown on Drawings.

H. Splices shall be made as follows:

1. Splicing shall conform to requirements of ACI 318 and applicable building codes unless noted otherwise on drawings.

2. Limit splicing to locations shown on accepted bending lists and Working Drawings.

3. Minimum lap length for non-pre-stressed steel reinforcement shall conform to ACI 318 and shall conform to the drawings.

4. For bars of different sizes, lap length shall equal or exceed lap lengths specified for smaller bar size, and shall equal or exceed specified embedment lengths for the larger bar size.

5. Splicing shall be accomplished by placing bars in contact with each other and wiring them together.

6. Do not splice vertical bars in concrete, except as detailed on Plans or Shop Drawings or as directed by Owner’s Representative .

7. Do not splice horizontal bars in concrete, except as detailed on Plans or Shop Drawings or as directed by Owner’s Representative.

8. Do not use mechanical couplers.

9. Do not weld reinforcing bars, except as detailed on Plans or Working Drawings. Welding, when permitted by Owner’s Representative, shall conform to AWS 1.4 and shall be fullpenetration butt-groove weld. Welds shall use reinforcing bars conforming to ASTM A706.

I. Drilling and dowelling of rebar into hardened concrete shall proceed in accordance with the Manufacturer’s specifications.

1. Field locate reinforcement in existing concrete before drilling using pachometer or other accepted locator device. Adjust location of drilled holes to avoid drilling through or nicking existing reinforcing.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Notify Owner’s Representative when installation of steel reinforcement is complete and at least 24 hours prior to placing concrete.

Project Owner CONCRETE REINFORCING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 20 00 - 7
B. Where formwork will make reinforcement inaccessible for inspection, provide at least 24 hours’ notice to Owner’s Representative to allow them to inspect reinforcement installation before formwork is erected.

C. Allow Owner’s Representative to inspect and accept reinforcement installation before placement of concrete.

D. Tolerances on reinforcement shall conform to ACI 117.

E. Special inspection and field testing required by Chapter 17 of CBC (Table 1705.3) shall be completed by ICC-certified special inspector selected by Owner and shall be as indicated on the drawings.

END OF SECTION
Project Owner CONCRETE REINFORCING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 20 00 - 8

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Project Owner CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 30 00 - 1
SECTION 03 30 00

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of concrete for buried and above-ground cast-in-place structures, culverts, catch basins, retaining walls, footings, foundations, flatwork, and paving.

B. Conform to Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §203, §302, and §303, applicable permits, and requirements herein.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 66 00: Product Storage and Handling Requirements E. Section 01 74 00: Cleaning and Waste Management
F. Section 02 05 00: Basic Civil Engineering Requirements G. Section 03 10 00: Concrete Forming
H. Section 03 15 00: Concrete Accessories
I. Section 03 20 00: Concrete Reinforcing
J. Section 03 35 00: Concrete Finishing
K. Section 03 39 00: Concrete Curing
L. Section 03 60 00: Grout
M. Section 05 12 00: Structural Steel Framing
N. Section 09 90 00: Painting and Coating
O. Section 31 23 00: Excavation and Fill

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install complete concrete structural system including appurtenant structural, mechanical and/or electrical mountings, embedments, or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements of other trades and compliance with applicable building codes and standards.

1.4 Quality Assurance
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen trained and experienced in necessary trades and crafts and completely familiar with specified requirements and methods for proper performance of Work of this section.

B. Proportion mixes either by laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using specified materials acceptable for each type of concrete required, and conforming to ACI 211.1.

C. Factory (batch plant) testing of aggregate shall include:

Project Owner CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 30 00 - 2

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY

FIRST TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Aggregate Ratio of Silica
Released to
Reduction in
Alkalinity
ASTM C33 As directed Owner Contractor
Loss with
Sodium Sulfate
ASTM C33 As directed Owner Contractor
Sieve Analysis ASTM C136 1 each trial batch Owner Contractor Coarse
Aggregate
Abrasion Loss ASTM C33 As directed Owner Contractor
Fine
Aggregate
Sand
Equivalent
ASTM D2419 As directed Owner Contractor
Organic
Impurities
ASTM C40 As directed Owner Contractor
Color of
Supernatant on
Washing
ASTM C33 As directed Owner Contractor
D. Plant testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY

FIRST TEST

PAID FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR BY
Concrete Certification
of Mix
Design
ACI 301 certified by
independent testing
laboratory
1 test each
mix
Contractor Contractor
Ready-Mix
Concrete
Materials
Materials
Inspection
Refer to Paragraph

2.2 below
As directed Owner Owner

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. ACI 117 Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction Materials

2. ACI 121 Quality Management System for Concrete Construction

3. ACI 211.1 Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete

4. ACI 211.5R Submittal of Concrete Proportions

5. ACI 214 Evaluation of Strength Test Results for Concrete

6. ACI 301 Structural Concrete for Buildings
Project Owner CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 30 00 - 3

7. ACI 304 Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete

8. ACI 305R Hot Weather Concreting

9. ACI 306R Cold Weather Concreting

10. ACI 309R Consolidation of Concrete

11. ACI 315 Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement

12. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete

13. ACI SP2 Manual of Concrete Inspection

14. ASTM C31 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in Field

15. ASTM C33 Concrete Aggregates

16. ASTM C39 Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens

17. ASTM C40 Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete

18. ASTM C42 Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete

19. ASTM C78 Flexural Strength of Concrete Using Simple Beam with Third Point Loading

20. ASTM C88 Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate

21. ASTM C94 Ready-Mixed Concrete

22. ASTM C117 Materials Finer than 75-μm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing

23. ASTM C127 Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate

24. ASTM C128 Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and Absorption of Fine Aggregate.

25. ASTM C136 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates

26. ASTM C138 Unit Weight, Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete

27. ASTM C150 Portland Cement

28. ASTM C172 Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete

29. ASTM C173 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by Volumetric Method

30. ASTM C192 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in Laboratory

31. ASTM C231 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by Pressure Method

32. ASTM C289 Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Aggregates (Chemical Method)

33. ASTM C470 Molds for Forming Concrete Test Cylinders Vertically

34. ASTM C494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete

35. ASTM C566 Total Evaporable Moisture Content of Aggregate by Drying

36. ASTM C881 Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete

37. ASTM C1077 Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation

38. ASTM D75 Sampling Aggregates

39. ASTM D98 Calcium Chloride

40. ASTM D1751 Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types) Project Owner CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 30 00 - 4

41. ASTM D2419 Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate

42. ASTM D4791 Flat Particles, Elongated Particles, or Flat and Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate

43. California Building Code (CBC)

44. California Green Building Standards Code (CALGreen Code)

45. CPMB 100 Concrete Plant Manufacturer’s Bureau Plant Standards

46. CRD C143 Meters for Automatic Indication of Moisture in Fine Aggregate

47. CRD C521 Frequency and Amplitude of Vibrators for Concrete

48. National Ready-Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA) Quality Control Manual §3 Certification of Ready-Mixed Concrete Production Facilities - Plant Certification Check List

49. SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §201 “Concrete, Mortar, and Related Materials”

50. SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §303 “Concrete and Masonry Construction.”

51. Standards for Operation of Truck Mixers and Agitators of the National Ready-Mixed Concrete Association

52. Truck Mixer and Agitator Standards of Truck Mixer Manufacturer’s Bureau

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals in accordance with ACI 301 and the California Building Code.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
CBC Chapter 17
Special Inspection
Required Contractor
Statement of
Responsibility
As required in CBC §1704
Concrete Operations
QA/QC Plan
On Owner’s request, submit QA/QC plan for concrete
operations, including:

1. Contractor’s Quality Assurance / Quality Control plan.

2. Concrete testing laboratory’s testing and Quality Control manual describing sampling techniques, curing methods,
and testing equipment use and calibration.

3. Sources of cement and aggregates.

4. Sources of electrical power and water.

5. Location of aggregate stockpiles, batching plant, and mixing plant.

6. Method and route for conveying batched concrete under expected weather conditions.

7. Method of conveying concrete within Work site.

8. Contingency plans to replace equipment in event of
breakdown.

Project Owner CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 30 00 - 5

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION

9. Methods to protect aggregate stockpiles from excessive moisture, freezing, or other contamination.

10. Methods to protect fresh concrete from freezing or
environmental damage during conveyance, placement,
and curing.

11. Methods to protect fresh and hardened concrete during hot weather conforming to ACI305R

12. Methods to protect fresh and hardened concrete during cold weather conforming to ACI306R

13. Method and equipment used for consolidation

14. Method and equipment used for finishing, and curing

15. Contractor concrete quality control plan specific to concrete operations and conforming to ACI 121. Quality
control plan shall include procedures to identify,
investigate, and correct low compressive strength test
results. QC measures shall include investigation of
ongoing concrete operations, review of concrete
materials, batching and mixing operations, and additional concrete compressive strength testing. QA/QC Plan for
investigation of low concrete strength shall supplement and conform to procedures within ACI 301.

Shop Drawings Submit per structural Shop Drawing requirements. In addition to requirements listed under steel reinforcement, show
construction joints and placement schedule.

Product Data Submit for admixtures per Product Data requirements.

Installation Instructions Submit for admixtures per Installation Instruction requirements.

Certificates of
Compliance
(Submit 45 days prior
to start of structural
concrete Work.)
Submit plant certification in accordance with NRMCA Quality Control Manual §3.

Independent laboratory meeting requirements of ASTM C1077 shall submit certification conforming to ACI 211.5R
demonstrating mix designs conform to specifications based on tests using materials from sources used in Work.

Submit mill test certification, including fineness for each shipment of cement per ACI 301.

Submit cement certification per ASTM C150
Submit aggregate gradation and certification per ACI 301.

Submit admixture certification including chloride ion content per ACI 301.

Project Owner CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 30 00 - 6

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Engineering
Calculations (Mix
Design)
Submit for concrete mix design per engineering calculations requirements sealed by California-licensed Civil Engineer.

Mix design shall show:

1. Mix identification number

2. Applicable proportions, weights and quantities of Portland cement, aggregate, water, admixtures, sand, and
reclaimed concrete material

3. Size and source of concrete aggregates

4. Type and source of Portland cement

5. Brand and designation of chemical admixtures

6. Percent voids

7. Intended type of construction

8. Strength results
In addition to original mix design, provide new mix design if change in brand or type of cement or change in source or gradation of aggregates is permitted or if defective concrete occurs.

Brand and Type of
Cement/Source of
Aggregate
Submit brand and type of cement and source of aggregates to allow sampling and testing by Owner’s Representative.

Pre-Placement
Inspection Forms
At least 24 hours before placing concrete submit certification from each trade having embedded items in concrete to be placed. Use form similar to that in ACI SP2. Form shall certify that preparation of surfaces to receive concrete, formwork, clean-up, and placement of reinforcing steel, electrical conduit, piping or other embedded items has been completed. All work items shall be initialed and dated by each trade foreperson for each placement, stating embedded items for each trade are properly located, placed and braced and equipment pads are properly sized.

Delivery Tickets Submit for ready-mix concrete as needed to document delivery quantities. In accordance with ASTM C94 §16.1 and §16.2, each ticket shall show

1. Name of ready mix batch plant,

2. Name of Contractor

3. Serial number of ticket,

4. State certified equipment used in preparing mix,

5. Truck number.

6. Name of purchaser & name & location of job

7. Mix number,
Project Owner CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 30 00 - 7

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION

8. Concrete Class, alternate class or special exposure mix designation,

9. Quantities by weight of cement, sand, each class of
aggregate, admixtures and water added in batching plant, including water in fine aggregates. Submit computer
printout or compact disc showing information in
conformance with requirements of ASTM C94.

10. Type, brand, and silo bin or storage unit number of cement,

11. Type, brand, and amount of admixtures,

12. Source & identification of aggregates,

13. Amount of water allowed to be added at site for specified mix,

14. Total yield in cubic yards,

15. Date & time of day to nearest minute corresponding to time batch was dispatched, time batch left plant, time
batch arrived on site, time unloading began and time
unloading was completed.

16. Reading of revolution counter at first addition of water

17. Provide space on certificate so amount of water added at Work site may be indicated.

Certificates shall be from public weighmaster. Owner’s
Representative will not accept concrete in absence of
certificate.

Placement
Foreperson’s Report
Submit report listing the following:

1. Date and time of placement

2. Weather conditions

3. Ambient temperature

4. Work item

5. Volume of concrete placed

6. Method of placement

7. Concrete temperature

8. Concrete Class, alternate class or special exposure mix designation,
Test Results Submit laboratory test results for fresh or hardened concrete within one working day following test completion.

Verbally notify Owner’s Representative of failing test results and remedial action being taken.

Provide weekly written summary of testing and test results.

Warranty Furnish one-year warranty from date of final acceptance Project Owner CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 30 00 - 8
B. In addition to requirements of ACI, refer to Section 02 05 00 for definition of requirements for Shop Drawings, Product Data, Installation Instructions, Certificates of Compliance, Engineering Calculations, Test Record Transcripts, and Material Samples.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 / 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of concrete and concrete admixtures.

C. Handling shall not result in segregation, degradation, or combining of materials resulting in failure of materials to meet specifications.

D. Storage of materials shall conform to requirements of ACI 301 and SSPWC (Greenbook).

E. Immediately following delivery, store cement, and materials in separate dry, weather-tight, ventilated structures designed to protect against moisture and contamination. Properly mark structures to avoid accidental contamination.

F. Remove contaminated cement from site if rejected by Owner.

G. Store sacked cement in manner permitting access for inspection and sampling.

H. Use cement in sequence of receipt of shipments.

I. Maintain water-reducing admixtures in uniform solution protected from freezing.

J. Store fine aggregate on accepted base and maintain in manner to prevent inclusion of foreign materials. Do not operate equipment on storage piles. Deposit fine aggregate in storage and remove it in such a manner as to increase the uniformity of the grading as much as possible.

K. Coarse aggregate with maximum size greater than ¾” shall be prepared, stored, and handled in 2 or more size groups. When aggregates are proportioned for each batch of concrete, the 2 size groups shall be combined.

L. Construct coarse aggregate storage piles on accepted base in manner to prevent contamination and to prevent segregation and excessive breakage. Use rock ladders of satisfactory design with conveying and handling systems for aggregate with particles larger than 1½” in size.

M. Do not use aluminum materials for handling concrete.

1.8 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for cast-in-place concrete.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Type A
Admixtures -
Water
Euco Euclid Chemical Co / Eucon WR Cleveland, OH (800) 321-7628 Euco Euclid Chemical Co / Eucon WR91 Cleveland, OH (800) 321-7628 Project Owner CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 30 00 - 9

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Reducing
Agents
(Normal
Range)
GCP (Grace Concrete Products) /
Applied Technologies, Inc “Daracem®”
Cambridge, MA (617) 876-
1400
GCP (Grace Concrete Products) /
Applied Technologies, Inc “WRDA64”
Cambridge, MA (617) 876-
1400
Master Builders / BASF “Pozzolith
322-N”
Beachwood, OH (800) 228-
3318
Sika Corporation “Plastocrete 161” Lyndhurst, NJ (800) 933-7452 Accepted equal
Type B
Admixtures -
Set Retarding
Hydration
Stabilizing
Agents (Use
when air
temperature
exceeds
80°F)
GCP (Grace Concrete Products) /
Applied Technologies “Daratard”
Cambridge, MA (617) 876-
1400
Master Builders / BASF “Pozzolith 300R” Beachwood, OH (800) 228- 3318
Sika Corporation “Plastocrete” Lyndhurst, NJ (800) 933-7452 Accepted equal
Type D
Admixtures -
Water
Reducing and
Set Retarding
Hydration
Stabilizing
Agents (Use
for large
pours and
placement
areas where
extra time for
finishing is
needed)
GCP (Grace Concrete Products) /
Applied Technologies, Inc “WRDA64”
Cambridge, MA (617) 876-
1400
GCP (Grace Concrete Products) /
Applied Technologies, Inc “Recover”
Cambridge, MA (617) 876-
1400
Accepted equal
Type F or G
Admixtures -
High-Range
Water
Reducing
(High Range)
(HRWRA)
Plasticizers
Euco Euclid Chemical Co / Eucon 1037 Cleveland, OH (800) 321-7628 GCP (Grace Concrete Products) /
Applied Technologies “ADVA®”
Cambridge, MA (617) 876-
1400
Master Builders / BASF “Rheobuild 716
or Rheobuild 1000”
Beachwood, OH (800) 228-
3318
Sika Corporation “Sikament FF or
Sikament 86”
Lyndhurst, NJ (800) 933-7452
Accepted equal
Project Owner CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 30 00 - 10

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Concrete
FormRelease
Agents
GCP (Grace Concrete Products) /
Applied Technologies “Pieri®”
Cambridge, MA (617) 876-
1400
W R Meadows Sealtight Duogard® Hampshire, IL (800) 342-5976 Accepted equal
Bonding
Agent
(Hardened
Concrete to
Fresh
Concrete)
Burke / Edoco “BurkEpoxy MV” Long Beach, CA (310) 834-
3401
Concresive® LPL / BASF Shakopee, MN (800) 433-9517
GCP (Grace Concrete Products) /
Applied Technologies “Epoxtile 2391”
Cambridge, MA (617) 876-
1400
Euco Euclid Chemical Co / RPM Epoxy
452
Cleveland, OH (800) 321-7628
Pecora Corporation “Dynapoxy EP420” Harleysville, PA (215) 723- 6051
Sika Corporation “Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod” or
“Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod (LPL)” Epoxy
Adhesive
Lyndhurst, NJ (800) 933-7452
W R Meadows Sealtight Poly-Grip® Hampshire, IL (800) 342-5976 Accepted equal
B. Use only one brand of cement.

C. Admixtures shall be compatible and furnished by one Manufacturer capable of providing qualified field service representation.

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Refer to Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §201 for materials requirements for cast-in-place concrete.

C. Cement shall be clean and free from contaminants. Do not use cement reclaimed from cleaning bags or leaking containers. Do not use lumpy cement.

D. Materials for concrete structural systems shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Cement Standard Brand
Portland Cement
Conform to ASTM C150
Type II/V Modified Low Alkali/Sulfate Resisting
Also conform to ASTM C150 Table 2 optional
requirements for false set and equivalent alkalis
(Na2O+0.658K2O of ≤0.60%)
Project Owner CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 30 00 - 11

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Temperature of cement entering mixer shall be
≤160°F
Gradation ≥ 85% of cement by weight shall pass #325 screen.

Source Cement shall be from single source
Water Fresh, Clean, Clear
Potable Water
Conform to ASTM C1602.

Water shall not contain impurities causing change in
time in setting of Portland cement >25% nor
reduction of f’c>10% compared with results
obtained using distilled water
Coarse
Aggregate
Specification Conform to ASTM C33
Class Designation 4M unless otherwise specified
Nonreactive, clean, hard, durable, washed,
uncoated material
Gravel, crushed gravel, crushed rock or
combination
From pits acceptable to Owner’s Representative
Aggregate shall be of character to facilitate
producing workable concrete mixture within limits of
specified water content and slump.

Amount passing #200
Sieve per ASTM C117
≤ 0.5%
Cleanness Value ≥75
Percentage Wear
per ASTM C131
Abrasion loss < 10.5% after 100 revolutions
Abrasion loss < 42% after 500 revolutions
Specific Gravity per
ASTM C127
≥2.60
% Elongated Particles
per ASTM D4791
≤20% based on 3:1 dimensional ratio
Ratio of Silica
Released to
Reduction in Alkalinity
≤1.0
Reactivity Nonreactive when tested per ASTM C289 and
evaluated per ASTM C33 Appendix X1
Source Coarse aggregate shall be from single source for each size range
Project Owner CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 30 00 - 12

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Fine
Aggregate
Specification Conform to ASTM C33 requirements
Nonreactive, clean, hard, durable, washed material
From pits acceptable to Owner’s Representative
Aggregate shall be of character to facilitate
producing workable concrete mixture within limits of
specified water content and slump.

Fineness Modulus 2.75±0.20 per ASTM C136
Organic Impurities
per ASTM C40
Satisfactory
Resultant color of testing solution shall not be
darker than ASTM C40 standard
Free Moisture Content ≤8% at time of batching
Mortar Strength
Relative to Ottawa
Sand
≥100%
Sand Equivalent >75 average for 3 samples
>70 for any one sample
Percent Clay, Silt,
Loam per ASTM C117
<12% passing #200 sieve
Soundness <10%
Ratio of Silica
Released to
Reduction in Alkalinity
<1.0
Specific Gravity ≥2.60 bulk saturated surface-dry basis per ASTM C128
Lightweight sand not permitted
Reactivity Nonreactive when tested per ASTM C289 and
evaluated per ASTM C33 Appendix X1
Source Fine aggregate shall be from single source
SurfaceApplied
Bonding
Agent
Surface-Applied
Bonding Compound
Conform to ASTM C932
Epoxy
Bonding
Agent
Epoxy Resin Conform to ASTM C881
Project Owner CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 30 00 - 13

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Ready-Mix
Concrete
Conform to ASTM C94
Curing
Materials
Refer to Section 03 39 00
E. Coarse aggregate gradations designated by ACI33 Aggregate Gradation Numbers shall conform to the following. (Refer to ACI 33).

PERCENTAGE PASSING SIEVES BY WEIGHT
SIEVE
SIZE
ASTM C33

GRADING
1 (3½”-1½”)
ASTM C33

GRADING
2 (2½”-1½”)
ASTM C33

GRADING
3 (2”-1”)
ASTM C33

GRADING
4 (1½”-¾”)
ASTM C33

GRADING
5 (1”- ½”)
ASTM C33

GRADING
6 (¾”-⅜”)
ASTM C33

GRADING
7 (½”-#4)
ASTM C33

GRADING
8 (⅜”-#8)
ASTM C33

GRADING
9 (#4-#16)
ASTM C33

GRADING
10 (#4-#100)
4” 100%
3½” 90-100%
3” 100%
2½” 25-60% 90-100% 100%
2” 35-70% 90-100% 100%
1½” 0-15% 0-15% 35-70% 90-100% 100%
1” 0-15% 20-55% 90-100% 100%
¾” 0-5% 0-5% 10-15% 20-55% 90-100% 100%
½” 0-5% 0-10% 20-55% 90-100% 100%
⅜” 0-5% 0-5% 0-15% 40-70% 85-100% 100% 100%
No. 4 0-5% 0-15% 10-30% 85-100% 85-100%
No. 8 0-5% 0-10% 10-40%
No. 16 0-5% 0-10%
No. 30
No. 50 0-5%
No 100 10-30%
No. 200
F. Owner’s Representative may direct water quantities be reduced if concrete slump exceeds working limit slump. Concrete consistency shall be uniform from batch to batch. Do not add water to compensate for stiffening of concrete if held too long before placement.

G. Materials for admixtures shall be:

Project Owner CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 30 00 - 14

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Admixtures General
Requirements
Admixtures shall be compatible with
ingredients in concrete mixture.

Dispense in liquid form in quantities within
±5% of specified quantities
Do not use admixtures to reduce cement
requirement
Do not use calcium chloride or other
chloride-based accelerators in concrete
having steel reinforcing or embedments.

Shall be free from thiocyanates
Chloride ion <0.05%
Type A Admixtures - Water
Reducing Agents (Normal
Range)
Conform to ASTM C494 Type A
Dosage shall be maximum recommended
by admixture Manufacturer based on weight
of cement.

Only one water-reducing admixture shall be
used
Type B Admixtures - Set
Retarding Hydration
Stabilizing Agents (Use
when air temperature
exceeds 80°F)
Conform to ASTM C494 Type B
Type C Admixtures - Set
Accelerating Agents (Use
when air temperature is
less than 40°F)
Conform to ASTM C494 Type C
Calcium
Chloride
Conform to ASTM D98
Use only for nonreinforced concrete
Type D Admixtures -
Water Reducing and Set
Retarding Hydration
Stabilizing Agents (Use for
large pours and placement
areas where extra time for
finishing is needed)
Conform to ASTM C494 Type D
Dosage shall be maximum recommended
by admixture Manufacturer based on weight
of cement.

Only one water-reducing admixture shall be
used
Type F or G Admixtures -
High-Range Water
Reducing (High Range)
(HRWRA) Plasticizers
Conform to ASTM C494 Type F or G
Only one water-reducing admixture shall be
used
Plasticizing Agents Conform to ASTM C1017
Type S Admixtures -
Specific Performance
(SPA)
Conform to ASTM C494 Type S
H. Use water reducing admixtures in concrete having f’c ≥4,000 psi.

I. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required:

Project Owner CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 30 00 - 15

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Class A “Structural”
Concrete
(Use for foundations,
footings, retaining
walls, slabs on grade,
walls, roof and floor
slabs, and other
structural concrete.)
f’c ≥5000 psi per ASTM C39 at 28 days
Portland Cement
Content
≥600 lb Portland cement per cubic yard
but ≤700 lb Portland cement per cubic yard
Maximum
Water/Cement
Ratio
≤0.45 by weight
Maximum
Aggregate Size
≤1”
Slump Working
Limit
≤4” average of all tests per ASTM C143
Slump Rejection
Limit
≤5½” on any test per ASTM C143
Air Content 1%-2% per ASTM C231
Water Reducing
Admixture
Required. Dosage shall be maximum
recommended by admixture Manufacturer
based on total weight of cementitious
material (cement)
Maximum Transit
Time
≤60 minutes (≤250 revolutions)
Class AP Pumped
“Structural” Concrete
(Use for foundations,
footings, retaining
walls, slabs on grade,
walls, roof and floor
slabs, and other
structural concrete
where concrete
pumping is accepted
by Owner’s
Representative.)
f’c ≥5000 psi per ASTM C39 at 28 days
Portland Cement
Content
≥600 lb Portland cement per cubic yard
but ≤700 lb Portland cement per cubic yard
Maximum
Water/Cement
Ratio
≤0.45 by weight
Maximum
Aggregate Size
≤1”
Slump Working
Limit
≤4” average of all tests per ASTM C143
Slump Rejection
Limit
≤5½” on any test per ASTM C143
Air Content 1%-2% per ASTM C231
Water Reducing
Admixture
Required. Dosage shall be maximum
recommended by admixture Manufacturer
based on total weight of cementitious
material (cement)
Maximum Transit
Time
≤60 minutes (≤250 revolutions)
Project Owner CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 30 00 - 16

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Class B3 “Site
Paving” Concrete
(Use for curbs,
gutters, sidewalks,
aprons, and nonvehicular paving.)
f’c ≥2500 psi per ASTM C39 at 28 days
Portland Cement
Content
≥520 lb Portland cement per cubic yard
but ≤700 lb Portland cement per cubic yard
Maximum
Water/Cement
Ratio
≤0.55 by weight
Maximum
Aggregate Size
≤2”
Slump Working
Limit
≤4” average of all tests per ASTM C143
Slump Rejection
Limit
≤5½” on any test per ASTM C143
Water Reducing
Admixture
Optional
Maximum Transit
Time
≤90 minutes
Class B4 “Site
Paving” Concrete
(Use for extruded
curbs and gutters.)
f’c ≥2500 psi per ASTM C39 at 28 days
Portland Cement
Content
≥520 lb Portland cement per cubic yard
but ≤700 lb Portland cement per cubic yard
Maximum
Water/Cement
Ratio
≤0.55 by weight
Maximum
Aggregate Size
≤¾”
Slump Working
Limit
≤2” average of all tests per ASTM C143
Slump Rejection
Limit
≤3½” on any test per ASTM C143
Water Reducing
Admixture
Optional
Maximum Transit
Time
≤90 minutes
Class C “Utility”
Concrete
(Use for encasement,
thrust blocks, and
fence and guardrail
posts.)
f’c ≥2500 psi per ASTM C39 at 28 days
Portland Cement
Content
≥500 lb Portland cement per cubic yard
but ≤700 lb Portland cement per cubic yard
Maximum
Water/Cement
Ratio
≤0.55 by weight
Maximum
Aggregate Size
≤1½”
Project Owner CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 30 00 - 17

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Slump Working
Limit
≤5” average of all tests per ASTM C143
Slump Rejection
Limit
≤6½” on any test per ASTM C143
Water Reducing
Admixture
Optional
Maximum Transit
Time
≤90 minutes
Class D “Slurry
Backfill” Concrete
(Use for trench
backfill.)
f’c ≥100 psi per ASTM C39 at 28 days
Portland Cement
Content
≥94 lb Portland cement per cubic yard
Maximum
Water/Cement
Ratio
≤0.60 by weight
Aggregate ≤¾”
Slump Working
Limit
≤5” average of all tests per ASTM C143
Slump Rejection
Limit
≤6½” on any test per ASTM C143
Water Reducing
Admixture
Optional
Maximum Transit
Time
≤120 minutes
J. With addition of high range water reducer, slump shall be 8” +/- 2”.

K. Materials furnished for Work shall conform to requirements of ACI 301 §201, §203, and §204 as applicable.

L. Where adverse conditions affect concrete placement, Owner’s Representative may authorize greater slump, provided cement is increased. Add water at ratio not to exceed 32% (by weight) of added cement per cubic yard. Additional water and cement shall be provided at Contractor’s expense.

M. Design concrete mix to meet properties and proportions specified. Design mix to minimize shrinkage, surface flaws, honeycombing and rock pockets around steel reinforcing. Limiting parameters specified are not intended to be a mix design. Additional cement or water reducing agent may be required to achieve workability demanded by Contractor’s methods and aggregates. Contractor is responsible for costs associated with furnishing concrete with required workability, density and strength.

2.3 Mixes
A. Proportioning conform to ACI 301 Chapter 3 “Proportioning”.

B. Water quantity shall be just sufficient to produce workable batches of concrete which can be worked into place without segregation or other flaws and compacted using vibratory methods to provide desired density, impermeability, and smoothness of surface. Adjust water quantity added if needed to adjust for variations in moisture content of aggregate while providing Project Owner CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 30 00 - 18
uniform consistency between batches. Determine consistency of batches by slump testing as described below.

C. Water feed control mechanism shall be capable of being locked in position to deliver constant flow of water to each batch of concrete.

D. Apply admixtures according to Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements.

Dispense admixtures in liquid form, ensuring quantity dispensed falls within 5% of specified quantity.

E. Set-controlling and water-reducing admixtures shall be applied as follows:

1. Use or addition of admixtures shall be at Contractor’s option to increase workability and shall result in no increase in cost to Owner.

2. Use or addition of admixtures shall be subject to acceptance by Owner’s Representative.

3. Concrete containing admixture shall be first placed at location determined by Owner’s Representative.

4. High range water reducing admixtures shall be added to concrete on site after all other ingredients have been mixed and initial slump has been verified. Do not use more than 14 ounces of water reducer per sack of cement. Water reducer shall be considered as part of mixing water when calculating water cement ratio.

5. If high-range water reducer is added to concrete on site, it may be used in conjunction with same water reducer added at batch plant. Concrete shall have slump of 3” ±½” before adding high range water reducing admixture at job site.

6. High-range water-reducing admixture shall be accurately measured and pressure injected into mixer as single dose by experienced technician. Standby system shall be provided and tested before each day’s operation of job site system.

7. Mix concrete at mixing speed for at least 30 mixer revolutions after adding high-range water reducer.

F. Retempering of partially hardened concrete will not be permitted.

G. Mixing shall conform to ACI 301 Chapter 7 “Mixing”.

H. Ready mixed concrete shall conform to ASTM C94.

I. Conveying equipment shall conform to the following:

1. Conveying equipment shall have sufficient capacity so concrete is kept plastic and free of cold joints while concrete is placed.

2. Convey concrete from mixer to forms as rapidly as practicable, using methods preventing segregation or loss of ingredients.

3. Provide telephone or other means of voice communication between mixing plant and concrete forms.

4. Concrete transferred from one conveying device to another shall be passed through a conically-shaped hopper and shall not be dropped vertically, in an unconfined condition, more than 5’, except where suitable equipment is provided to prevent segregation and where accepted by Owner’s Representative.

J. Transit mixing shall conform to ASTM C94.

K. Paving and stationary mixing shall proceed as follows:

1. Equip paving and stationary mixers with accurate automatic timing device designed and constructed to lock discharge lever. Regulation setting of this device shall be accepted by Owner’s Representative.

Project Owner CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 30 00 - 19

2. Provide water control equipment with each mixer.

3. Proportion aggregate, cement, and water for each concrete batch into mixer and mix for at least one minute (1½ minutes for reinforced concrete).

4. Mixer rotating speed shall conform to mixer manufacturer’s recommendation.

5. Total material volume in mixer shall not exceed water level capacity of mixer or mixer manufacturer’s specified capacity of mixer.

L. Chutes shall be used as follows:

1. When concrete can be placed directly from truck mixers, agitators, or non-agitating equipment, chutes attached to this equipment may be used.

2. A discharge deflector shall be used when required by Owner’s Representative.

3. Separate chutes and other similar equipment will not be permitted for conveying concrete except when accepted by Owner’s Representative.

M. Pump placement, when accepted by Owner’s Representative, shall proceed as follows:

1. Pumping equipment shall be piston or squeeze pressure type.

2. For redundancy, provide standby pump on-site or provide pumping equipment with 2 cylinders, designed to operate with one cylinder only.

3. Pipeline shall be rigid steel pipe or heavy-duty flexible hose.

4. Do not use aluminum conduits to convey concrete.

5. Pipe inside diameter shall conform to ACI 304 and be ≥ 3 times the nominal maximum size coarse aggregate in concrete mix being pumped but not less than 5”.

6. Maximum size coarse aggregate shall not be reduced to accommodate pumping.

7. Distance to be pumped shall not exceed limits recommended by pump manufacturer.

8. Test concrete samples for slump, air content and test cylinders at placement (discharge) end of line.

9. Supply concrete to concrete pump continuously.

10. When pumping is completed, eject concrete remaining in pipeline without contaminating concrete in place.

11. Replace pumping equipment or hoses that fail to function properly.

12. After each operation, thoroughly clean equipment.

13. Waste flushing water outside of forms and in compliance with environmental requirements.

14. Pumping of concrete will only be permitted if satisfactory end results are obtained.

N. Machine mixing is required except where it is obviously impractical, in which case Owner’s Representative may accept hand-mixing.

O. Compartments of trucks or other equipment used to transport dray aggregate and cement, or mixed concrete shall be constructed to prevent loss or leakage of contents during charging, transit, or discharging.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to install Concrete structural systems before submitting Shop Drawings or ordering. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

Project Owner CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 30 00 - 20
B. Schedule concrete placements so newly placed concrete will not be damaged by blasting or other operations.

C. Prepare earth foundations to receive concrete as follows:

1. Ensure earth foundations are clean, damp, and free from frost, ice, standing or running water, and loose particles or foreign matter.

2. Compact earth foundations in accordance with Section 31 23 00.

3. Maintain groundwater levels below subgrade until concrete has set.

4. Wet dry earth surfaces by sprinkling before placing concrete. At time of concrete placement, ground surface shall be moist, but free from standing water, mud and debris.

D. Prepare sand, gravel, or crushed rock foundations to receive concrete as follows:

1. Place geotextile filter above sand, gravel or crushed rock.

2. Place steel reinforcement and concrete as quickly as possible after placing geotextiles.

E. Before placing concrete, provide dewatering, runoff diversion, upstream debris containment systems and protection as needed to ensure proper and water-free environment suitable for concrete hardening and curing.

1. Do not place concrete if 15-day weather forecast indicates chance of rain.

2. Do not place concrete underwater or in spaces where standing water is present.

F. Concrete placement will not be permitted when, in Owner’s Representative’s opinion, jobsite conditions preclude proper placement, control, consolidation, and finishing.

G. Protect uncured concrete from exposure to rain, runoff or groundwater.

H. Cold joints in concrete shall be deemed to occur when concrete placement is interrupted for any reason so new concrete is neither incorporated integrally with previously placed concrete in opinion of Owner’s Representative nor keyed into place with preformed construction joints shown on Contract Documents or accepted Working Drawings. Prepare horizontal surfaces of cold joints as follows:

1. Roughen horizontal surface with minimum ¼” amplitude profile for good bond.

2. Clean tooled joint surface of laitance, loose or defective concrete, and foreign matter by hydroblasting or sandblasting to expose aggregate.

3. Wash hydro-blast or sandblast surface with clean water.

4. Remove ponded water from surface of construction joints.

5. Coat joint surface with epoxy-bonding agent unless otherwise shown.

I. Construction joints shown on Contract Documents and accepted Working Drawings may be made as shown using keys or other locking shapes to secure proper union with subsequent Work. Prepare concrete construction joints as specified in Section 03 15 00.

J. Notify Owner’s Representative in writing at least 24 hours before placing concrete. Do not place concrete except when Owner’s Representative or his duly authorized representative is present.

K. At least 4 hours before placing concrete, secure inspection of steel reinforcement and obtain acceptance by Owner’s Representative.

L. Before placing concrete, verify location of embedded items with affected trades.

1. Each trade having embedded items, including water stops within forms and affected by pour shall certify items are properly located, placed and braced.

2. Verify embedded items are firmly and securely fastened in place.

Project Owner CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 30 00 - 21

3. Embedded items shall be free of oil and other foreign matter such as loose coatings or rust, paint and scale.

4. Accuracy of placement of embedded items is Contractor’s responsibility.

5. Do not embed wood into concrete unless accepted in writing by Owner’s Representative.

6. Temporarily fill voids in sleeves, inserts, and anchor slots using removable materials to prevent concrete entry into voids.

M. Prior to placing concrete, provide written notice to Owner’s Representative and submit Preplacement checkout form similar to that in ACI SP2 described under “Submittals.” N. Equipment needed to place and consolidate concrete shall be at placement site and in good operating condition. Spare vibrators shall be available throughout concrete placement.

O. Do not use aluminum pipes, chutes, troughs, spouts or tremies for pumping, conveying or placing concrete.

P. Order of placement of concrete shall be acceptable to Owner’s Representative. To minimize shrinkage effects, place concrete in units bounded by construction joints shown in Working Drawings. Placement shall occur such that each unit shall cure at least 7 days for hydraulic structures and 3 days for other structures before contiguous units are placed, except corner sections of vertical walls shall not be placed until the 2 adjacent wall panels have cured at least 14 days for hydraulic structures and 7 days for other structures.

Q. Provide sufficient illumination in interior of forms so concrete at places of deposit is visible.

R. Do not place concrete when weather conditions prevent proper placement and consolidation.

S. Maintain temperature of concrete within the following ranges immediately before placement.

1. Concrete less than 12” thick: 55°F to 90°F

2. All other concrete: 50°F to 90°F

3. When concrete temperature exceeds 80°F, only set-retarding hydration stabilizing admixtures shall be used.

4. When concrete temperature exceeds 85°F, time between introducing cement to aggregates and discharge shall not exceed 45 minutes.

5. No additional compensation will be made to contractor for measures used to maintain concrete temperature within specified limits.

T. Schedule concrete placement during evening or morning hours, and provide ice, refrigerated mixing water, pre-cooled aggregate, shading, sprinkling and other means needed to conform to maximum temperature limits. If ice is used, store ice at temperatures low enough to prevent forming lumps by refreezing particles. Size of ice particles shall ensure ice completely melts before end of mixing time for each batch. Do not use liquid nitrogen cooling.

U. Cold weather placement shall proceed as follows:

1. Conform to ACI 306R.

2. Remove snow, ice and frost from surfaces, including reinforcement against which concrete is to be placed.

3. Before placing concrete, thaw subgrade to depth of at least 6”.

4. Before placing concrete, warm embedded items to above 32°F.

5. Do not heat concrete ingredients to temperatures higher than needed to keep concrete placement temperatures above specified minimums.

6. Use heating or insulation to maintain concrete at favorable temperatures.

V. Hot weather placement shall proceed as follows:

Project Owner CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 30 00 - 22

1. Comply with ACI 305R.

2. If evaporation rate surface moisture, determined by nomograph in ACI 305R, may be expected to exceed 0.2 pounds per square feet per hour such as to cause plastic shrinkage cracking, provide windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, or wet covering with light colored material in advance of concrete placement.

3. From initial placement through curing, protect concrete from adverse effects of high temperature, low humidity and wind.

4. Cool steel forms and reinforcement prior to concrete placement when steel temperatures exceed 120°F.

5. Cool conveying and placing equipment if necessary to maintain proper concrete placing temperature.

6. Shading of placing area shall be used if required.

W. Prevent cold joints when placing concrete.

1. Concrete placing rate shall ensure each concrete batch is placed while previously placed underlying or adjacent batches of concrete are still plastic so both can be made monolithic by normal use of immersion vibrators.

2. If equipment breaks down or unavoidable prolonged interruptions of continuous placing causes unconsolidated concrete to harden to extent later vibration cannot fully consolidate concrete, immediately consolidate concrete to stable and uniform slope.

3. If delay of placement is then short enough to permit penetration of operating vibrator into concrete, resume placement, taking care to penetrate and re-vibrate concrete placed before delay.

4. If concrete cannot be penetrated with operating vibrator, stop placement and treat cold joint as construction joint if design requirements are such that construction joint is practical.

5. If construction joint will impair structural integrity, as determined by Owner’s Representative, repair concrete placed before delay as directed by Owner’s Representative.

6. Repairs in some instances will include removal of concrete placed before delay at Contractor’s expense.

X. Arrange ends of chutes, hopper gates, and other points of concrete discharge so concrete passing from them flows continuously into receiving vessel without separation. Conveyor belts, if used, shall be wiped clean by device operated so mortar adhering to belt is not wasted and shall be of type acceptable to Owner’s Representative. Chutes shall be no longer than 50’ long. Slopes of chutes shall permit free and continuous flow of concrete being placed.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install concrete at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

2. California Building Code Chapter 19 “Concrete”

3. Other applicable building and CalGreen code requirements

4. ACI 301 Structural Concrete for Buildings Chapter 8.

5. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete Project Owner CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 30 00 - 23

6. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements

7. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §303 “Concrete and Masonry Construction.”

8. APWA Southern California Chapter Standard Plans for Public Works Construction D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

E. Deposit concrete into forms as follows:

1. Provide equipment adequate to handle and place concrete with specified aggregate and slump.

2. Keep construction joint surfaces continuously wet for first 12 hours during 24-hour period before placing concrete.

3. Treat cold joints as specified for concrete construction joints in Section 03 15 00.

4. Remove free water before placing concrete.

5. Place concrete within time limit specified herein and in ASTM C94. Concrete deliveries will be rejected if specified elapsed time from batching to placing is exceeded.

6. Provide sufficient placing capacity so concrete placement is kept plastic and free of cold joints while concrete is placed.

7. Once placement of concrete has begun in a location, do not interrupt placement by diverting placing equipment to other locations unless authorized.

8. Deposit concrete as close as possible to final position in forms.

9. Vertical drop shall not exceed 5’ below ends of ducts, chutes or buggies except where suitable equipment is provided to prevent segregation and where specifically accepted.

10. In no case shall concrete be displaced horizontally in forms by more than 6’ after depositing.

11. Do not drop concrete through reinforcing steel or into any deep form, nor place concrete in any form in manner permitting accumulation of mortar on surfaces above placed concrete.

12. If necessary, use hoppers or vertical ducts of canvas, rubber or metal to convey concrete to place of final deposit without separation or splashing.

13. Depth of concrete deposited in each location shall be that which can be fully consolidated in uniform horizontal layers not exceeding 24” in thickness.

14. Place slabs 24” thick or less in one course.

15. Avoid inclined layers or inclined construction joints except where required for sloping members.

16. Place each layer while previous layer is still soft.

17. Rate of placement in forms shall be as specified by concrete shoring and form engineer and shall be based on specified concrete mix design.

18. Time between successive lifts shall be defined as time elapsing from completion of one lift to start of placing next lift. Unless otherwise accepted, minimum time between successive lifts shall be 72 hours.

F. Place thrust blocks behind non-welded, non-flanged or non-restrained valves, fittings, reducers, tees, crosses, bends and dead ends. Place thrust blocks as follows:

1. Wrap fittings and valves, leaving stainless steel bolts exposed. Do not allow concrete to contact flanges or bolts.

Project Owner CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 30 00 - 24

2. Owner’s Representative shall inspect formwork and be present throughout placement of concrete.

3. Unless otherwise shown on Plans, provide bearing surface not less than 3 times pipe diameter in all directions.

4. Thrust block shall bear against undisturbed soil.

5. In soft or disturbed soil, increase bearing surface as directed by Owner’s Representative.

G. Concrete in ramps and sloping slabs shall be placed uniformly from bottom to top for full width of placement. As Work progresses, vibrate concrete and work it around reinforcement. Screed ramp surface in up-slope direction.

H. Settle, compact and consolidate concrete in forms or excavations throughout entire depth of concrete layer being placed.

1. Immediately after placement, consolidate each concrete layer using internal vibrating equipment.

2. Do not use vibrators to transport or move concrete within forms. If necessary, use hand spading with internal vibrating along formed surfaces permanently exposed to view.

3. Do not use form or surface vibrators unless specifically accepted.

4. Consolidate concrete into a dense, homogeneous mass. Work concrete into form corners and angles of forms and around reinforcement and embedded items, eliminating rock pockets without causing concrete materials to segregate, while bringing only a slight excess of water to exposed concrete surface during placement.

5. Use power vibrators of immersion type in sufficient number to accomplish specified results within 15 minutes after concrete is deposited.

6. Vibration shall be accomplished by vertically inserting vibrator into fresh concrete at uniform spacing over full placement area. Distance between insertions shall be approximately 1½ times radius of action of vibrator and overlap adjacent, just vibrated areas by a few inches.

7. Vibrators shall penetrate rapidly to bottom of layer, and slightly into layer below, when fresh. They shall be held stationary momentarily and then withdrawn slowly so concrete is consolidated from the bottom upward as entrapped air is removed.

8. Use 2 or more units simultaneously when placing more than 4 CY. At least one backup vibrator shall be onsite for each one in use.

9. Vibrators for structural concrete shall be Group 3 (2”-3½” head, 8,000-12,000Hz, 0.025-

0.05” amplitude) per ACI 309R.

10. Group 2 (1¼”-2½” 8,500-12,500Hz, 0.02”-0.04” amplitude) vibrators may be used only at specific locations when accepted by Owner’s Representative.

11. When placing concrete around waterstops, carefully rod and vibrate concrete to eliminate air and rock pockets. Where flat-strip waterstops are placed horizontally, work concrete under waterstops by hand. Concrete surrounding waterstops shall receive additional vibration over and above that used for adjacent concrete to assure full embedment of waterstops in concrete.

12. Concrete in walls shall be internally vibrated and at same time, rammed, stirred, or worked with suitable appliances, tamping bars, shovels, or forked tools until it completely fills forms or excavations and closes snugly against surfaces. Do not place subsequent layers of concrete until previously placed layers have been worked thoroughly as specified. Keep vibrating head from contact with form surfaces.

Project Owner CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 30 00 - 25

13. Do not vibrate concrete excessively or work it in any manner causing segregation of constituents.

I. Horizontal surfaces of concrete shall be level whenever run of concrete is stopped. To ensure level, straight joint on exposed surfaces of walls, tack wood strip at least ¾” thick to forms on these surfaces. Carry concrete about ½” above underside of strip. About one hour after concrete is placed, remove wood strip. Using trowel, remove irregularities in edge formed by strip, and remove laitance.

J. Do not backfill against walls until concrete has obtained 100% of specified 28-day compressive strength.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Refer to Section 03 10 00 for field testing and inspection of formwork.

B. Refer to Section 03 15 00 for field testing and inspection of concrete accessories, waterstops and joints.

C. Refer to Section 03 20 00 for field testing and inspection of steel reinforcement.

D. Refer to Section 03 35 00 for field testing and inspection of concrete finishing.

E. Refer to Section 03 39 00 for field testing and inspection of curing.

F. Refer to Section 05 12 00 for field testing and inspection of embedded steel bolts.

G. CBC Chapter 17 special inspection shall only be required for concrete having specified compressive strength f’c >2500 psi.

H. Maintain placing record on-site showing time and date of placement of concrete having specified compressive strength f’c >2500 psi as required in CBC §1704.4.2.

I. Special inspection and field testing of concrete required by Chapter 17 of CBC (Table 1705.3) shall be completed by ICC-certified special inspector selected by Owner and as indicated on the drawings.

J. Trial-batch testing and field-trial testing of concrete cylinders shall proceed as follows:

1. Before placing concrete, testing laboratory designated by Owner’s Representative shall prepare trial batch of each class of “structural” or “premium” concrete based on preliminary concrete mixes submitted by Contractor and using aggregates, cement and admixtures proposed.

2. During trial-batch, testing laboratory may adjust aggregate proportions to obtain required properties. Such adjustments shall be considered refinements to mix design and shall not justify extra compensation to Contractor.

3. All concrete shall meet specified requirements whether aggregate proportions are from Contractor’s preliminary mix design, or whether proportions have been adjusted during trial batch process.

4. Trial-batch materials shall be sufficient to yield 3 drying shrinkage and 10 compression test specimens from each batch.

5. Test 5 cylinders at 7 days to establish 7-day average compressive strength.

6. Test remaining 5 cylinders no more than 28 days after molding.

7. Required average compressive strengths shall be:

Project Owner CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 30 00 - 26

SPECIFIED

COMPRESSIVE
STRENGTH (f’c)
28-DAY LABORATORY

TRIAL-BATCH

COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH

MINIMUM TEST RESULTS
28-DAY FIELD-trial TEST

COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH

MINIMUM TEST RESULTS
5-CYLINDER

AVERAGE

ANY SINGLE
TEST
5-CYLINDER

AVERAGE

ANY SINGLE
TEST
0 < f’c < 3000 psi f’c +1000 psi f’c f’c + 600psi f’c
3000 psi ≤ f’c < 5000
psi
f’c +1200 psi f’c f’c + 600psi f’c
5000 ≤ f’c f’c +1400psi f’c f’c + 600psi f’c

8. Do not place “structural” concrete until mix design has been qualified under test criteria above. Should source of materials or established procedures change, Owner will require new trial batch testing.

9. Field trial batches may be placed in Work at designated locations accepted by Owner’s Representative where concrete of lower quality is required. For payment purposes, concrete so placed will be considered to be type of concrete specified at that location.

10. Concrete samples for batch testing shall be furnished in steel drums at no cost to Owner.

11. In lieu of trial-batch testing, Contractor may submit previously designed, tested and successfully used concrete mixes using materials similar to those intended for Work, together with at least 3 certified test reports of 28-day strength of proposed concrete mix.

K. Specified frequency of tests may be increased at Owner’s Representative’s discretion where excessive variation in concrete properties is observed during construction.

L. Contractor-hired personnel sampling and testing concrete and concrete constituents shall have ACI certification for Concrete Field Testing Technician Grade I.

M. Contractor shall provide concrete for testing at no charge to Owner, and shall assist Owner’s Representative and laboratory personnel in obtaining samples, and disposal and cleanup of excess material.

N. Statistical analysis of compression test results will be performed according to ACI 214.

Standard deviation of test results shall not exceed 640 psi when ordered at equivalent water content as estimated by slump. When said standard deviation exceeds 640 psi, increase average strength for which mix is designed as needed to satisfy statistical requirement that

1. Probability of any test being more than 500 psi below specified strength < 1%.

2. Probability of average of 3 consecutive tests being below specified strength <1%.

Required average strength shall be calculated using Criterion Number 3 of ACI 214 using actual standard deviation.

O. Concrete which fails to meet ACI requirements and these Specifications is subject to removal and replacement at no cost to Owner and shall be disposed of as required by law.

P. In lieu of removing and replacing slightly deficient concrete having 85% or more of specified strength, Owner may, at their sole discretion, elect to reduce payment due to Contractor for substandard concrete at a mutually agreed upon cost.

3.4 Cleaning
A. Wash out chutes, shovels, finishing trowels and other equipment that has been in contact with wet concrete at a designated concrete washout area.

Project Owner CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 30 00 - 27
B. Do not discharge or deposit wet concrete, debris, or other concrete washout effluent on bare ground, on area tributary to storm drain or natural channel or into storm drain facility.

C. Dispose of concrete and concrete waste in accordance with pollution prevention laws and regulations.

D. Refer to Section 01 74 00 / 02 05 00 for cleanup and disposal requirements.

3.5 Protection
A. Protect concrete against injury until final acceptance by Owner.

B. Protect fresh concrete from damage due to impact, overstress, vandalism and weather, including precipitation or extremes in temperature or humidity until final acceptance.

C. New concrete not complying with these specifications shall be repaired or removed and replaced prior to final acceptance except where Owner agrees to reduce payment as described above.

END OF SECTION
Project Owner CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 30 00 - 28

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Project Owner CONCRETE FINISHING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 35 00 - 1
SECTION 03 35 00

CONCRETE FINISHING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of concrete finishing.

B. Conform to Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §302, and §303, applicable permits, and requirements herein.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 66 00: Product Storage and Handling Requirements E. Section 01 74 00: Cleaning and Waste Management
F. Section 02 05 00: Basic Civil Engineering Requirements G. Section 03 10 00: Concrete Forming
H. Section 03 30 00: Cast-in-Place Concrete
I. Section 03 39 00: Concrete Curing
J. Section 09 90 00: Painting and Coating
K. Section 31 13 13: Concrete Paving
L. Section 33 39 13: Precast Concrete Manholes

1.3 System Description
A. Finish concrete as specified herein and shown on Plans.

1.4 Quality Assurance
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen trained and experienced in necessary trades and crafts and completely familiar with specified requirements and methods for proper performance of Work of this section.

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. ACI 117 Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction Materials

2. California Building Code (CBC)

3. California Green Building Standards Code (CALGreen Code)

4. SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §303 “Concrete and Masonry Construction.”

5. USBR M47 Repair of Concrete

1.6 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for concrete finishing.

Project Owner CONCRETE FINISHING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 35 00 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Materials for concrete structural systems shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Grout for
Smooth
Concrete
Finish
1 part Portland cement (½ gray & ½ white Portland cement) White Portland cement to be Atlas white or equal.
1 part fine sand passing No. 16 sieve
Calcium chloride (add amount equal to 5% of cement by volume.) Sufficient water to provide consistency of thick paint.

C. Materials furnished for Work shall conform to requirements of ACI 301 §201, §203, and §204 as applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Schedule concrete placements so newly placed concrete will not be damaged by blasting or other operations.

B. Protect uncured concrete from exposure to rain, runoff or groundwater.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install concrete at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

2. California Building Code Chapter 19 “Concrete”

3. Other applicable building and CalGreen code requirements D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

E. Horizontal surfaces of concrete shall be level whenever run of concrete is stopped. To ensure level, straight joint on exposed surfaces of walls, tack wood strip at least ¾” thick to forms on these surfaces. Carry concrete about ½” above underside of strip. About one hour after concrete is placed, remove wood strip. Using trowel, remove irregularities in edge formed by strip, and remove laitance.

F. Protect surfaces of completed concrete placements from foot traffic until surface will not be marred by footprints. Provide planked walkways across fresh concrete as required.

G. Concrete finishing shall proceed as follows:

1. As soon as forms are removed, examine exposed surfaces and rub or grind fins, bulges or ridges in satisfactory method to provide smooth, uniform and continuous surface.

2. Do not plaster or coat surfaces to be smoothed.

3. Do not use aluminum finishing tools.

4. Finished surfaces shall present finished, smooth, continuous hard surface.

5. Tolerances of finished concrete shall be as shown in Section 03 10 00.

Project Owner CONCRETE FINISHING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 35 00 - 3

6. Owner’s Representative will inspect finished surface for voids, holes, honeycombing, rock pockets or similar depression defects. Damage shall be repaired in presence of Owner’s Representative as specified.

7. Repair surface defects within 2 hours of form removal.

8. Surface defect repairs that cannot be made within 2 hours following form removal shall be delayed until after curing compound has been applied. In such case, area involved shall then be wet sandblasted to remove curing compound following which repairs shall be made as specified, and curing compound shall be reapplied over repaired area.

H. Repair defective Work at Contractor’s expense in accordance with USBR M47 as follows:

SURFACE DEFECTS

DEFECT REPAIR METHOD
Fins and Loose
Materials
Remove within 24 hours of form removal.

Tie Rod Cone
Holes and
Holes >1/2”
diameter
Ream circular holes with suitable toothed reamers to leave surfaces of holes clean and rough. Do not ream rectangular holes or holes deeper than their least surface dimension.

Repair holes in approved manner with dry-packed cement Class C mortar (1-part cement to 2 parts fine aggregate)
Cracks in
Retaining Walls
and Walls in
Contact with
Backfill
Apply waterproofing membrane to cover fill side of wall. or
Vee cracks on water-bearing face with suitable tools.

Fill with construction joint sealant designed for water-bearing structures Cracks in
Water-bearing
Structures
Vee cracks on water-bearing face with suitable tools.

Fill with construction joint sealant designed for water-bearing structures.

Minor Voids,
Holes,
Recesses, or
Honeycombing
Delineate defective concrete containing honeycomb, shrinkage cracking, or rock pockets by sawcutting at least 1” deep around defective work in rectangular shape.

Within sawcut lines, remove at least ½” over entire area. Use chipping and cutting tools as needed. Do not feather edges.

Remove 1/32” of surface film from hardened and cured portions by wet sandblast.

Secure repair Work in place with reinforcement, keys, dovetails, or anchors.

Remove laitance or soft material before bonding.

Moisten exposed surface but do not wet it enough to overcome suction needed for bond.

Brush coat with neat-cement grout or accepted bonding agent.

Dry-pack mortar for repair shall be Class C (1 part cement to 2 parts fine aggregate) with Atlas white Portland cement added as needed so patch matches finish.

Project Owner CONCRETE FINISHING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 35 00 - 4

SURFACE DEFECTS

DEFECT REPAIR METHOD
Quantity of mixing water shall be minimum necessary to obtain uniform mixture.

Thoroughly compact mortar in place and strike off to adjacent concrete.

Use forms if required.

Cure areas repaired with concrete or mortar per Section 03 39 00.

HOLES EXTENDING THROUGH CONCRETE

DEFECT REPAIR METHOD
Small Holes
less than 12” in
least dimension
Fill hole with non-shrink grout.

Where face of repaired surface is exposed to view, hold grout back 2” from finished surface.

Patch remaining 2” as described above for “Minor Voids, Holes or Honeycombing.”
For water bearing structures, apply bentonite or other accepted waterstop material around perimeter of hole.

Large Holes
greater than 12”
in least
dimension
Chip keyway into edge of opening.

Repair keyed opening as described above for “Small Holes.” Large Holes
greater than 24”
in least
dimension
Chip keyway into edge of opening
If reinforcing is not present, dowel and epoxy reinforcing of size matching reinforcing in existing wall across opening in both directions.

Repair keyed and reinforced opening as described above for “Small Holes.”.

I. Perform concrete repair work in accordance with USBR M-47 except as specified otherwise.

J. Perform repairs using accepted methods that do not disturb bond or cause sagging or horizontal fractures.

K. Repairs shall only be made in presence of Owner’s Representative.

L. Concrete finishing of unformed surfaces shall proceed as follows:

1. After proper and adequate vibration and tamping, bring unformed surfaces of slabs, floors, walls and curbs to uniform surface with suitable tools.

2. Slope exterior surfaces for drainage, unless otherwise shown.

3. Screed concrete and then immediately treat with liquid evaporation retardant. Reuse retardant as needed after each operation to prevent drying shrinkage cracks.

4. Classes of unformed surfaces shall be as follows:

Project Owner CONCRETE FINISHING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 35 00 - 5

FINISH LOCATION DESCRIPTION
U1
(screeded
finish)
Grade slabs and
foundations to be
covered with concrete
or fill material
Sufficient leveling and screeding to produce
even, uniform surface with surface irregularities
not exceeding ⅜”. No further special finish.

U2
(float
finish)
Unformed exterior
surfaces not to be
covered by additional
concrete or backfill.

Inverts of channels,
storm drains, and other
concrete flow surfaces,
Allow concrete to stiffen so it will bear a
worker’s weight without deep imprint.

Do not float or finish surfaces exhibiting a
visible moisture sheen.

Once concrete hardens and moisture sheen
disappears, screed, darby, or bull-float finish
surface with wood or metal floats or with
finishing machine using float blades.

Bring surface to required finish level with no
coarse aggregate visible. Do not add sand, dry
cement, dry dust or water to surface during
finishing.

Float surface to true and even plane.

Do not excessively float surfaces while
concrete is plastic.

Floating shall be minimum necessary to
produce uniform-texture surface free from
screed marks.

Surface irregularities shall not exceed ¼”.

U3
(steel
trowel
finish)
Top surface of walls.

Water-bearing slabs
with slopes of 10% or
less.

After floated finish U2 hardens sufficiently to
prevent excess of fine material from being
drawn to surface, steel trowel surface with firm
pressure to flatten sandy texture of floated
surface and produce dense uniform surface
free from blemishes, ripples and trowel marks.

Finish shall be smooth and free from
irregularities.

U4
(hairbroom
finish)
Walking surfaces.

Non water-bearing
slabs
Water bearing slabs
with slopes >10%
After completing steel trowel finish U3, add light
hairbroom finish with brooming perpendicular to
drainage unless otherwise shown. Resulting
surface shall be rough enough to provide
nonskid finish.

Joints Joints Carefully make joints using edging tool where required.

M. Protect finished surfaces from stains, abrasions, or damage.

N. Concrete finishing of formed surfaces shall proceed as follows:

1. Immediately after stripping forms, inspect concrete surface.

2. Repair surface defects.

Project Owner CONCRETE FINISHING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 35 00 - 6

3. Repair poor joints, voids, rock pockets and defective areas.

4. Fill form-tie holes as directed in Section 03 10 00.

5. Clean exposed surfaces of unsightly encrustations or stains.

6. Classes and tolerances of non-architectural finishes shall be:

FINISH LOCATION DESCRIPTION

FINISH CLASSES
Unformed
Surface
Finishes
Refer to Finishes U1
through U4 above
Refer to Finishes U1 through U4 above
General Exposed Formed
Surfaces Except where
Otherwise Shown
Leave finish with texture imparted by forms
except where defective surfaces require repair.

Do not reuse forms showing evidence of surface
wear or defects which might impair surface
finish quality.

Surface defects shall be classified as “abrupt” or
“gradual”
Abrupt surface defects from displaced form
sheathing or lining, or loose knots will be directly
measured.

Gradual surface defects will be tested by
template, either a straightedge for plane
surfaces, or a shaped template for curved or
warped surfaces.

Ordinary
Surface
Finish
(SSPWC
303-

1.9.2)
Undersurfaces of Slab
Spans.

Exposed Channel Wall
Surfaces,
Buried or backfilled
surfaces
Immediately after form removal, remove exterior
form bolts to at least 1” below concrete finish
surface.

Clean and ream or tool resulting holes and
depressions, and holes from air or rock pockets.

Apply bonding agent to concrete surface.

Mix mortar 45 minutes before use
Fill holes with Class C mortar (1-part cement to
2 parts fine aggregate)
After mortar hardens, rub surface with
carborundum to obtain same color in mortar as
in surrounding concrete.

Remove fins and other projections.

Class 1
Surface
Finish
(SSPWC
303-

1.9.3)
Retaining Walls above
Grade to 12” below
Finished Grade
Safety Curbs,

Complete Ordinary Surface Finish
Allow surfaces to be exposed to elements for 30
days or until surface appearance is uniform.

Power-sand entire surface to obtain uniform
color and texture.

Use power carborundum stones or discs to
remove bulges or irregularities, and smooth over
form marks.

Project Owner CONCRETE FINISHING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 35 00 - 7

FINISH LOCATION DESCRIPTION

FINISH TOLERANCES
Class A Flow Surfaces of
Channels
Gradual surface defects shall not exceed ¼”
deviation from straightedge or template.

Eliminate abrupt or gradual surface defects
parallel to flow line by grinding to plane of 1:20
ratio of height to length.

Eliminate abrupt or gradual surface defects
perpendicular to flow by grinding to plane of
1:50 ratio of height to length.

Class B Surfaces Outside
Channels but Exposed
to View
Gradual surface defects shall not exceed ¼”
deviation from straightedge or template.

Eliminate abrupt or gradual surface defects by
grinding to plane of 1:20 ratio of height to length.

Class C Nonflow Surfaces Refer to tolerance requirements in Paragraph

3.3 below.

Class D Nonflow Surfaces Not
Exposed to View
No tolerance requirements except repair of
defective concrete.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Field testing of concrete finishing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Concrete
Finishing
Dimensional
Tolerance
ACI 117 and Section 03 10
00 Inspection at
Owner’s
discretion
Owner Owner
Gradual
Surface
Defects
¼” maximum deviation
from straightedge or
template in 10’
All exposed
surfaces
Contractor Contractor
Abrupt Surface
Defects
Holes larger than ½”
diameter or greater than
¼” deep are defined as
abrupt surface defects.

More stringent
requirements exist for
some specified finishes.

All exposed
surfaces
Owner Owner
Project Owner CONCRETE FINISHING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 35 00 - 8

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Cracking in
Flatwork and
Non-Waterbearing
Structures
No cracks wide enough to
stick a dime in except at
expansion or contraction
joints.

As directed Owner Owner
Concrete 11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate compliance
to Contract Documents
and Manufacturer’s printed
literature
1 test Owner Contractor

3.4 Protection
A. Protect concrete against injury until final acceptance by Owner.

B. Protect fresh concrete from damage due to impact, overstress, vandalism and weather, including precipitation or extremes in temperature or humidity until final acceptance.

C. Any new concrete not complying with these specifications shall be repaired or removed and replaced prior to final acceptance except where Owner agrees to reduce payment as described above.

END OF SECTION
Project Owner CONCRETE CURING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 39 00 - 1
SECTION 03 39 00

CONCRETE CURING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and curing of concrete.

B. Conform to Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §201-4, applicable permits, and requirements herein.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 74 00: Cleaning and Waste Management
E. Section 02 05 00: Basic Civil Engineering Requirements F. Section 03 30 00: Cast-in-Place Concrete
G. Section 03 60 00: Grout
H. Section 09 90 00: Painting and Coating
I. Section 32 13 13: Concrete Paving
J. Section 33 39 13: Precast Concrete Manholes

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install curing compound which when applied to fresh concrete will form continuous membrane over exposed surface.

1.4 Quality Assurance
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen trained and experienced in necessary trades and crafts and completely familiar with specified requirements and methods for proper performance of Work of this section.

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. ASTM C31 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in Field

2. ASTM C156 Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials

3. ASTM C171 Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete

4. ASTM C192 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in Laboratory

5. ASTM C309 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete

6. California Building Code (CBC)

7. California Green Building Standards Code (CALGreen Code)

8. Fed Spec UU-B-790A Building Paper, Vegetable Fiber (Kraft, Waterproofed, Water Repellent and Fire Resistant

9. NSF/ANSI 61 Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects Project Owner CONCRETE CURING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 39 00 - 2

10. SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §201-4 “Concrete Curing Materials

11. SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §303-1.10 “Curing.”

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals in accordance with ACI 301 and California Building Code.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Product Data Submit for curing compounds per Product Data requirements.

Installation
Instructions
Submit materials and methods for curing per Installation Instruction requirements.

Certificate of
Compliance
For impervious sheet curing materials, submit Certificate of Compliance with ASTM C171.

For curing compounds, submit Certificate of Compliance with ASTM C309.

Warranty Furnish one-year warranty from date of final acceptance B. In addition to requirements of ACI, refer to Section 02 05 00 for definition of requirements for Product Data, Installation Instructions, and Certificates of Compliance.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 / 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow ASTM C309 and Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of curing compounds.

C. At time of use, maintain pigmented curing compounds in thoroughly mixed condition.

D. Store materials in air-tight containers when not in use.

1.8 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for concrete curing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Curing Blankets Reef Industries Houston, TX (800) 231-6074 Sika Corporation Lyndhurst, NJ (800) 325-9504
Accepted equal
Curing
Compounds
Burke / Edoco “Spartan Cote
Cure-Seal Hardener”
Long Beach, CA (310) 834-3401
Project Owner CONCRETE CURING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 39 00 - 3

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Use where air
quality
regulations do
not prohibit use
of solvent
based
compounds
Euco Euclid Chemical Co / RPM
“Aqua-Cure”
Cleveland, OH (800) 321-7628
L M Scofield Company “Cureseal
100®”
Los Angeles, CA (800) 800-9900
Master Builders / BASF
“Masterkure-W”
Beachwood, OH (800) 228-3318
Accepted equal
Curing
Compounds
(Water-Based
Resin Type)
Use where air
quality
regulations
prohibit use of
solvent based
compounds
Edoco “Aqua Resincure” Long Beach, CA (310) 834-3401
Euco Euclid Chemical Co / RPM
“Super Rez Seal”
Cleveland, OH (800) 321-7628
L M Scofield Company “Cureseal
W®”
Los Angeles, CA (800) 800-9900
Master Builders / BASF “MB429” Beachwood, OH (800) 228-3318 Accepted equal
Dampproofing
Agent
Euco Euclid Chemical Co / RPM Cleveland, OH (800) 321-7628 Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing
“CCW Barricoat”
Wylie, TX (800) 527-7092
Karnak Corporation Clark, NJ (732) 388-0300
W R Meadows Sealtight “Sealmastic” Hampshire, IL (800) 342-5976 Sonneborn / BASF “Hydrocide 600” Shakopee, MN (800) 433-9517 Accepted equal
Evaporation
Retardant for
Curing
Euco Euclid Chemical Co / RPM
“Eucobarl”
Cleveland, OH (800) 321-7628
Master Builders / BASF (Confilm) Beachwood, OH (800) 228-3318 Accepted equal
B. Curing compounds shall be compatible and by one Manufacturer capable of providing qualified field service representation.

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Refer to Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §201-4 for materials requirements for concrete curing materials.

C. Materials for concrete curing shall be:

Project Owner CONCRETE CURING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 39 00 - 4

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Curing
Compounds
Conform to ASTM C309 Class A
Liquid shall form continuous membrane over
exposed concrete surfaces when applied to fresh
concrete.

Do not use sodium silicate compounds.

Water loss ≤ 0.15kg/m2 in 24 hours per ASTM
C156
Water loss ≤ 0.45kg/m2 in 72 hours per ASTM
C156
Sheet Curing
Materials
Type 1 Waterproof
Paper
With white polyethylene sheeting
2- mil nominal PE thickness
Permanently bond to waterproof paper per Fed
Spec UU-B-790A
Loss of moisture per ASTM C156<0.055
grams/cm2
Type 2
Polyethylene Film
White opaque
10-mil nominal PE thickness
Loss of moisture per ASTM C156<0.055
grams/cm2
Type 3 WhiteBurlap
Polyethylene
Sheet
White opaque polyethylene film impregnated or
extruded onto one side of burlap
4-mil nominal PE thickness
Burlap weight 9oz/sy or greater
Loss of moisture per ASTM C156<0.055
grams/cm2
Type 4 Burlap Weight ≥ 10oz/yard 40” wide
Curing Mats Heavy Shag Rugs,
Carpets or Cotton
Mats Quilted at 4”
on center
Minimum dry weight of 12 oz/sy
Curing Water Shall not contain substances that stain or injure concrete.

Dampproofing Coal Tar Two coats of single-component self-priming heavy duty material.

D. Materials furnished for Work shall conform to requirements of ACI 301 §201, §203, and §204 as applicable.

Project Owner CONCRETE CURING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 39 00 - 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Materials and equipment needed for curing and protection shall be on- site prior to start of concrete placement.

B. Protect uncured concrete from exposure to rain for 12 hours.

C. Protect uncured concrete from exposure to runoff or groundwater for 14 days.

D. When recorded peak ambient temperature exceeds 85°F and is forecast to reach 85°F on consecutive days, shield concrete from direct sunlight for 3 days.

E. Do not expose uncured concrete to fire or excessive heat F. Surface defect repairs that cannot be made within 2 hours following form removal shall be delayed until after curing compound has been applied.

3.2 Installation/Application
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

2. California Building Code Chapter 19 “Concrete”

3. Other applicable building and CalGreen code requirements

4. ACI 301 Structural Concrete for Buildings Chapter 8.

5. ACI 305R Hot Weather Concreting

6. ACI 306R Cold Weather Concreting

7. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete

8. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements

9. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction §303-1.10 “Curing.” C. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

D. Cure finished surfaces using methods and duration similar to that for adjacent concrete.

E. If fresh concrete may check or crack prior to commencement of curing due to weather, materials used, or other reasons, keep concrete damp but not wet using indirect fine water spray until it is unlikely checking or cracking will occur, or until curing commences.

F. Concrete curing shall proceed as follows:

SURFACE DESCRIPTION
Unstripped
Forms
Method 1: Wet wood forms completely after concrete has been placed, and keep wet with water until forms are removed.

For steel forms, keep exposed concrete surfaces continuously wet until forms are removed.

If forms are removed within 10 days of placing concrete, continue curing as described for surfaces with forms removed
Construction
Joints
between
Method 2 (Moist Curing): Cover surface with at least 2 layers burlap or cotton mats.

Project Owner CONCRETE CURING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 39 00 - 6

SURFACE DESCRIPTION
Footings &
Walls
Wet mats with water for duration of 10-day curing period until concrete in walls has been placed.

Horizontal non-architectural flatwork, including roadways, slabs, curbs, and walks may also be water-cured by ponding or by covering with 2” of saturated sand in lieu of burlap or cotton mats.

Do not apply curing compound to these surfaces.

Encasement
Concrete &
Thrust
Blocks
Method 3: Cover surface with moist earth 4 to 24 hours after concrete is placed. Earthwork operations that may damage concrete shall not begin until at least 7 days after concrete is placed.

Concrete
Surfaces not
Described
Elsewhere
Method 2 (Moist Curing) (described above)
Method 4 (Curing Compounds): As soon as concrete hardens enough to prevent marring on unformed surfaces, and within 2 hours after form removal, spray surface with 2 coats liquid curing compound at minimum 75-psi pressure and uniform coverage of ≤ 400sf/gallon each coat.

Apply first coat as soon as finished concrete surface reaches uniformly damp appearance with no free water on surface.

Allow first coat to dry but not more than 4 hours, then apply 2nd coat perpendicular to first coat.

Concrete surfaces subjected to rainfall within 3 hours after curing compound application shall be resprayed by method and at coverage specified.

Protect concrete surfaces to which curing compound is applied for duration of curing period from pedestrian and vehicular traffic or other causes that will disrupt continuity of curing membrane.

Do not damage seal during curing. If seal is damaged or broken, apply additional curing compound over damaged portion.

Where curing compound is accidentally applied to surfaces against which concrete is to be subsequently placed, remove curing compound by wet sandblasting just before placing new concrete.

Where concrete is placed adjacent to panel coated with curing compound, apply curing compound to previously coated panel areas within 6’ of joint and apply to other locations where curing membrane is disturbed.

Following curing, remove visible traces of curing compound in such manner that surface finish is not damaged.

Appearance is a primary consideration for concrete surfaces exposed to view. Exercise extreme care to apply curing compound evenly on these surfaces. At no cost to Owner, repair variations in shade, color or tint, resulting from uneven application of curing compound.

Floor Slabs
on Grade
Method 5 (Curing Blankets): Before curing medium is applied, keep entire surface damp using nozzles that atomize flow so surface is not marred or washed.

Project Owner CONCRETE CURING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 39 00 - 7

SURFACE DESCRIPTION
Apply curing material using Method 4 (Curing Compounds) described above.

After 1 hour but not more than 4 hours have elapsed after applying curing material, wet surface with water delivered through fog nozzle. Place concrete curing blankets on slab, with edges butted together and with joints between strips sealed with 2” wide strips of sealing tape or with edges lapped at least 3” and fastened with waterproof cement to form continuous watertight joint.

During first 3 days of curing, no traffic and no depositing of materials shall be permitted on curing blankets.

After 3 days, traffic or material deposits shall only occur on top of ⅝” minimum plywood sheets laid over curing blankets.

Leave curing blankets in place for 10 days. Add water under curing blanket as often as necessary to maintain damp concrete surfaces. Do not remove curing blankets until after concrete for adjacent work has been placed. Should curing blankets tear or become damaged, replace damaged sections.

Surfaces
with Forms
Removed &
Slabs not on
Grade
Keep concrete continuously wet by applying water for at least 14 consecutive days beginning immediately after concrete reaches final set or after forms are removed. Before curing medium is applied, keep entire surface damp using nozzles that atomize flow so surface is not marred or washed.

Use heavy curing mats secured in place with weights along edges to retain moisture throughout curing period. Use sprinklers or other means to maintain moist surface condition during and after normal working hours.

At end of curing period, remove curing medium. Rewet dry spots and apply curing compound in accordance with Method 4 above.

G. Dispose of excess curing water in manner that avoids damage to Work.

H. Hot-weather curing shall proceed as follows:

1. If surface moisture evaporation rate as determined by nomograph in ACI 305R, is expected to exceed 0.2 psf per hour such as to cause plastic shrinkage cracking, make provision for windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, or wet covering with light colored material in advance of placement.

2. Take such protective measures as quickly as finishing operations allow.

I. Cold-weather curing shall proceed as follows:

1. Protect concrete from freezing and maintain at favorable temperatures as recommended in ACI 306R using heating or insulation.

2. Maintain concrete cured using applied curing compounds at ≥40°F for 72 hours following placement.

3. Use approved insulation in contact with forms or concrete surfaces if necessary to maintain temperatures.

4. Following this initial 72-hour period, protect water-cured concrete from freezing for 72 more hours.

Project Owner CONCRETE CURING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 39 00 - 8

5. Artificial heaters used to maintain concrete temperatures shall not dry out concrete. Do not use unvented heaters unless unformed concrete surface is protected from excessive carbon dioxide by an approved curing compound.

6. Water curing of concrete may be reduced to 6 days during periods when mean daily temperature at site is less than 40°F, provided water curing shall be temporarily discontinued during prescribed period when temperatures are such that concrete surfaces may freeze.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Refer to Section 03 30 00 for field testing and inspection of concrete.

B. Special inspection and field testing of concrete required by Chapter 17 of CBC (Table 1705.3) shall be completed by ICC-certified special inspector selected by Owner and shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY

FIRST TEST

PAID FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Concrete
having f’c
exceeding
2500 psi
Curing
Temperature
and
Techniques
ACI 318, §5.11-
§5.13, & CBC
§1913.9
Periodic per
CBC Table
1705.3
Owner Contractor to
reimburse
Owner for
costs of first
deputy
inspector if
re-inspection
is required
Curing
Compound
Mixing
Verification
Verify curing
compound has been
mixed before
spraying
As directed Owner Owner
Local
Application
Rate
Within 50 square
foot per gallon of
specified rate per
California Test 535
As directed Contractor Contractor
Average
Application
Rate
Within 25 square
foot per gallon of
specified rate per
California Test 535
As directed Contractor Contractor
Curing
Period
Moist Curing Record surface
moisture conditions
in daily log
One inspection
per day
Contractor Contractor
ImperviousSheet Curing Record condition of
covering and
tightness of laps
and tapes in daily
log
One inspection
per day
Contractor Contractor
Project Owner CONCRETE CURING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 39 00 - 9

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY

FIRST TEST

PAID FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Hot-Weather
or ColdWeather
Protection
Record temperature
in daily log
One inspection
per day and
hourly for first
24 hours upon
removal of
protection
Contractor Contractor

3.4 Protection
A. Protect concrete against injury until final acceptance by Owner.

END OF SECTION
Project Owner CONCRETE CURING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 39 00 - 10

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Project Owner PRECAST CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 40 00 - 1
SECTION 03 40 00

PRECAST CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work of This Section
A. The Contractor shall provide precast concrete work, complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. This Section covers the design, fabrication, delivery, and installation of all precast boxes, wet wells, manholes, and structural concrete including connections.

1.2 Related Sections
A. The Work of the following Sections apply to the Work of this Section. Other Sections, not referenced below, shall also apply to the extent required for proper performance of the Work.

1. Section 03 32 00 Concrete Reinforcing

2. Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete

3. Section 03 60 00 Grouting

1.3 Reference Specifications, Codes and Standards
A. The current edition of the California Building Code (CBC) as adopted by the City of Calexico Municipal Code.

B. Except as otherwise indicated, the current editions of the following standards apply to the Work of this Section:

1. Commercial Standards:

ACI 117 Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concretes
ACI 315 Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete ACI 533 Guide for Precast Wall Panels
AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel
AWS D1.4 Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel
AWS A5.4 Stainless Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding PCI MNL-116 Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Structural Precast Concrete Products
PCI MNL-120 Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete Project Owner PRECAST CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 40 00 - 2

2. ASTM Standard in Building Codes:

ASTM A36 Carbon Structural Steel
ASTM A184 Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM A185 Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete ASTM A497 Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed, for Concrete ASTM A580 Stainless Steel Wire
ASTM A615 Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM A706 Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM C33 Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C127 Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate
ASTM C128 Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and Absorption of Fine Aggregate
ASTM C150 Portland Cement
ASTM C173 Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method
ASTM C204 Test Methods for Fineness of Hydraulic Cement by Air-Permeability Apparatus
ASTM C231 Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method
ASTM C260 Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C311 Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Fly Ash or Natural Pozzolans for Use in Portland Cement Concrete
ASTM C494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM D2240 Test Method for Rubber Property -- Durometer Hardness

1.4 Contractor Submittals
A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Shop drawings shall show details in accordance with ACI 315 and ACI 318 including installation details and design computations.

2. Shop drawings and design computations shall be stamped and signed by a Civil or Structural Engineer licensed in the State of California.

Project Owner PRECAST CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 40 00 - 3

3. Shop drawings shall indicate precast unit identification marks, the location of units in the Work, elevations, fabrication details, welding details, reinforcement, connections, dimensions, interface with adjacent members, and special handling instructions in sufficient detail to cover manufacture, handling, and erection. Shop drawings shall include erection drawings.

C. Mix Proportions: Before commencing operations a statement shall be submitted giving the nominal maximum aggregate size and proportions of all ingredients that will be used in the manufacture of concrete. The statement shall include test results from an approved testing laboratory, certifying that the proportions selected will produce concrete of the properties required. No substitutions shall be made in materials used in the concrete mix without approval and additional tests to verify that the concrete properties are satisfactory.

D. Test Reports: Tests for compressive strength of concrete shall be performed by an independent commercial testing laboratory. Copies of test reports including all test data and all test results shall be submitted.

E. Certificates of Compliance: Certificates of compliance shall be submitted attesting that materials and products meet or exceed specified requirements.

F. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Before commencing operations, a statement shall be submitted giving the qualifications of the precast concrete Manufacturer, and evidence that the Manufacturer and plant are PCI certified.

1.5 Quality Assurance
A. General Requirements: Design members under direct supervision of a professional Civil or Structural Engineer experienced in design of precast concrete units, licensed in the State of California, and conforming to requirements of PCI MNL-116, and to ACI 318.

1. Precast Manufacturer and erectors shall be qualified in accordance with PCI MNL-116.

2. Welding shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1, AWS D1.4 and AWS A5.4.

3. Manufacture, Transportation and Installation: The Manufacturer shall specialize in providing precast products and services normally associated with precast concrete construction, using procedures complying with PCI MNL-116.

4. Certificate of compliance meeting the requirement of Chapter 17 of the current edition of the California Building Code (CBC) of International Code Council (ICC) as adopted by the City of Calexico Municipal Code and acceptance by the City of Calexico shall be submitted to the Owner’s representative.

1.6 Design Requirements
A. Standards and Loads: The precast design and construction shall conform to all applicable loads and standards as specified on the contract drawings.

B. Concrete Mix: The concrete mix shall be designed by the Manufacturer and be approved by the Owner’s representative, to meet or exceed all of the requirements in specification Section 03300.

C. Reinforcing Steel: The reinforcing steel shall be designed by the Manufacturer and be approved by the Owner’s representative, to meet or exceed all of the requirements in specification Section 03200.

Project Owner PRECAST CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 40 00 - 4

1.7 Delivery, Storage and Handling
A. General: Unless specified otherwise herein, fabrication, handling and erection of precast elements shall be in accordance with the recommendations made by ACI 318 and ACI Committee 533. Precast members shall be handled to position consistent with their shape and design; they shall be lifted and supported from design support points and provided with strong backs and other devices as required. Lifting or handling equipment shall be capable of maintaining units during manufacture, storage, transportation, erection, and in position for fastening.

B. Blocking and supports, lateral restraints and protective materials during transport and storage shall be clean, nonstaining, without causing harm to exposed surfaces, including temporary support to prevent bowing and warping. Lateral restraints shall be provided to prevent undesirable horizontal movement. Edges and exposed faces of members shall be protected to prevent straining, chipping, or spalling of concrete.

C. Precast units shall be stored off the ground in a manner to prevent warpage and shall be protected from weather, marring, and overload. Lifting devices shall have a minimum safety factor of 4.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Concrete Materials
A. Concrete: Concrete in contact with soil or liquids shall be formulated using Type II or Type V portland cement conforming to ASTM C150. Cement shall contain less than 0.60 percent alkalies and shall be from one source throughout the entire project.

B. Aggregates: Aggregates for normal weight concrete shall conform to ASTM C33 with a maximum size of 3/4 inch.

C. Water: Water shall be clean, potable, and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkalies, organic materials and other deleterious substances.

D. Admixture: Admixture shall be Pozzolith 300R by BASF Admixture Systems, Plastocrete by Sika Corporation, or approved alternate. Admixture shall be used in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Calcium chloride or any admixture containing calcium chloride shall not be used.

E. Reinforcing Steel: Reinforcing steel shall conform to ASTM A615, including supplementary requirements, and shall be Grade 60 except that bars to be welded shall be ASTM A706.

F. Molds: Molds shall be designed to withstand high-frequency vibration and to ensure finished units. Material from which molds are to be fabricated shall be steel, concrete, fiberglass, reinforced plastic or wood. The selection of materials for molds shall be at the manufacturer's option. All elements shall be cast in molds of rigid construction, accurate in detail with precise corners and arises, and designed to provide a close control of dimensions and details as indicated on the drawings.

Prior to casting of precast elements, molds shall have all surface joints, radii, corners, etc., filled, ground, filed, straightened or otherwise removed to provide a finished concrete surface that is smooth and dense, free of honeycombing, large air pockets, offsets, sinkages, or other irregularities.

Project Owner PRECAST CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 40 00 - 5
G. Embedded Items and Anchorage Devices: All embedded items, inserts, and anchorage devices exposed to view, moisture or weather shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel.

Anchorage devices shall be fabricated from ASTM A36 steel.

H. Penetrations: All required penetrations and openings larger than 6-inches in diameter or 6-inches square shall be formed in place at the time of casting. Additional reinforcing shall be added where required to meet loading requirements. Openings and penetrations smaller than 6-inches may be core drilled.

I. Parting Compound: All molds shall be coated with parting compound to facilitate removal of elements from molds. Parting compound shall be non-petroleum, nonstaining and shall be of a nature and composition not deleterious to concrete.

J. Manhole Steps: Manhole steps shall be fabricated from ASTM A36 steel and shall be hot dip galvanized.

2.2 Accessories
A. Plates, Angles, Anchors, and Studs: Hot dip galvanized ASTM A36.

B. Reglets: Plastic, shaped and flanged to remain in place once cast; tape closed to prevent concrete intrusion.

C. Bearing Pads: Neoprene, molded to size or cut from molded sheet, 70-80 Type A durometer, ASTM D2240.

D. Sealant: In accordance with in Section 07920.

2.3 Fabrication
A. General: Precast concrete units shall be fabricated by a licensed shop in accordance with ACI 318, PCI MNL-116. Plant records and quality control program shall be maintained during production of precast units. Records and access to plant shall be available to the Owner’s representative upon request.

B. Rigid molds shall be used, constructed to maintain precast unit uniform in shape, size, and finish, free from castings and dents, gouges, oil canning, or other irregularities that will adversely affect appearance or strength of units. Consistent quality shall be maintained during manufacture.

C. Reinforcing steel, anchors, inserts, plates, angles, and other cast-in-place items shall be embedded as shown on shop drawings. Reinforcement shall be fabricated and placed in conformance with ACI 318. No tack welding of or to reinforcement is permitted. Welding, when allowed, shall conform to AWS D1.4 requirements. No carbon steel chairs, spacers, nails or tie wire shall be used in positioning reinforcing and embedments.

D. Adequate reinforcing steel shall be provided to control cracking.

E. Anchors, inserts, lifting devices, and other accessories shall be placed and embedded in accordance with approved shop drawings, accurately positioned in their designed location and anchored to prevent dislocation during panel construction. Flashing reglets shall be placed and embedded continuous and straight, with lifting devices to permit removal after erection.

F. Units shall be moist cured with water mist to develop concrete quality and to minimize surface drying and appearance blemishes such as nonuniformity, staining, or surface cracking.

Project Owner PRECAST CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 40 00 - 6
G. Erection slings, cables, blocking, hardware and restraints shall be nonmetallic or stainless steel. Cribbing or crating shall be wood.

2.4 Finish of Precast Units
A. Exposed and Unexposed Faces. Smooth, dense, uniform surface free from blemishes. Defects in unexposed edges shall be repaired as approved.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation
A. Casting: Casting shall be accomplished by methods and equipment that are in conformance with generally acceptable systems for this type of Work. All precast concrete shall be manufactured by a plant thoroughly experienced in this type of Work. The manufacturer shall meet all production schedules. Surfaces on which units are cast shall be level and free from any imperfections detrimental to the surface appearance of the finished units. Parting compound shall be applied evenly as per manufacturer's recommendations.

Concrete shall be so handled as to prevent segregation of materials and shall be continuously vibrated during casting, either internally or externally, to achieve proper compaction, finish and distribution of concrete. All precautions must be taken to keep the reinforcing steel in the proper location during placing and consolidation of the concrete. Unless shown otherwise and except at concrete faces exposed to soil or liquids, all reinforcing steel shall have a minimum cover of 3/4 inch. At concrete faces exposed to soil or liquids, cover shall be 1-1/2 inches minimum. Embedded items shall be accurately placed and maintained in their proper location during the casting operation. Special inserts or other devices for handling of panels for the convenience of the manufacturer shall not be exposed to view after members are erected. Embedded anchors, inserts, plates, angles and other cast-in items shall have sufficient anchorage and embedment for design requirements.

Casting, bowing, warpage and dimensional tolerances shall be in accordance with PCI MNL-116.

B. Curing: All precast units shall be steam cured for a period of at least 12 hours. Fog spraying may be used when reviewed by the Owner’s representative. Precast elements shall not be removed from molds for a minimum period of 12 hours after casting, or until concrete has attained a minimum compressive strength of 3,500 pounds per square inch, whichever governs. After removal from the forms, curing by steam or fog spraying shall be continued until concrete has attained specified strength and confirmed by standard tests. Curing procedures shall be consistent and uniform throughout the entire project.

C. Welding: The quality of material and fabrication of all welded connections shall conform to the latest AISC "Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings." All weldments shall be made in accordance with the applicable provisions of AWS.

All welding, other than tacks, shall be done by certified welders. All units shall be protected from damage by field welding or cutting operations. Noncombustible shields shall be provided as necessary for this purpose.

D. Joints and Joint Sealants: In all instances, the edges of precast concrete units and of adjacent material shall be sound, smooth, clean and free of all contaminants prior to joint treatment.

Sealant and primer shall be supplied by the same manufacturer and the primer, when required, shall be as recommended for the particular sealant used. All sealant compounds shall be delivered to the job in the manufacturer's original sealed containers with labels intact Project Owner PRECAST CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 40 00 - 7
and shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Sealant shall be as specified in specification Section 07920 of these specifications.

3.2 Erection
A. Any errors or misalignment in the structure which would prevent the proper setting of the elements shall be corrected by the contractor before the erection is commenced. Erection shall be supervised and performed by workmen skilled in this type of Work. Each element shall be set in the proper position, carefully plumbed and anchored securely to the structural frame. Adjustments or changes in connections which could involve additional stresses in the products or connections shall not be permitted without approval of the Owner’s representative.

All bearing surfaces shall be true to line and grade. Erection tolerances shall be in accordance with PCI MNL-116. All joints shall be uniform and straight.

3.3 Cleaning and Repairing
A. After installation, precast elements shall be protected from all damage until final acceptance by the Owner’s representative. Precast units with cracks, spalls, and other defects shall be subject to rejection. Units reviewed for repair shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Owner’s representative.

3.4 Alternative Design
A. The contractor may offer an alternative design for any precast element. Such design shall be comparable in terms of strength, deflection, finish and all other design criteria indicated.

Complete drawings prepared and sealed by a civil or structural engineer registered in the State of California where applicable shall be submitted to the Owner’s representative for his review in accordance with these Specifications. No alternative design will be permitted unless it has been specifically accepted in writing by the Owner’s representative. If an alternative design is accepted, all expenses resulting the design shall be borne by the contractor.

END OF SECTION
Project Owner PRECAST CONCRETE
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 40 00 - 8

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Project Owner GROUTING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 60 00 - 1
SECTION 03 60 00

GROUTING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of cement grout, quick-setting grout, dry-pack grout, nonshrink grout, topping grout, structural repair grout, and pressure grouting other than for masonry.

B. Use non-shrink grout for setting bearing plates.

C. In places of high temperature or fire hazard, use non-shrink grout Class I, and not Class II.

D. Conform to Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §201-7, applicable permits, and requirements herein.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 66 00: Product Storage and Handling Requirements E. Section 01 73 24: Seismic Restraint
F. Section 02 05 00: Basic Civil Engineering Requirements G. Section 03 30 00: Cast-in-Place Concrete
H. Section 03 39 00: Concrete Curing
I. Section 05 50 00: Metal Fabrications
J. Section 09 90 00: Painting and Coating

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install complete grouted system with applicable embedments, including appurtenant structural, mechanical, and/or electrical mountings or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and compliance with applicable building codes and standards.

1.4 Quality Assurance
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen trained and experienced in necessary trades and crafts and completely familiar with specified requirements and methods for proper performance of Work of this section.

B. Plant testing of aggregate shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Aggregate Sieve
Analysis
ASTM C136 1 each trial
batch
Owner Contractor
Amount
passing #200
sieve
ASTM C117 1 each trial
batch
Owner Contractor
Project Owner GROUTING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 60 00 - 2

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Fine
Aggregate
Sand
Equivalent
ASTM D2419 As directed Owner Contractor
Organic
Impurities
ASTM C40 As directed Owner Contractor
Soundness ASTM C88 As directed Owner Contractor
C. Plant testing of grout shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Grout Certification
of Mix
Design
ACI 301 certified by
independent testing
laboratory
1 per mix Contractor Contractor
Strength
Requiremen
ts
Applicable specified ASTM
Standards tested at 28 days
1 per product
type
Contractor Contractor
Grout
Materials
Materials
Inspection
Refer to Paragraph 2.2
below
As directed Owner Owner

1.5 References
A. ASTM C33 Concrete Aggregate.

B. ASTM C39 Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens C. ASTM C40 Organic Impurities in Sand for Concrete.

D. ASTM C88 Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate.

E. ASTM C117 Materials Finer than No. 200 Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing.

F. ASTM C136 Sieve or Screen Analysis of Fine and Course Aggregates.

G. ASTM C150 Portland Cement.

H. ASTM C494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.

I. ASTM C496 Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.

J. ASTM C579 Compressive Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes
K. ASTM C580 Flexural Strength and Modulus of Elasticity of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes
L. ASTM C1107 Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-Shrink).

M. ASTM D695 Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics.

N. ASTM E329 Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction
Project Owner GROUTING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 60 00 - 3
O. California Test No. 217 Sand Equivalent
P. California Building Code (CBC)
Q. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings, and Polymer Overlays

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Product Data Product Data required for bonding compounds, non-shrink grout and repair grout per Product Data requirements.

Installation
Instructions
Submit per Installation or Application instruction requirements for each type of manufactured grout.

Certificate of
Compliance
Submit mill test certification including fineness for each shipment of cement per ACI 301.

Submit aggregate gradation and certification per ACI 301.

Submit admixture certification including chloride ion content per ACI 301.

Submit Manufacturer’s certification grouts contain no chlorides or corrosive chemicals.

Submit Manufacturer’s certification non-shrink grout contains no aluminum, zinc, or magnesium powders as method of expansion.

Submit Manufacturer’s certification non-shrink grout does not rely on gas production or gypsum expansion.

Submit certification grout conforms to specified strength requirements Test Record
Transcripts
Submit for factory tests per Test Record Transcript requirements.

Material
Samples
Submit color samples for grout mortar on request. Mortar color shall match adjacent Work.

Warranty Furnish one-year warranty from date of final acceptance Submit name and telephone number of grout Manufacturer's representative who will provide on-site service. Representative shall have at least one year of experience with specified grouts.

B. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for definition of requirements for Product Data, Installation Instructions, Certificates of Compliance, and Test Record Transcripts.

C. When sources of aggregate are changed, submit new certification for new materials prior to its use.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 / 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

Project Owner GROUTING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 60 00 - 4
B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of grout.

1.8 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for grouting.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Bonding Agent
(Noncorrosive)
Concresive Div BASF Shakopee, MN (800) 433-9517
Edoco / Dayton Superior Kansas City, KS (877) 266-7732
Master Builders / BASF Beachwood, OH (800) 228-3318
Sika Corporation “Armatec 110
EpoCem”
Lyndhurst, NJ (800) 933-7452
Accepted equal
Non-Shrink
Grout Class I
BASF Construction Chemicals
“Masterflow 713”
Beachwood, OH (800) 228-3318
Euco Euclid Chemical Co “High Glow
Grout”
Cleveland, OH (800) 321-7628
Five Star Products “Five Star Grout” Shelton, CT (800) 243-2206 Hilti “CG 200PC” Tulsa, OK (800) 879-8000
L&M Construction Chemicals /
Laticrete “Duragrout”
Bethany, CT(800) 362-3331
Master Builders / BASF. Embeco 636 Beachwood, OH (800) 228-3318 Master Builders / BASFMasterFlow
928
Beachwood, OH (800) 228-3318
Sika Corporation “Sikagrout 212” Lyndhurst, NJ (800) 933-7452 Accepted equal
Non-Shrink
Grout Class II
BASF Construction Chemicals
“Masterflow 928”
Beachwood, OH (800) 228-3318
Five Star Products “Fluid Grout 100” Shelton, CT (800) 243-2206 L&M Construction Chemicals /
Laticrete “Crystex”
Bethany, CT(800) 362-3331
Accepted equal
Structural
Repair Grout
Five Star Products “Structural
Concrete ES”
Shelton, CT (800) 243-2206
Accepted equal

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

Project Owner GROUTING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 60 00 - 5
B. Provide the following grouts for the applications listed and as indicated on the drawings:

APPLICATION TYPE OF GROUT
Column base plates. Non-Shrink - Class I
Pumps ≤1000 horsepower, unless indicated otherwise Non-Shrink - Class I Pumps >1000 horsepower, unless indicated otherwise Non-Shrink - Class II Filling block-out spaces for embedded items such as
railing posts, gate guide frames, etc.

Non-Shrink - Class I (Class II
where placement time exceeds
20 min.)
Surface repairs Cement Grout
Repair of small (largest dimension < 12”) holes and
defects in concrete members which are not water
bearing and not in contact with soil or other fill material Non-Shrink - Class I or NonShrink - Class II or Structural Repair Grout
Repair of small (largest dimension < 12”) holes and
defects in concrete members which are water bearing
or in contact with soil or other fill materials
Non-Shrink - Class II or Structural
Repair Grout
Repair of large (largest dimension greater than 12”)
holes and defects in concrete members.

Structural Repair Grout
Applications not listed above, where grout is indicated Non-Shrink Class I, unless specifically indicated otherwise
C. Materials for grout shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Cement Portland
Cement
Conform to ASTM C150 Type II/V Modified Low
Alkali/Sulfate Resisting, including Table 2 optional
requirements
At least 85% of cement by weight shall pass a 325 screen Low Alkali containing maximum 0.60% alkalis
Gradation ≥ 85% of cement by weight shall pass #325 screen.

Water Clean, Clear
Potable
Water
TDS<1000 mg/l
Aggregate All
Aggregate
Conform to ASTM C33
Nonreactive clean hard durable washed material
From pits acceptable to Owner’s Representative
Ratio of silica released to reduction in alkalinity <1.0 Ratio of fine aggregate to total aggregate shall be <50%.

Project Owner GROUTING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 60 00 - 6

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Fine
Aggregate
Natural sand, manufactured sand or combination
Sand Equivalent not less than 75% average for 3 samples or less than 70% for any one sample.

Gradation – well graded per ASTM C33
100% passing #8 sieve
45% or more passing #40 sieve
3% max passing #200 sieve
Variation will be accepted if average of 3 consecutive tests falls within limits and variation does not exceed the
following:

Sieves #30 or coarser ≤ 2.0% variation
Sieves #50 or finer ≤ 0.5% variation
Soundness ≤ 10% loss with sodium sulfate
Fineness modulus < 3.00
Admixtures All
Admixtures
Compatible with grout
Conform to ASTM C494
Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride
Use admixtures in accordance with Manufacturer’s
recommendations
Add admixtures separately to grout mix
Fly Ash Not permitted
Bonding
Agent
Epoxy resin with anti-corrosive properties
Grout Dry-Pack
Grout
Proportions (parts by
volume)
1 part cement
2 parts fine aggregate Water
reducing retarder
Sufficient water to make stiff
workable mix.

Cement
Grout
f’c ≥ 5000 psi within 28 days
Proportions (parts by
volume)
1 part cement
3 parts fine aggregate
Minimum amount of water to
make stiff workable mix.

Coloring Additive Blend white Portland cement with
regular cement as needed to
match adjacent concrete color
Project Owner GROUTING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 60 00 - 7

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
QuickSetting
Grout
f’c ≥2500 psi within 24 hours
Set time ≤90 minutes at 70°F to initial set
Color Non-staining
Non-Shrink
Grout Class
I
f’c ≥5000 psi per ASTM C39 at 28
days
Tensile Splitting
Strength
≥500 psi per ASTM C496 at 28
days
Flexural Strength ≥500 psi per ASTM C580 at 28
days
Bond Strength
(Concrete to Grout)
≥1900 psi per ASTM C882 at 28
days
Early-Age Height
Change
≤4.0% per ASTM C827
Shrinkage 0.0% per ASTM C827 and ASTM
C1090
Expansion ≤0.3% per ASTM C1090
Slump Rejection Limit ≤4” on any test per ASTM C143
Conform to ASTM C1107 Grade B or C when mixed to fluid, flowable, and plastic consistencies.

Prepackaged, inorganic, fluid, non-staining, noncorrosive, non-gas-liberating, non-metallic, free-flowing, cement-based grout requiring only addition of potable water.

Grout, when tested, shall not bleed or segregate and
maximum allowed water.

Do not use cement from kilns burning metal-rich hazardous waste fuel.

Grout shall be free of chlorides or corrosive additives.

Formulate grout for use at any consistency from fluid to plastic.

Manufacturer’s application instruction shall be printed on container, bag, or packaging.

Non-Shrink
Grout Class
II
f’c ≥7500 psi per ASTM C39 at 28
days
Tensile Splitting
Strength
≥500 psi per ASTM C496 at 28
days
Project Owner GROUTING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 60 00 - 8

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Flexural Strength ≥500 psi per ASTM C580 at 28
days
Bond Strength
(Concrete to Grout)
≥1900 psi per ASTM C882 at 28
days
Slump Rejection Limit ≤4” on any test per ASTM C143
Conform to ASTM C1107 Grade B or C when tested using
amount of water needed to achieve fluid consistency per ASTM C939
Prepackaged, inorganic, fluid, non-staining, noncorrosive, non-gas-liberating, non-metallic, free-flowing, cement-based grout requiring only addition of potable water.

Grout, when tested, shall not bleed or segregate and
maximum allowed water.

Do not use cement from kilns burning metal-rich hazardous waste fuel.

Grout shall be free of chlorides or corrosive additives.

Grout shall have extended working time of ≥30 minutes
when mixed to fluid consistency as defined in ASTM C827 at temperature extremes of 45-90°F in accordance with
ASTM C1107.

Formulate grout for use at any consistency from fluid to plastic.

Manufacturer’s application instruction shall be printed on container, bag, or packaging.

Structural
Repair
Grout
f’c ≥6000 psi per ASTM C109 at 7
days
Bond Strength
(Concrete to Grout)
≥2000 psi at 1 day per ASTM
C882
Slump Rejection Limit ≤4” on any test per ASTM C143
Extended-set pre-packaged cement-based mortar requiring only addition of potable water.

Grout shall be free of chlorides or lime other than that contained within hydraulic cement composition.

For repairs > 2 ft3, structural repair grout may be extended by adding clean, damp, coarse aggregate per
Manufacturer’s recommendations.

Curing
Materials
Refer to Section 03 39 00 and Manufacturer’s
recommendations.

Project Owner GROUTING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 60 00 - 9

2.3 Mixes
A. Measure grouts as follows:

1. Measure cement grout accurately by volume using containers. Do not use shovel measurements.

2. For prepackaged grouts, measure ingredients by means recommended by Manufacturer.

B. Mix grouts as follows:

1. Mix grouts to consistency needed to fill grouted space for each application.

2. Mix grout for at least one minute. Agitate diluted grout to keep ingredients mixed.

3. “Dry-pack” consistency shall mean plastic and moldable grout that will not flow.

4. Adjust slump for topping grout and concrete/grout fill to match placement and finishing conditions but do not exceed specified maximum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to install grout before submitting shop drawings or ordering.

Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

B. Preparation for grouting beneath equipment base plates shall proceed as follows:

1. Size concrete equipment pads for equipment bases to be grouted so when equipment base is fully grouted, grout is stopped not less than 1.0“ from pad edge.

2. Block out original concrete or finish concrete off sufficient distance below equipment mounting plates to provide at least 1” grout thickness or other thickness shown.

3. Complete mechanical, electrical, and finish work prior to placing topping or concrete/grout fill.

C. Preparation for non-shrink grouting to cement dowels and adhesive anchors in place shall proceed as follows:

1. Install drilled anchors in concrete having minimum age of 21 days at time of anchor installation.

2. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes.

3. Unless otherwise shown, when non-shrink-grout anchors are used to resist tensile forces in structural applications, embedment depth shall equal or exceed development length (ld) determined in accordance with ACI 318 for cast in place reinforcing bars of same diameter and grade, unless it can be shown by calculation anchor spacing and edge distance is sufficient to develop tensile strength of anchor using lesser depth of embedment. Submit calculations.

4. Exercise care in drilling to avoid damaging existing reinforcing or embedded items. Take precautions as necessary to avoid damaging prestressing tendons, electrical and communications conduit, and piping.

5. Adjust locations of drilled holes to avoid damage to reinforcing bars or embedded items.

6. Relocation of drilled holes and adjustments or modifications to anchored or fastened items shall be considered part of Work and provided at no additional cost to Owner.

7. Notify Owner’s Representative if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling.

8. Do not core drill holes, unless separately accepted.

Project Owner GROUTING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 60 00 - 10

9. Clean holes with water under pressure prior to grout and anchor installation.

10. Drill, brush, and clean holes in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions.

D. Do not place grout until base concrete has attained its design strength.

E. Do not place grout in freezing weather unless adequate protection is provided in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations.

F. Contact grout Manufacturer’s representative for assistance on hot- and cold-weather grouting techniques and precautions if applicable.

G. When cementitious grouts are used on concrete surfaces, saturate concrete surface with water for 24 hours prior to placement. Upon completion of saturation period, remove excess water with clean, oil-free compressed air prior to grouting.

H. Surface preparation, curing, and protection of cement grout shall conform to Section 03 39

00. I. Surfaces in contact with grout shall be free of dirt, loose rust, oil, wax, grease, curing compounds, laitance, loose concrete, and other deleterious materials.

J. Wash concrete surfaces clean and keep moist for at least 24 hours before placing non-shrink cementitious or cement grout. Achieve saturation by covering concrete with saturated burlap bags, use of soaker hoses, or flooding. Upon completion of 24-hour pre-soak, remove visible water from surface before grouting.

K. Shade Work from sunlight for at least 24 hours before and 48 hours after grouting.

L. Apply bonding agent to existing surfaces before applying grout.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to 02 05 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install grout at locations shown on Plans.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

2. Applicable building code requirements

3. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

E. Install grout to tolerances recommended by Manufacturer. Unless otherwise shown, install grout true and level using precision gauges and levels.

F. Dry-pack grout shall be installed as follows:

1. Use dry-pack grout for built-up surfaces, setting miscellaneous metal items and minor repairs.

2. Roughen surfaces required to be built up with dry-pack grout by brushing, cleaning, and coating with bonding agent specified in this section before applying grout.

3. Apply dry-pack grout immediately after applying bonding compound. Apply grout in bands or strips to form a smooth covering of required thickness.

4. Slope construction joints in grout. Clean and wet construction joints before resuming application.

5. Cure dry-pack grout in accordance with Section 03 39 00.

G. Cement grout shall be installed as follows:

Project Owner GROUTING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 60 00 - 11

1. Cement grout may be used for filling nonbearing portions of equipment pads.

2. Mixing and placing apparatus shall be similar to that used for cast-in-place concrete.

H. Non-shrink grout shall be installed as follows:

1. Use non-shrink grout for bearing surfaces of machinery and equipment bases, column baseplates and bearing plates, and as indicated on the Plans.

2. Place non-shrink grout in accordance with grout Manufacturer's instructions.

3. Grout structural columns, equipment, and piping support bases, unless otherwise shown.

4. Grout forms for grouting beneath equipment base plates shall be tight against retaining surfaces, and joints shall be sealed liquid-tight as recommended by grout Manufacturer.

5. Coat forms as recommended by grout Manufacturer for easy form release.

6. After base plate is set in position at proper elevation by steel wedges or double nuts on anchor bolts, fill space between bottom of plate and original concrete pour with non-shrinktype grout through headbox of appropriate size.

7. For grouting beneath base plates, mixture of fluid consistency shall be poured continuously into space between plate and base concrete.

8. Ensure grout space is filled.

9. Where methods of placement are not practical or where required by Owner’s Representative, submit alternate grouting methods for acceptance by Owner’s Representative.

I. Refer to Section 03 39 00 for curing procedures.

J. Finish of grout surface shall match adjacent concrete unless otherwise shown.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. If cement-based non-shrink grout Work requires more than 5 cubic yards of grout, Manufacturer shall provide training session to Contractor’s employees and Owner’s Representative before grout is installed. Contractor’s employees who will perform grouting shall assist in grout mixing. Installation and testing during training.

1. Use at least 5 bags of cement-based non-shrink Class 1 grout mixed to fluid consistency.

2. Conduct flow cone and bleed tests.

3. Make 6 test cubes at 1, 3, and 28 days.

4. Place remaining grout.

5. Initiate curing on actual project placements, such as baseplates and tie holes to provide on-the-job training for Contractor and Owner’s Representative.

6. Training session shall include grout curing.

7. Manufacturer shall mix enough cement-based non-shrink Class II grout for at least 15 tie holes, and provide hands-on training in installing and curing grout to seal tie holes.

8. Transport test cubes to independent test laboratory. Obtain test reports, and report demonstration and training test cube strengths to Owner’s Representative.

B. Field testing shall include:

Project Owner GROUTING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 03 60 00 - 12

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Cement
Grout
Mix
Material
Properties
ASTM C1019 2 samples per
day
Contractor Contractor
Non-Shrink
Grout
Compressive
Strength
ASTM C1107 3 samples per
batch (7-day
test) + 3
samples per
batch (28-day
test) from first
placement of
each grout
type and at
intervals
directed by
Owner’s
Representative
Owner Contractor
Construction
Tolerance
Refer to Section 03
30 00.

Installation &
Leakage
Visual inspection of
finished installation
1 inspection Owner Owner
Field
Performance
Demonstrate
compliance to
Contract
Documents and
Manufacturer’s
printed literature
1 test Contractor Contractor
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate
compliance to
Contract
Documents and
Manufacturer’s
printed literature
1 test Owner Contractor
C. Provide services of factory-authorized representative on-site within 72 hours of request as part of Work to provide:

1. Installation technical assistance, inspection.

2. Field testing and adjustment.

3. Instruction of Owner’s personnel in operation and maintenance.

END OF SECTION
Project Owner METAL FASTENINGS AND WELDS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 05 23 - 1
SECTION 05 05 23

METAL FASTENINGS AND WELDS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Basic requirements for metal fastenings and welds.

B. Refer to Section 05 50 00 for anchor bolts and other metal fabrications.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 66 00: Product Storage and Handling Requirements E. Section 01 73 24: Seismic Restraint
F. Section 01 73 33: Mechanical Identification
G. Section 01 77 00: Closeout Procedures
H. Section 05 50 00: Metal Fabrications
I. Section 33 05 31: Pipeline Joint Materials
J. Section 33 05 38: Hangers and Supports

1.3 Quality Assurance
A. Employ only competent workers on Work. Employed persons found to be incompetent, intemperate, troublesome, disorderly, or otherwise objectionable or who fail to perform Work properly, acceptably and in accordance with Manufacturers’ installation and warranty requirements, shall be immediately removed from Work by Contractor and not reemployed on Work.

1. Welders shall be AWS certified for type of work they are performing.

1.4 Quality Assurance
A. Unless otherwise indicated, nondestructive tests shall conform to applicable sections of ASTM Standards, Part 11, “Metallography; Nondestructive Tests.”

1. Unless otherwise noted, determine standard for nondestructive testing applicable to material and manufacturing method used.

2. Extent of examination and basis for acceptance shall be agreed upon between Owner’s Representative and Contractor.

3. Contractor’s Shop Drawings submitted for review shall define areas, extent, and type of nondestructive examination.

4. Weld inspection and acceptance criteria shall conform to AWS D1.1.

5. Certify personnel performing and interpreting nondestructive examinations have been qualified as Level II or III examiners in accordance with ASNT SNT-TC-1A.

B. Factory testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Weld
Nondestructive
Examination
Before and
After StressRelieving
All Welds Visual Inspection (VT) 100% of total
length
Contractor Contractor
Plate Edge
Preparation
Prior to Thick
Plate Welding
Liquid penetrant (PT) 100% of total
length
Contractor Contractor
Project Owner METAL FASTENINGS AND WELDS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 05 23 - 2

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Fillet Welds
between Main
Components
Magnetic particle (MT) or liquid
penetrant (PT) examination
100% of total
length
Contractor Contractor
Fillet Welds
Including Welds
between
Stiffeners and
Main Beam
Members
Magnetic particle (MT) or liquid
penetrant (PT) examination
25% of total
length selected
at random
Contractor Contractor
Partial
Penetration
Welds
Magnetic particle (MT), liquid
penetrant (PT), or ultrasonic (UT)
examination
25% of total
length selected
at random
Contractor Contractor
Full-Penetration
Welds other
than Butt Welds
Ultrasonic (UT) examination
followed by radiographic
examination (RT if results are not
clear, or by MT or PT if RT is not
feasible.
100% of total
length
Contractor Contractor
Butt Welds RT and PT or MT, or UT followed
by PT or MT and PT, if RT is not
feasible
100% of total
length
Contractor Contractor
Back-Gouging
Full Penetration
or Butt Welds
PT or MT for pressure vessels. As
agreed upon between Contractor
and Owner for other mechanical
equipment
100% of total
length
Contractor Contractor
Equipment Welds VT, UT or RT Spot-check as
requested by
Owner
Contractor Contractor
C. Repair defective welds.

1. Defective welds found after stress relieving may require additional stress relieving after weld repairs and re-examination of welds, as agreed upon between Contractor and Owner’s Representative

1.5 References
A. Reference publications listed below and in various sections form part of specification to extent referenced. These are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. AISC 360 Specification for Structural Steel Buildings

2. AISC 341 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings

3. ASME/ANSI B1.1 Unified Inch Screw Threads

4. ASME/ANSI B31.1 Power Piping

5. ASNT SNT-TC-1A Recommended Practice

6. ASTM A193 Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service

7. ASTM A194 Carbon and Alloy-Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure or High-Temperature Service, or both.

8. ASTM A307 Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 psi Tensile Strength

9. ASTM B21 Naval Brass Rod

10. ASTM E165 Liquid Penetrant Examination for General Industry

11. ASTM E433 Reference Photographs for Liquid Penetrant Inspection

12. ASTM E709 Magnetic Particle Testing

13. ASTM F3125 High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength, Inch and Metric Dimensions

14. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code

15. California Administrative Code, Title 8, “Construction Safety Orders”

16. California Building Code (CBC)

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

Project Owner METAL FASTENINGS AND WELDS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 05 23 - 3

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Welder and Weld
Qualifications
Submit welding operator qualifications.

Submit welding Personnel Qualification Records.

Submit welding Inspector qualifications.

Submit welding rod control procedures.

Submit weld Procedure Specifications.

Submit weld Procedure Qualifications Records.

Shop Drawings Show welds on applicable Shop Drawings
Show weld type using AWS symbols.

Show weld procedure to be employed.

Show examination procedures to be applied.

Welding Procedure
Specifications (WPS) and
Procedure Qualification
Records (PQR)
Submit written WPSs and PQRs unless requirement is waived by Owner’s Representative.

Welder Procedure
Qualification (WPQ)
Certificates
Prior to start of Work for factory or field fabrication, submit written WPQs using sample forms in AWS D1.1 or similar forms unless requirement is waived by Owner’s Representative.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 / 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of products.

1.8 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid for which such Work is appurtenant.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for metal fastenings and welds.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials
A. Where not otherwise shown, use the following list of material specifications, which are acceptable for intended purposes, as referenced for selecting standard, types, and grades of materials used.

Material Group Application Specification
Bolting
Low Carbon Steel General purpose Conform to ASTM A307, galvanized High Strength Alloy Steel Structural joints Conform to ASTM F3125, galvanized Stainless Steel “CRES” Corrosion-resistant Conform to ASTM A193 SAE Type 316 or SAE Type 304
Naval Brass Corrosion-resistant Conform to ASTM B21
B. Fasteners, bolts, nuts, screws, rivets, and threads, shall conform to US standards and the following.

1. Screw threads for screws, bolts, nuts, and other threaded hardware shall conform to ANSI B1.1.

2. Connections, fasteners, and mountings required to install products shall conform to connections and mountings shown in Contract Documents and Submittals on locationspecific basis.

3. Unless otherwise shown, furnish and install Type 316 stainless steel nuts, bolts, and washers on bolted connections.

Project Owner METAL FASTENINGS AND WELDS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 05 23 - 4

4. Liberally apply anti-seize thread lubricant to threaded portion of stainless steel bolts during assembly.

5. Do not assume acceptance of connections, fasteners, or mountings at one location constitutes acceptance of same at all locations.

6. Screws, bolts, and nuts shall be provided with locking devices. Selection of locking means shall consider service conditions and the following:
a. On parts subject to vibration and on connections requiring repeated adjustment or which are not accessible (such as bolts or nuts inside hydraulic cylinders), provide positive reusable locking device on bolts, such as castellated nuts with cotter pins or soft copper lock plate or washer bent over nut and fixed point on structure. b. On other parts, use positive reusable locking devices or spring steel lock washers on bolts.
c. Use lock washers in combination with chemical thread-locking compound when required.
d. Chemical locking compound shall be manufactured for purpose of locking threaded connections, such as Loctite as manufactured by Loctite Corporation, or equal. e. Selection of chemical locking compound shall consider requirements for disassembly and maintenance.

7. Anchor bolts, nuts, and washers shall be adequate for intended use. a. Anchor bolts shall be complete with required flat washers, lock washers, and nuts. b. Furnish anchor bolts as part of each piece of equipment. c. Refer to Section 01 73 24 for requirements for seismic design of anchor bolts.

C. Welding, welded joints and structures fabricated by welding shall conform to the following.

Ensure suppliers and subcontractors comply with these requirements as they apply to manufactured equipment.

1. Selection of welding processes and development of weld procedures is part of design process established by Contractor and shall consider stress levels and use of each component.

2. Ensure weld joints are designed and sized in accordance with current engineering standards and practices for each class of equipment.

3. Design, produce, qualify, inspect, and repair structural and non-structural welds in accordance with AWS D1.1.

4. Design, produce, qualify, inspect, and repair pipe and pipe related welds in accordance with ASME B31.1.

5. Design, produce, qualify, inspect, and repair welds for pressure vessels or pressure containing parts to accepted welding rules of ASME §VIII and §IX.

6. Welded components and assemblies, to be machined, shall be stress relieved prior to final machining.

7. Perform stress relief in accordance with applicable welding specifications referenced above.

8. Welds shall be continuous, unless otherwise noted or approved. Welds shall be even, with no contact gaps, or crevices left between members or unfilled re-entrant corners that would harbor moisture or dirt and prevent satisfactory application and retention of corrosion protective system.

9. Do not undercut at welded joints.

Project Owner METAL FASTENINGS AND WELDS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 05 23 - 5
D. Welding procedures shall be as follows.

1. Perform welding by electric-arc method, by process at least equal to that required by Standard Qualification Procedure of American Welding Society.

2. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) for welds shall be qualified per applicable Codes.

3. WPS submittals shall be accepted by Owner’s Representative prior to use for fabrication.

4. Ensure accepted WPSs are in presence of welding personnel prior to production welding.

5. Ensure contents of WPS are being followed.

6. Acceptance and repair of mill-induced discontinuities shall be handled as described in applicable AWS or ASME code sections.

7. Arc strikes and temporary welds in critical locations shall be completely removed, inspected and repaired per AWS D1.1.

8. Welding shall only be done on materials above 50°F on dry surfaces.

9. Short-circuiting arc GMAW is prohibited.

E. Qualification of welders shall be as follows.

1. Welding Performance Qualification (WPQs) records for welding personnel shall be qualified per AWS D1.1.

2. Test welders and welding operators in accordance with these Codes.

3. Welders and welding operators shall have in their possession, valid qualification records for welding positions and welding processes used.

4. Maintain welder qualification test records and keep current for duration of Work.

5. When cause exists to question a welder’s ability to make welds in accordance with these requirements, Owner may request welder in question be retested.

6. Retrain or replace welders who cannot maintain quality level as specified to satisfaction of Owner’s Representative.

7. Furnish proof welding operators and welders possess requisite qualifications. Allow Owner’s Representative to witness shop radiography. Free access shall be allowed to radiographic film records. Furnish necessary copies of test reports, together with copies of supplier’s test reports on welding rod.

F. Welding equipment shall be as follows.

1. Welding equipment, such as welding machines, torches, transformers, cables, and electrodes, for welding at site shall be of reputable make and maintained in such condition as to enable qualified welders, welding operators, and tack welders to follow qualified welding procedures.

2. Provide consumable material (electrodes etc.).

3. Storage and handling practices of welding consumables shall conform to Manufacturer’s recommendations.

4. Handle, store, and condition SMAW electrodes as outlined in AWS D1.1.

5. Use only low hydrogen electrodes for SMAW.

6. Choose filler metals to suit base metal and process used in accordance with above referenced standards.

Project Owner METAL FASTENINGS AND WELDS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 05 23 - 6
G. Dissimilar metals, when used in conjunction with each other shall have insulation provided between adjoining surfaces to eliminate direct contact and resultant current.

1. Materials of construction shall be cathodically compatible to preclude galvanic action.

2. Where dissimilar metals may contact, provide insulation between adjoining surfaces to eliminate direct contact and galvanic action.

3. Electrolytic insulation shall be bituminous impregnated felt, heavy bituminous coatings, nonmetallic separators, bushings, washers, or other accepted materials.

H. For purposes of chemical compatibility, use the following materials for valves, pipe fittings, pipe, elastomers, and bolts unless otherwise recommended by Manufacturer and accepted by Owner:

ENVIRONMENTAL

OR CHEMICAL

EXPOSURE

STRENGTH ACCEPTABLE

BOLTING
METALS

ACCEPTABLE

PIPE AND

VALVE BODY
METALS

ACCEPTABLE

PIPE AND
VALVE

PLASTICS

ACCEPTABLE
TANK

MATERIALS

ACCEPTABLE

ELASTOMERS

ENVIRONMENTS
Raw Water n/a 316SS Bronze, CIP,

DIP, CML&C
Steel, SS

PVC, CPVC,
HDPE
FRP / Crosslinked HDPE
SG≥1.35

BUNA N,
EPDM,
PTFE Teflon®
Recycled Water n/a 316SS Bronze, CIP,

DIP, CML&C
Steel, SS

PVC, CPVC,
HDPE
FRP / Crosslinked HDPE
SG≥1.35
EPDM,
PTFE Teflon®
Direct Sunlight n/a 316SS Bronze, CIP,

DIP, CML&C
Steel, SS
Painted CPVC,
Painted PVC,
HDPE
FRP / Crosslinked HDPE EPDM
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Prepare surfaces for welding as follows

1. Cut members and sections to be joined by welding accurately to size, with edges sheared, flame-cut or machined to suit required type of welding and to allow full penetration.

2. Surfaces of members or sections to be welded shall be free from rust, grease, and other foreign matters for at least 2” back from weld edge.

3. Accurately cut plates to be joined by welding to size.

4. Roll by pressure to proper curvature, which shall be continuous from edge.

5. Do not flatten curvature along edges with correction by blows.

6. Dimensions and shape of edges to be joined shall allow thorough fusion and penetration.

7. Plate edges shall be properly formed to accommodate welding conditions.

8. If tack welds are used in weld groove, remove each tack before welding operation.

9. Accurately align butt joints and retain in position during welding operations so at finished joint projection of one plate beyond its adjoining plate is ≤1/16”.

10. Throat gap for butt joints shall be ≤⅛”.

11. Where possible, design joints so welding may be done in down-hand, vertical or horizontal position.

12. Backing plates or other reinforcement on both faces of weld on butt joints shall be chipped and ground flush with surrounding plate.

Project Owner METAL FASTENINGS AND WELDS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 05 23 - 7

13. When welding plates, of which one or both exceed 1” thickness, preheat contiguous areas of plates around welding operation to not less than 160°F and keep at uniform temperature throughout process.

14. Measure temperature using Tempilstiks or other accepted means.

15. Use low hydrogen electrodes where necessary.